HIPASE - Datasheets-Description of System Components PDF

HIPASE Datasheets
Description of System Components
© 2019 by ANDRITZ HYDRO GmbH

Page: 2 (total 466)
Identification DGB-004-1
Version.Revision 1.04
Date of Issue 09.05.2019
This document is valid for following product:
HIPASE Platform as of V 1.06.00
© 2019 by ANDRITZ HYDRO GmbH, All Rights reserved.

The distribution and reproduction of this document, or any part thereof - regardless of whatever
manner - is prohibited without the express written permission of ANDRITZ HYDRO. Technical
data are used only for product description and are not warranted properties in the legal sense.
Changes - including technical aspects - are reserved.
HIPASE | Hardware Datasheets

DGB-004-1.04
Page: 3 (total 466)
1. TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. T AB L E O F CO NT E NT S ................................................................ ............... 3
2. CO NT E NT AN D T A RG ET G RO U P O F T H IS D O CU M EN T ..............................18
2.1. Content structure of the present Data Sheets ............................................................................... 19
3. O RD E R D AT A A ND O RD ER PR O C E DU RE ..................................................20
3.1. HIPASE Device - Product Code .................................................................................................... 21

3.1.1. Material number of device ............................................................................................................. 21
3.1.2. Configuration code of device ......................................................................................................... 22
3.1.3. Example of a configuration code with explanation ........................................................................ 24
3.2. HIPASE Device - Scope of Delivery .............................................................................................. 25
3.3. HIPASE Spare part - Product Code............................................................................................... 26
3.3.1. Material number of spare part........................................................................................................ 26
3.3.2. Configuration code of spare part ................................................................................................... 27
3.3.3. Example of a configuration code with explanation ........................................................................ 28
3.3.4. Spare parts without Configuration Code ........................................................................................ 29
3.4. HIPASE Spare part - Scope of Delivery ........................................................................................ 30
4. MO U NT ING ..............................................................................................31
4.1. Mounting Kit for Flush mounting in 19" (swing) frame ................................................................... 31
4.2. Dimension drawing HIPASE device for panel mounting ............................................................... 34
4.3. Dimension drawing HIPASE device for flush mounting ................................................................. 36
4.4. Dimension drawing Touch panel for flush mounting ..................................................................... 38
5. NA M E PL AT E AN D S E RI A L NU M B ER .........................................................40
5.1. Name Plate of Device .................................................................................................................... 40

5.2. Name Plate of Spare Part .............................................................................................................. 44
5.3. Adhesive Label for Serial Number ................................................................................................. 46
6. EN V IR O N M ENT A L R E Q UI R EM E NT S ..........................................................47
6.1. EC Declaration of Conformity ........................................................................................................ 47

6.2. Electromagnetic Compatibility (acc. to IEC 60255-26) .................................................................. 48
6.3. Additional safety information.......................................................................................................... 49
6.4. Climatic stress (acc. to IEC EN 60255-27) .................................................................................... 50
6.5. Mechanical stress (acc. to IEC EN 60255-27)............................................................................... 51
7. HI P A S E EQ UI P M ENT M AI NT EN A NC E ........................................................52
8. MT BF C A LC UL AT IO N ( M E AN T IM E BETW EEN F A IL UR E) ............................52

DGB-004-1.04
Page: 4 (total 466)
9. A LL H I P A SE H A RDW ARE C O M PO N ENT S ...................................................53
10 . B A SI C FU NCT IO N S I N H AR DW ARE CO M PO NE NT S ....................................57
11 . A B- 31 0 A P P LI C AT IO N B O A R D EX C IT AT IO N ................................ ...............59
11.1. Features ......................................................................................................................................... 59

11.2. Term definition ............................................................................................................................... 60
11.3. Order and technical data ............................................................................................................... 61
11.4. Number of boards in HIPASE device ............................................................................................ 62
11.5. Gate Pulse Outputs of Gate Control .............................................................................................. 63
11.5.1. Technical data................................................................................................................................ 63
11.5.2. Connection diagram ....................................................................................................................... 64
11.6. Field / Rotor Voltage Input ............................................................................................................. 65
11.6.1. Technical data................................................................................................................................ 65
11.6.2. Board parameter ............................................................................................................................ 67
11.7. Field / Rotor Current Inputs ........................................................................................................... 70
11.7.1. Technical data................................................................................................................................ 70
11.7.2. Board parameter ............................................................................................................................ 72
11.8. Synchronization Voltage Inputs of Gate Control............................................................................ 74
11.8.1. Technical Data ............................................................................................................................... 74
11.8.2. Diagrams of Synchronizing and Lock-in range .............................................................................. 76
11.8.3. Board parameter ............................................................................................................................ 78
11.9. Thyristor conductivity monitoring, POU BridgeSupervision ........................................................... 80
11.10. Digital Input Gate Pulse Blocking GPB .......................................................................................... 81
11.10.1. Technical data................................................................................................................................ 81
11.10.2. Jumper setting for switching threshold .......................................................................................... 82
11.11. Digital Output Gate Pulse Blocking GPBON / GPBOFF ............................................................... 83
11.11.1. Technical Data ............................................................................................................................... 83
11.11.2. Data points ..................................................................................................................................... 84
11.11.3. Connection Diagram ...................................................................................................................... 85
11.11.4. Logic Behavior ............................................................................................................................... 86
11.12. Gate pulse modes .......................................................................................................................... 87
11.12.1. Special pulse mode: Gate blocking ............................................................................................... 87
11.12.2. Pulse mode: Rectifier mode (Diode operation) .............................................................................. 87
11.12.3. Pulse mode: Free-wheeling mode ................................................................................................. 87
11.12.4. Pulse mode: Thyristor normal mode .............................................................................................. 87
11.12.5. Pulse mode: Thyristor inverter mode ............................................................................................. 88
11.13. Error Impact Table ......................................................................................................................... 88
11.14. Connection diagram AB-310.......................................................................................................... 89
11.15. Terminal assignment of terminal strips (X1, X2)............................................................................ 90

DGB-004-1.04
Page: 5 (total 466)
11.16. Connection for Shield Grounding................................................................................................... 91

11.17. Equipping options with extension modules .................................................................................... 92
11.18. Mechanical terminal coding ........................................................................................................... 92
11.19. Accessories, Spare parts ............................................................................................................... 93
11.20. Validity ........................................................................................................................................... 94
12 . A B- 32 0 A P P LI C AT IO N B O A R D PR O T ECT IO N ................................ .............95
12.1. Features ......................................................................................................................................... 95

12.2. Order and technical data ............................................................................................................... 96
12.3. NUMBER OF boards IN THE HIPASE DEVICE............................................................................ 97
12.4. Protective functions, which require AB-320 ................................................................................... 98
12.5. Analog Input ................................................................................................................................... 99
12.5.1. Technical Data ............................................................................................................................... 99
12.5.2. Data points - Inputs ...................................................................................................................... 100
12.5.3. Board Parameters ........................................................................................................................ 100
12.5.4. Connection of Analog Input ......................................................................................................... 101
12.6. Analog Output .............................................................................................................................. 102
12.6.1. Technical Data ............................................................................................................................. 102
12.6.2. Data points - Outputs ................................................................................................................... 103
12.6.3. Board parameter .......................................................................................................................... 103
12.6.4. Connection of Analog Output....................................................................................................... 103
12.7. Temperature Measuring via PT100 ............................................................................................. 104
12.7.1. Technical data.............................................................................................................................. 104
12.7.4. Connection diagram ..................................................................................................................... 105
12.7.5. Plant calibration for temperature measuring via PT100 for 2-wire connection ............................ 106
12.7.6. Plant calibration temperature detection for pt100 for 3 or 4-wire connection .............................. 108
12.8. 100% Stator Earth Fault detection with 20Hz shift ...................................................................... 109
12.8.1. Technical Data ............................................................................................................................. 110
12.8.2. Logic diagram of 20Hz stator earth fault protection ..................................................................... 111
12.8.4. Board Parameter ......................................................................................................................... 112
12.8.6. Plant calibration for Stator Earth Fault detection ......................................................................... 113
12.9. Rotor earth fault detection ........................................................................................................... 114
12.9.1. Technical data.............................................................................................................................. 114
12.9.3. Board parameters ........................................................................................................................ 115
12.9.5. Plant calibration for Rotor Earth Fault detection .......................................................................... 118
12.10. SFC Earth Fault Detection ........................................................................................................... 119
12.10.1. Technical Data ............................................................................................................................. 119

DGB-004-1.04
Page: 6 (total 466)

12.10.3. Bord Parameters .......................................................................................................................... 120
12.10.4. External Connection .................................................................................................................... 121
12.11. Shaft Current Supervision ............................................................................................................ 122
12.11.1. Technical data.............................................................................................................................. 123
12.11.2. Datapoint - Outputs ...................................................................................................................... 123
12.11.3. Bord Parameters .......................................................................................................................... 124
12.12. Connection diagram AB-320........................................................................................................ 125
12.13. Terminal assignment of terminal strips (X1, X2) .......................................................................... 126
12.14. Connection of Shield Grounding .................................................................................................. 127
12.15. Equipping options with extension modules .................................................................................. 128
12.16. Mechanical terminal coding ......................................................................................................... 128
12.17. Accessories, Spare parts ............................................................................................................. 129
12.18. Validity ......................................................................................................................................... 129
13 . A B- 33 0 A P P LI C AT IO N B O A R D T UR B IN E G O V ER NO R ............................... 13 0
13.1. Features ....................................................................................................................................... 130

13.2. Term definition ............................................................................................................................. 131
13.3. Order and technical data ............................................................................................................. 131
13.4. AB-330 Speed data points - Outputs ........................................................................................... 132
13.5. Analog Inputs ............................................................................................................................... 133
13.5.1. Technical data.............................................................................................................................. 133
13.6. Analog Outputs ............................................................................................................................ 137
13.6.1. Technical Data ............................................................................................................................. 137
13.6.2. Data points - Input ....................................................................................................................... 138
13.6.3. Data points - Output ..................................................................................................................... 138
13.7. Voltage Input for electrical speed measuring .............................................................................. 141
13.7.1. Technical Data ............................................................................................................................. 141
13.7.2. Voltage input VT-01 data points - Outputs .................................................................................. 142
13.7.3. Voltage input VT-02 data points - Outputs .................................................................................. 142
13.7.5. Connection of Voltage Input ........................................................................................................ 143
13.8. PID controller for positioning circuits ........................................................................................... 143
13.8.1. Transfer function of PID controller ............................................................................................... 143
13.9. Connection diagram AB-330........................................................................................................ 144
13.10. Terminal assignment of terminal strips (X1, X2).......................................................................... 145

DGB-004-1.04
Page: 7 (total 466)

13.15. Validity ......................................................................................................................................... 147
14 . A M- 0 1 0 A P P LI C AT IO N M O DU L E (6 A I, 4 AO , 4 PT 10 0) ................................ 14 8
14.1. Features ....................................................................................................................................... 148

14.2. Ordering data and technical data................................................................................................. 149
14.3. Analog Inputs ............................................................................................................................... 150
14.3.1. Technical Data ............................................................................................................................. 150
14.3.2. Configuration of measuring range ............................................................................................... 151
14.4. Temperature Measuring .............................................................................................................. 155
14.4.1. Technical Data ............................................................................................................................. 155
14.4.2. Data points - Temperature Inputs ................................................................................................ 155
14.4.3. Board parameter .......................................................................................................................... 156
14.4.4. 2-wire connection of Temperature Measuring ............................................................................. 156
14.4.5. 3-wire connection of Temperature Measuring ............................................................................. 156
14.5. Analog Outputs ............................................................................................................................ 157
14.5.1. Technical Data ............................................................................................................................. 157
14.5.2. Data points - Output ..................................................................................................................... 158
14.5.3. Board parameter .......................................................................................................................... 158
14.6. Connection diagram AM-010 ....................................................................................................... 159
14.7. Terminal assignment of terminal strip (X1, X2) ........................................................................... 160
14.8. Connection for Shield Grounding................................................................................................. 161
14.9. Usage each application ............................................................................................................... 162
14.12. Validity ......................................................................................................................................... 163
15 . A M- 0 2 0 A P P LI C AT IO N M O DU L E (6 A I, 8 AO , 2 SM ) ..................................... 16 4
15.1. Features ....................................................................................................................................... 164

15.2. Order and technical data ............................................................................................................. 165
15.3. Analog Inputs ............................................................................................................................... 166
15.3.1. Technical data.............................................................................................................................. 166
15.3.5. Wire break monitoring .................................................................................................................. 168

DGB-004-1.04
Page: 8 (total 466)
15.4. Speed measurement with tooth wheel ........................................................................................ 171

15.4.1. Technical Data ............................................................................................................................. 171
15.4.2. Speed sensor input SI-01 Data points - Outputs ......................................................................... 172
15.4.3. Speed sensor input SI-02 Data points - Outputs ......................................................................... 173
15.4.5. Connection of Speed sensor input .............................................................................................. 173
15.4.6. Wire break monitoring .................................................................................................................. 174
15.5. Analog Outputs ............................................................................................................................ 176
15.5.1. Technical Data ............................................................................................................................. 176
15.6. Connection diagram AM-020 ....................................................................................................... 180
15.7. Terminal assignment of terminal strips (X1, X2) .......................................................................... 181
15.11. Validity ......................................................................................................................................... 183
16 . CP - 3 0 0 P RO C E S SO R BO A RD .................................................................. 18 4
16.1. Features ....................................................................................................................................... 184

16.3. Interfaces ..................................................................................................................................... 186
16.4. Indication and operating elements (HMI): LEDs and Button ....................................................... 191
16.5. Connection diagram ..................................................................................................................... 193
16.7. Validity ......................................................................................................................................... 194
17 . CS - 3 2 0 HO U S ING M E DI U M 4 2 H P 6U ....................................................... 19 5
17.1. Features ....................................................................................................................................... 195

17.2. Technical Data ............................................................................................................................. 196
17.3. Dimensional drawing ................................................................................................................... 198
17.4. Validity ......................................................................................................................................... 198
18 . CS - 3 3 0 HO U S ING LA RG E 84 H P 6 U ......................................................... 19 9
18.1. Features ....................................................................................................................................... 199

18.2. Technical Data ............................................................................................................................. 200
18.4. Validity ......................................................................................................................................... 202

DGB-004-1.04
Page: 9 (total 466)
19 . DI- 01 0 D IG IT A L M O D UL E 1 6D I ................................................................ 20 3
19.1. Features ....................................................................................................................................... 203

19.3. Technical Data of digital inputs .................................................................................................... 205
19.4. Data points ................................................................................................................................... 205
19.5. Board parameters ........................................................................................................................ 206
19.6. Sensor Supervision ...................................................................................................................... 207
19.7. Arc Forcing and Trip Circuit Supervision (TCS) .......................................................................... 208
19.8. Connection diagram DI-010 ......................................................................................................... 209
19.12. Validity ......................................................................................................................................... 212
20 . DO - 0 1 0 DIG IT A L MO D UL E 1 6D O ............................................................. 21 3
20.1. Features ....................................................................................................................................... 213

20.3. Technical Data of digital outputs.................................................................................................. 215
20.4. Data points ................................................................................................................................... 216
20.5. Board Parameters ........................................................................................................................ 216
20.6. Connection diagram DO-010 ....................................................................................................... 217
20.10. Validity ......................................................................................................................................... 220
21 . DX - 0 1 0 DIG IT A L MO D UL E 8 DI , 8D O ........................................................ 22 1
21.1. Features ....................................................................................................................................... 221

21.3. Digital Inputs ................................................................................................................................ 223
21.3.1. Arc Forcing and Trip Circuit Supervision (TCS) .......................................................................... 223
21.3.2. Technical Data ............................................................................................................................. 224
21.3.3. Data points ................................................................................................................................... 224
21.3.4. Board parameters ........................................................................................................................ 225
21.3.5. Sensor Supervision ...................................................................................................................... 226
21.4. Digital Outputs ............................................................................................................................. 227
21.4.1. Technical Data ............................................................................................................................. 227
21.4.2. Data points ................................................................................................................................... 228
21.5. Connection diagram DX-010 ....................................................................................................... 229

DGB-004-1.04
Page: 10 (total 466)

21.9. Validity ......................................................................................................................................... 232
22 . P S- 30 0 P OW ER S U P P L Y BO A RD 1 1 0/ 2 20 V D C W IT H 4 F SO ...................... 23 3
22.1. Features ....................................................................................................................................... 235

22.3. Power Supply ............................................................................................................................... 237
22.3.1. Technical Data ............................................................................................................................. 237
22.4. Digital Output Device Fault / Device Ready ................................................................................ 238
22.4.1. Technical Data ............................................................................................................................. 238
22.5. Digital Outputs FSO-01 .. 04........................................................................................................ 239
22.5.1. Technical Data ............................................................................................................................. 239
22.5.2. Data points ................................................................................................................................... 241
22.6. Connection diagram PS-300........................................................................................................ 242
22.11. Validity ......................................................................................................................................... 245
23 . P S- 50 0 P OW ER S U P P L Y BO A RD 2 4/ 6 0 VD C W IT H 4 F SO .......................... 24 6
23.1. Features ....................................................................................................................................... 248

23.3. Power Supply ............................................................................................................................... 250
23.3.1. Technical Data ............................................................................................................................. 250
23.4. Digital Outputs Device Fault / Device Ready ............................................................................... 251
23.4.1. Technical Data ............................................................................................................................. 251
23.5. Digital Outputs FSO-01 .. 04........................................................................................................ 252
23.5.1. Technical Data ............................................................................................................................. 252
23.5.2. Data points ................................................................................................................................... 254
23.6. Connection diagram PS-500........................................................................................................ 255
23.11. Validity ......................................................................................................................................... 258
24 . T P- 9 00 I NT ER N A L T O UC H P AN E L M E DI UM - A N D V AR I ANT S ................... 25 9
24.1. Features ....................................................................................................................................... 259

24.2. Ordering data ............................................................................................................................... 260

DGB-004-1.04
24.3. Technical Data ............................................................................................................................. 260

24.4. Accessories, spare parts ............................................................................................................. 261
24.6. Ethernet connection ..................................................................................................................... 263
24.7. Validity ......................................................................................................................................... 263
25 . T P- 9 05 EX T ER N AL T O UC H P A NE L M E DI U M - AN D V A RI A NT S .................. 26 4
25.1. Features ....................................................................................................................................... 265

25.3. Selection of auxiliary PoE supply level ........................................................................................ 266
25.4. Ethernet Connection .................................................................................................................... 267
25.5. Validity ......................................................................................................................................... 267
26 . T P- 9 50 I NT ER N A L T O UC H P AN E L L A RG E - AN D V A RI A NT S ..................... 26 8
26.1. Features ....................................................................................................................................... 268

26.3. Technical Data ............................................................................................................................. 269
26.4. Accessories, spare parts ............................................................................................................. 270
26.7. Validity ......................................................................................................................................... 272
27 . T P- 9 55 EX T ER N AL T O UC H P A NE L L A RG E - A N D V AR I ANT S .................... 27 3
27.1. Features ....................................................................................................................................... 274

27.3. Selection of auxiliary PoE supply level ........................................................................................ 275
27.5. Validity ......................................................................................................................................... 276
28 . T R- 30 0 T R A N SFO R M ER B O AR D 4 CT , 4VT ............................................... 27 7
28.1. Features ....................................................................................................................................... 277

28.3. Voltage Inputs .............................................................................................................................. 279
28.3.1. Technical Data ............................................................................................................................. 279
28.4. Current Inputs .............................................................................................................................. 282
28.4.1. Technical Data ............................................................................................................................. 282
28.5. Derived Variables ........................................................................................................................ 284
28.6. Connection diagram TR-330........................................................................................................ 285
28.7. Terminal assignment of CT screw terminal strip (X1).................................................................. 286

DGB-004-1.04
28.8. Terminal assignment of VT terminal strip (X2) ............................................................................ 286

28.10. Validity ......................................................................................................................................... 287
29 . T R- 31 0 T R A N SFO R M ER B O AR D 1 2CT , 8 VT ................................ ............. 28 8
29.1. Features ....................................................................................................................................... 288

29.3. Voltage Inputs .............................................................................................................................. 290
29.3.1. Technical Data ............................................................................................................................. 290
29.4. Current Inputs .............................................................................................................................. 293
29.4.1. Technical Data ............................................................................................................................. 293
29.5. Derived Variables ........................................................................................................................ 295
29.6. Connection diagram TR-310........................................................................................................ 296
29.7. Terminal assignment of CT screw terminal strip (X1).................................................................. 297
29.8. Terminal assignment of VT terminal strip (X2) ............................................................................ 298
29.11. Validity ......................................................................................................................................... 300
30 . DE FI NIT IO N S O F T E R M S F O R C UR R ENT A ND V O L T A G E T R AN S FO R M ER S 30 1
30.1. Voltage transformers ................................................................................................................... 301

30.1.1. Rated voltage UN ......................................................................................................................... 301
30.1.2. Rated ratio, transformation ratio, marking in the single-line diagram .......................................... 301
30.1.3. Error angle ................................................................................................................................... 301
30.2. Current transformers .................................................................................................................... 302
30.2.1. Rated current IN, marking in the single-line diagram ................................................................... 302
30.2.2. Error angle ................................................................................................................................... 302
30.2.3. Accuracy class ............................................................................................................................. 302
31 . PO L AR IT Y O F CU RR E NT A ND VO LT AG E T R AN S FO R M ER S ...................... 30 3
31.1. Possible polarity information on transformers ............................................................................. 303

31.2. Possible polarity information in circuit diagrams .......................................................................... 303
32 . CU RV E R E CO RD ING .............................................................................. 30 5
32.1. Term Definitions ........................................................................................................................... 306

32.2. HIPASE Device Interfaces ........................................................................................................... 306
32.3. Function Block Diagram Elements............................................................................................... 306
32.4. Automatic backup of the curve recording in the voltage-fail-safe memory .................................. 307
32.5. Technical Data ............................................................................................................................. 307

DGB-004-1.04
33 . CO M M UN IC AT IO N - O V ER V I EW .............................................................. 30 8
33.1. Currently supported station bus interfaces .................................................................................. 308

33.2. Supported Protocols .................................................................................................................... 309
34 . ST AT IO N BU S PRO T O CO L ̶ I E C 60 8 70 - 5- 1 03 ......................................... 31 0
34.1. General ........................................................................................................................................ 310

34.2. Requirements for Use .................................................................................................................. 310
34.3. Data points IEC103 ...................................................................................................................... 311
34.4. Settings IEC 60870-5-103 ........................................................................................................... 311
34.5. Settings transmission direction (monitoring direction) ................................................................. 313
35 . ST AT IO N BU S PRO T O CO L – IE C 6 08 7 0 - 5- 1 0 4 E D. 2. 0 .............................. 31 4
35.1. General ........................................................................................................................................ 314

35.2. Requirements for Use .................................................................................................................. 314
35.3. Addressing scheme ..................................................................................................................... 314
35.4. Characteristics ............................................................................................................................. 315
35.5. Transferable HIPASE data types ................................................................................................. 315
35.6. Routable function block diagram element ................................................................................... 315
35.7. IEC104 Interoperabily list ............................................................................................................. 316
35.8. Definition of Terms ....................................................................................................................... 317
35.9. NTP Configuration (time synchronization) ................................................................................... 318
35.10. Data points IEC104 ...................................................................................................................... 319
35.11. Datapoints IEC104 Stations ......................................................................................................... 320
35.12. Settings IEC 60870-5-104 ........................................................................................................... 320
35.13. Settings station definition ............................................................................................................. 321
35.14. Settings transmitting direction (monitoring direction)................................................................... 323
35.15. Setting recommendations Analog value transmission (threshold value transmission) ............... 326
35.16. Settings receiving direction (control direction) ............................................................................. 330
35.17. Transport media ........................................................................................................................... 331
35.18. Time synchronization ................................................................................................................... 331
35.19. Incorrect or no connection ........................................................................................................... 331
35.20. Causes for Errors ......................................................................................................................... 332
35.21. Causes for Warnings ................................................................................................................... 335
35.22. Diagnostic messages ................................................................................................................... 340
35.23. Information messages ................................................................................................................. 342
35.24. Status messages ......................................................................................................................... 342
35.25. Ordering data ............................................................................................................................... 342
35.26. Validity ......................................................................................................................................... 342
36 . ST AT IO N BU S PRO T O CO L – MO D B U S T C P ................................ ............. 34 3
36.1. Requirements for use .................................................................................................................. 343

DGB-004-1.04
36.2. MODBUS TCP server - definition of the direction of transmission .............................................. 343
36.3. Server configuration ..................................................................................................................... 344
36.4. Access modes and acces control for the MODBUS TCP server ................................................. 345
36.5. MODBUS TCP server functionality - Definition of data objects ................................................... 345
36.6. MODBUS TCP function overview / telegram formats .................................................................. 346
36.7. MODBUS TCP data format.......................................................................................................... 347
36.8. MODBUS TCP protocol - addressing of data objects ................................................................. 348
36.9. Operation of the MODBUS TCP server ....................................................................................... 349
36.10. Data points MODBUS TCP.......................................................................................................... 350
36.11. Data points MODBUS TCP Stations............................................................................................ 350
36.12. Settings MODBUS TCP ............................................................................................................... 351
36.13. Settings Client definition .............................................................................................................. 351
36.14. Settings transmission direction (monitoring direction) ................................................................. 353
36.15. Setting recommendations Analog value transmission ................................................................. 355
36.16. Settings for direction of reception (control direction) ................................................................... 358
36.17. RANKING OF 32 BIT ANALOG VALUES ................................................................................... 359
36.18. MODBUS TCP - Overview of function codes in HIPASE system ................................................ 360
36.19. FC 01 Read Coils – Read boolean FUP input ............................................................................. 360
36.20. FC 02 Read Discrete Inputs – Read Boolean FUP output .......................................................... 361
36.21. FC 03 Read Holding Registers – Read Boolean or analog FUP input ........................................ 361
36.22. FC 04 Read Input Registers – Read Boolean or analog FUP output .......................................... 362
36.23. FC 05 Write Single Coil – Write Boolean FUP input.................................................................... 362
36.24. FC 06 Write Single Register – write Boolean FUP input ............................................................. 363
36.25. FC 08 Diagnostics ....................................................................................................................... 363
36.26. FC 15 Write Multiple Coils – Write Boolean FUP inputs ............................................................. 363
36.27. FC 16 Write Multiple Registers – Write Boolean or analog FUP inputs ...................................... 364
37 . L ED I ND IC AT O R S A N D A C C E PT B UT T O N ................................................ 36 5
37.1. Definition of LEDs V1 .. V4 .......................................................................................................... 366

37.2. Defined States of LEDs ............................................................................................................... 367
37.3. Accept Button S1 ......................................................................................................................... 368
38 . ER RO R P RO C E S SI NG ................................................................ ............ 36 9
38.1. Distinction according to output form ............................................................................................ 369

38.2. Distinction by origin ...................................................................................................................... 369
38.3. Self-test on PowerUp ................................................................................................................... 369
38.4. Hardware test Mode .................................................................................................................... 370
38.5. Behavior of various outputs in case of error ................................................................................ 370
38.6. Behavior of various inputs and outputs in loading mode ............................................................. 371
38.7. Remedy and correction of errors ................................................................................................. 371
39 . A P PL IC AT IO N EX CIT AT I O N .................................................................... 37 2

DGB-004-1.04
39.1. Excitation Settings ....................................................................................................................... 374

39.2. Input area for vector model .......................................................................................................... 374
39.3. Measurement method Excitation - connection of transformer board TR-310 ............................. 377
39.3.1. 1-phase machine ......................................................................................................................... 378
39.3.2. 3-phase machine, 33Y - 3 x CT, 3 x VT, phase voltage / star connection .................................. 379
39.3.4. 3-phase machine, 33D - 3 x CT, 3 x VT, Chained voltage / delta connection ............................. 381
39.4. Setting area for Gate pulse generation ........................................................................................ 386
39.4.1. Bridge schemes, signal and pulse assignments .......................................................................... 386
39.4.2. Gate pulse generation ................................................................................................................. 387
39.5. Setting area for Diode Failure Supervision at AC exciter machine ............................................. 390
39.6. Outputs and Parameters of POU EST ......................................................................................... 391
39.6.1. Data points of outputs .................................................................................................................. 391
39.6.2. POU Parameters.......................................................................................................................... 394
39.7. Inputs of POU GateControlOut .................................................................................................... 396
39.7.1. Data points of inputs .................................................................................................................... 397
39.8. Outputs and Parameters of POU GateControlIn ......................................................................... 399
39.8.1. Data points - outputs .................................................................................................................... 399
39.8.2. POU Parameters.......................................................................................................................... 402
39.9. Inputs of POU GateControlSet .................................................................................................... 403
39.9.1. Data points - inputs ...................................................................................................................... 403
39.10. Thyristor conductivity monitoring, POU BridgeSupervision ......................................................... 405
39.10.1. Technical Data ............................................................................................................................. 405
39.10.2. POU BridgeSupervision for Thyristor bridge A and B ................................................................. 406
39.10.3. POU Bridgesupervision For Thyristor Bridge C And D ................................................................ 406
39.10.4. Secondary Application Assembly Activate Excessive Exploration .............................................. 407
39.10.7. POU Parameters.......................................................................................................................... 411
39.10.8. Baugruppen-Parameter Secondary Application Board ............................................................... 412
39.10.9. Error Processing Table ................................................................................................................ 412
39.10.10. MINIMUM FUNCTION PLAN FOR THYRISTOR CONFIGURATION MONITORING IN BRIDGE
PARALLEL OPERATION ............................................................................................................ 413
39.10.11. External connection for thyristor bridge parallel operation (Hot Standby) ................................... 414
39.11. Diode conductivity monitoring for AC exciter machine, POU DiodeSupervision ......................... 415
39.11.1. Signal curve at a short-circuited diode on the rotating rectifier ................................................... 415
39.11.2. Signal curve in case of failure of a diode on the rotating rectifier ................................................ 415

DGB-004-1.04
39.11.5. POU Parameters.......................................................................................................................... 417

39.11.6. Block Diagram POU Diode Supervision ...................................................................................... 419
39.12. Rated frequency of AC exciter machine, POU DiodeSupervisionSet ......................................... 420
39.12.1. Data point - input ......................................................................................................................... 420
40 . A P PL IC AT IO N P RO T E CT I O N ................................................................... 42 2
41 . A P PL IC AT IO N T U RB I NE G O V E RNO R ...................................................... 42 3
41.1. Speed detection ........................................................................................................................... 423

41.1.1. Parameters „Speed Inputs“ .......................................................................................................... 424
41.2. Power measuement ..................................................................................................................... 426
41.2.1. Parameters „Power measurement“.............................................................................................. 427
41.2.2. Calculated values of power measurement .................................................................................. 427
41.3. Measuring methods Turbine control - Connection of transformer board TR-310 ........................ 428
41.3.1. 1-phase machine ......................................................................................................................... 428
41.4. Parameters for positioning controllers (from V1.11.00) ............................................................... 435
41.4.1. Transfer function of PIDT1-controller .......................................................................................... 436
42 . S YST E M D AT A PO INT S ................................ .......................................... 43 8
43 . CAT ALO G O F D E V IC E S, MO D U LE S , S P A R E P ART S, T HIR D - P ART Y P RO DU CT S

................................................................................................ ............. 43 9
43.1. Devices ........................................................................................................................................ 439

43.2. Devices - Standard types with ASAP-No. .................................................................................... 441
43.3. Common Device Parts ................................................................................................................. 442
43.4. Boards .......................................................................................................................................... 444
43.5. Boards - Selection of Configured Types with ASAP No. ............................................................. 446
43.6. Extension Modules ...................................................................................................................... 447
43.7. Accessories, Spare Parts ............................................................................................................ 448
43.8. Tested, additional Third Party Products ...................................................................................... 452
44 . CAT ALO G O F SO FTW AR E LI CE N S E S ...................................................... 45 7
44.1. Overview Software Licenses for Application Excitation ............................................................... 457

44.2. Overview Software Licenses for Application Protection .............................................................. 458
44.3. Overview Software Licenses for Communication protocols ........................................................ 462

DGB-004-1.04
45 . RE A D ER´ S R E A CT IO NS ................................ .......................................... 46 3

DGB-004-1.04
2. CONTENT AND TARGET GROUP OF THIS DOCUMENT
This document contains

 Order and engineering instructions for hard- and software
 Technical data
 Detailled functional descriptions of components
 Wiring and engineering recommendations and hints
This document is intended for

 Developers of functional plan
 Design engineers
 Project engineers
 Sales engineers

DGB-004-1.04
2.1. CONTENT STRUCTURE OF THE PRESENT DATA SHEETS

The present document is generally structured as follows:
 General description + photo
 Features (special properties)
 Definitions of terms (explanations of terminology)
 Order and technical data
 Function blocks of the component (input, output, ...)
 Principle of operation
 Technical specifications
 Description of the data points
 Parameters
 External wiring
 Logic behavior
 Operating modes of the component
 Connection of the shield earthing
 Wiring diagrams
 Pin assignment of the plug connectors
 Assembly options with plug-on modules
 Mechanical plug codings
 Accessories, spare parts
 Validity

DGB-004-1.04
3. ORDER DATA AND ORDER PROCEDURE
To get a fully functional HIPASE device

 the device hardware with defined assembly and
 the functionality via software licenses
have to be selected and ordered.
Therefor we recommend:
 Catalogue of devices, boards, spare parts and third party components
 Catalogue of software licenses
 Excel Configuration Tool "HIPASE Hardware Configurator" with item number DGB-100--
 Description of Excel Configuration Tool with item number DGB-103-1

DGB-004-1.04
3.1. HIPASE DEVICE - PRODUCT CODE

The order data of a device is called product code and it consists of
 the material number (9 digits)
 a slash (1 digit) and
 the actual configuration code.
Example: GGE-004--/71/F--000R1DQWXXXX0WXXXX
3.1.1. MATERIAL NUMBER OF DEVICE
The first two digits always are ‚GG‘. The third digit defines the type of application. The third last digit defines the
size Größe an, wherein ‚2‘ means ‚MEDIUM‘ and ‚4‘ means ‚LARGE‘.
Material number ↓ Nomination Application
GGE-002-- HIPASE-E MEDIUM Device 42U width for excitation system
GGE-004-- HIPASE-E LARGE Device 84U width for excitation system
GGM-002-- HIPASE MEDIUM Device 42U width for mixed application
GGM-004-- HIPASE LARGE Device 84U width for mixed application
GGP-002-- HIPASE-P MEDIUM Device 42U width for electrical protection system
GGP-004-- HIPASE-P LARGE Device 84U width for electrical protection system
GGS-002-- HIPASE-S MEDIUM Device 42U width for synchronization
GGT-002-- HIPASE-T MEDIUM Device 42U width for turbine governor
GGT-004-- HIPASE-T LARGE Device 84U width for turbine governor
The material number is followed by a slash, which neither belongs to the material number nor to the configuration
code.

DGB-004-1.04
3.1.2. CONFIGURATION CODE OF DEVICE
Below the configuration code is described:
1. digit: characteristic „nature of the touch panel“

Depending on the application of the device material number the touch panel is equipped with the corresponding
printed aluminium front panel:
Example:
If the material number is GGE-004-- and the characteristic value is ‚7‘, a TP-960 is equipped.
If the material number is GGP-004-- and the characteristic value is ‚7‘, a TP-970 is equipped.
Material number
Characteristic value ↓ Nomination
corresponding to application
0 No Touch panel -
TP-960 Internal Touch panel LARGE HIPASE E BGE-960--

TP-950 Internal Touch panel LARGE HIPASE BGM-950--
7
TP-970 Internal Touch panel LARGE HIPASE P BGP-970--
TP-980 Internal Touch panel LARGE HIPASE T BGT-980--
TP-910 Internal Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE E BGE-910--

TP-900 Interna Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE BGM-900--
B TP-920 Internal Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE P BGP-920--
TP-940 Internal Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE S BGS-940--
TP-930 Internal Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE T BGT-930--
TP-915 External Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE E BGE-915--

TP-905 External Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE BGM-905--
J TP-925 External Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE P BGP-925--
TP-945 External Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE S BGS-945--
TP-935 External Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE T BGT-935--
TP-965 External Touch panel LARGE HIPASE E BGE-965--

TP-955 External Touch panel LARGE HIPASE BGM-955--
S
TP-975 External Touch panel LARGE HIPASE P BGP-975--
TP-985 External Touch panel LARGE HIPASE T BGT-985--
2nd digit: Rated frequency
Characteristic value ↓ Nomination
1 Rated frequency 50/60 Hz
2 Rated frequency 16.7 Hz

DGB-004-1.04
3rd digit: Slash
4. – 13. digit (MEDIUM sized device with 10 slots) resp. 4. – 24. digit (LARGE sized device with 21 slots):
Selection of boards and modules each slot
Characteristic value ↓ Nomination Material number
Not assembled (already occupied by the left neighbour

- -
boad)
0 Not assembled / blanking plate for 1 or 3 slots TGB-006 at '0', TGB-007 at '000'
1 SFP module MultiMode (2 pcs.) for CP-300 CGB-025
2 SFP module SingleMode (2 pcs.) for CP-300 CGB-026
4-- TR-300 Transformer Board 4CT, 4VT with cover plate 3 slots BGB-100--
AB-330 Application Board Turbine Govenor with cover plate BGT-101-- with additional
A
1/2 slots configuration code
PS-300 Power Supply Board 110/220VDC with 4FSO with BGB-107-- with additional
C
cover plate 5/5 slots configuration code
AB-310 Application Board Excitation with cover plate 2/2 BGE-101-- with additional
D
slots configuration code
E
TR-310 Transformer Board 12CT, 8VT with cover plate 3

F-- BGB-113--
slots
AB-320 Application Board Protection with cover plate 2/2 BGP-101-- with additional
G
H
J DI-010 Digital Module 16DI CGB-008
K DO-010 Digital Module 16DO CGB-010
N AM-020 Application Module (6AI, 8AO, 2SM) CGB-015
P
Q AM-010 Application Module (6AI, 4AO, 4PT100) CGB-014
BGB-104-- with additional

R CP-300 Processor Board with cover plate 1/2 slots
configuration code
T

DGB-004-1.04
U
PS-500 Spannungsversorgungs-Baugruppe 24/60VDC mit BGB-113-- with additional

W
4FSO mit Abdeckplatte 5/5 Slots configuration code
X DX-010 Digital Module 8DI, 8DO CGB-009
3.1.3. EXAMPLE OF A CONFIGURATION CODE WITH EXPLANATION
'71/4--000R1DQWXXXX0WXXXX'
This device contains:
 (7) TP-950 Internal Touch panel LARGE

 (1) Rated frequency 50/60 Hz
 (4--) TR-300 Transformer Board 4CT, 4CT with cover plate 3 slots
 (R) CP-300 Processor Board with cover plate 1/2 slots
 (1) SFP Module MultiMode (2 pcs.) for CP-300
 (D) AB-310 Applications Board Excitation with cover plate 2/2 slots
 (Q) AM-010 Application Module (6AI, 4AO, 4PT100)
 (W + W) 2 x PS-500 Power Supply Board 24/60VDC mit 4FSO with cover plate 5/5 slots
 (XXXX + XXXX) 8 x DX-010 Digital Module 8DI, 8DO
The complete product code for this example is: ‚GGE-004--/71/F--000R1DQWXXXX0WXXXX‘

DGB-004-1.04
3.2. HIPASE DEVICE - SCOPE OF DELIVERY
 Shipping carton
o with shock and vibration absorbing PE foam
o Name plate
o Packing bag for protection against electrostatic discharge, humidity and dust (not seaworthy!)
o Failure report form
 Functionally tested HIPASE device according to information on the name plate

o Components incl. plugged terminal strips
o 24 pcs. enclosed ring cable lugs for current transformer terminals each TR-310
o Enclosed countersunk crosshead screws for device mounting in 19“-frame or door cutout
o Test report with serial numbers

DGB-004-1.04
3.3. HIPASE SPARE PART - PRODUCT CODE

Some following spare parts need a configuration code to be fully defined.
The order data of a configurable spare part consist of

 the material number (9 digits)
 the slash (1 digit) and
 the actual configuration code (2 .. 5 digits)
Example: BGB-107--/CXXXX
3.3.1. MATERIAL NUMBER OF SPARE PART
The first two digits are always,BG'. The third digit indicates the application:
‚B‘ stands for ‚General-Base‘, ‚E‘ for ‚Excitation‘, ‚M‘ for ‚Mixed application‘, ‚P‘ for ‚Protection‘, ‚S‘ for
‚Synchronisation‘, ‚T‘ for ‚Turbine Governor‘.
Material number ↓ Nomination
BGB-104-- CP-300 Processor-Board
BGB-107-- PS-300 Power Supply Board 110/220VDC with 4FSO
BGB-113-- PS-500 Power Supply Board 24/60VDC with 4FSO
BGE-101-- AB-310 Application Board Excitation
BGP-101-- AB-320 Application Board Protection
BGT-101-- AB-330 Application Board Turbine Governor
The material number is followed by a slash, which neither belongs to the material number nor to the configuration
code.

DGB-004-1.04
3.3.2. CONFIGURATION CODE OF SPARE PART
Below the configuration code is described:
1. digit: Code of Base board according spare part material number
A
C
D
E
G
H
AB-320 Application-Baugruppe Protection with cover plate BGP-101-- with additional

P
BGB-104-- with additional

R CP-300 Processor Board with cover plate 1/2 slots
configuration code
T
U
W

DGB-004-1.04
2. – 5. digit: Selection of extension modules each slot
- Not assembled (only possible at CP-300) -
1 SFP Module MultiMode (2 pcs.) for CP-300 CGB-025
2 SFP Module SingleMode (2 pcs.) for CP-300 CGB-026
J DI-010 Digital Module 16DI CGB-008
K DO-010 Digital Module 16DO CGB-010
N AM-020 Application Module (6AI, 8AO, 2SM) CGB-015
Q AM-010 Applications Module (6AI, 4AO, 4PT100) CGB-014
X DX-010 Digital Module 8DI, 8DO CGB-009
3.3.3. EXAMPLE OF A CONFIGURATION CODE WITH EXPLANATION
'CXXXX'
This spare part contains:
 PS-300 Power Supply Board 110/220VDC with 4FSO with cover plate 5/5 slots
 4 x DX-010 Digital Module 8DI, 8DO
The complete order code for this example is: 'BGB-107--/CXXXX'

DGB-004-1.04
3.3.4. SPARE PARTS WITHOUT CONFIGURATION CODE
All other spare parts need no configuration code to be fully defined:

Material number ↓ Nomination
BGB-100-- TR-300 Transformer Board 4CT 4VT

BGB-103-- TR-310 Transformer Board 12CT 8VT
BGE-910-- TP-910 Internal Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE E

BGE-915-- TP-915 External Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE E
BGE-960-- TP-960 Internal Touch panel LARGE HIPASE E
BGE-965-- TP-965 External Touch panel LARGE HIPASE E
BGM-900-- TP-900 Internal Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE

BGM-905-- TP-905 External Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE
BGM-950-- TP-950 Internal Touch panel LARGE HIPASE
BGM-955-- TP-955 External Touch panel LARGE HIPASE
BGP-920-- TP-920 Internal Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE P

BGP-925-- TP-925 External Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE P
BGP-970-- TP-970 Internal Touch panel LARGE HIPASE P
BGP-975-- TP-975 External Touch panel LARGE HIPASE P
BGS-940-- TP-940 Internal Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE S

BGS-945-- TP-945 External Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE S
BGT-930-- TP-930 Internal Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE T

BGT-935-- TP-935 External Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE T
BGT-980-- TP-980 Internal Touch panel LARGE HIPASE T
BGT-985-- TP-985 External Touch panel LARGE HIPASE T
The single material number in these cases is sufficient as ordering code!

DGB-004-1.04
3.4. HIPASE SPARE PART - SCOPE OF DELIVERY
 Shipping carton
o Name plate
o Packing bag for protection against electrostatic discharge, humidity and dust (not seaworthy!)
o Failure report form
 Functionally tested HIPASE spare part according to information on the name plate
o Assembled incl. cover plate
o Enclosed terminal strips
o Enclosed set of screws to fix the cover plate in a HIPASE device
o 24 pcs. enclosed ring cable lugs for current transformer terminals each TR-310
o Test report with serial numbers

DGB-004-1.04
4. MOUNTING
After unpacking the delivered or ordered equipment, the nameplate should be compared with the information on
the order form of this project / cabinet. Furthermore, the contents of the enclosed test report is to be compared with
the information on the nameplate and is to be filed in the project documentation.
There are three ways of mounting devices:
 Flush mounting of the entire device in a 19" swing frame (additional mounting kit TGB-029/TGB-030/TGB-
031 needed)
 Panel mounting of the device without touch panel on the mounting plate in the cabinet +
flush mounting of the remote (external) touch panel in cabinet door cutout
 Flush mounting of the entire device in the cabinet door cutout
Caution: All HIPASE device types require a vertical mounting position, as otherwise sufficient cooling is not
guaranteed.
4.1. MOUNTING KIT FOR FLUSH MOUNTING IN 19" (SWING) FRAME
Example of two 19" swing frame mounted MEDIUM devices with mounting kit TGB-029--
The mounting kits must be ordered separately depending on the mechanical placement and combination in the swing frame!
Material number ↓ Nomination Comment
Blanking plate 42HP, 6U height
If only one HIPASE MEDIUM device is installed in a 19"

swing frame, the remaining gap of 42HP can be closed with
TGB-025-- this blanking plate. This plate replaces a MEDIUM device.
Steel plate 2 mm, color: RAL 7035

DGB-004-1.04
Blanking plate 84HP, 6U height
Is there a gap of 6U height in a 19" swing frame above or

below of a mounted device which should be closed, this
TGB-026-- plate is used to close this gap.
Steel plate 2 mm, color: RAL 7035
Device mounting kit 19" consisting of:

2x mounting rail end 2U height (2x TGB-021--)
Steel plate 4mm, color: RAL 7035

TGB-029-- Required to mount two MEDIUM devices or one LARGE
device in a 19" swing frame.
2x side plate 6U height (2x TGB-024--),
and a set of screws and nuts
Device mounting expansion kit 2U height 19" consisting

of:
Required to mount more than two MEDIUM devices or more
1x mounting rail mid 2U height (TGB-022--),
than one LARGE device in a 19" swing frame. This allows
TGB-030-- mounting a second "device row". Should there be a
distance of 2U height between the two "device rows", this
expansion kit is suitable. For each additional "device row"
another expansion kit is required.
2x side plate 6U height (2x TGB-024--)

DGB-004-1.04

of:
1x mounting rail mid 3U height (TGB-023--),
Required to mount more than two MEDIUM devices or more
than one LARGE device in a 19" swing frame. This allows
TGB-031-- mounting a second "device row". Should there be a
distance of 3U height between the two "device rows", this
expansion kit is suitable. For each additional "device row"
another expansion kit is required.
2x side plate 6U height (2x TGB-024--)

DGB-004-1.04
4.2. DIMENSION DRAWING HIPASE DEVICE FOR PANEL MOUNTING

The following minimum distances between device and cabinet walls, cable ducts and support rails are required for
 enabling a sufficient thermal convection

 the sufficient space during installation and plugging the wired connectors
 fastening of ground terminals of the shielded cable and the cable lugs to the current transformer terminals
Required minimum distances Dimensions
Left and right 15 mm
Top and bottom 60 mm
At the back 90 mm
Housing type MEDIUM Device (42 U width)
Drilling diagram of the mounting holes for a MEDIUM device

DGB-004-1.04
Housing type LARGE Device (84 U width)
Drilling diagram of the mounting holes for a LARGE device
Example of a mounted LARGE device without touch panel on the mounting plate in the cabinet.

DGB-004-1.04
4.3. DIMENSION DRAWING HIPASE DEVICE FOR FLUSH MOUNTING

The following minimum distances between device and cabinet walls, cable ducts and support rails are required for
 the sufficient space during installation and plugging the wired connectors
 fastening of ground terminals of the shielded cable and the cable lugs to the current transformer terminals
At the back 90 mm
Housing type MEDIUM Device (42 U width)
Cabinet door cutout for a MEDIUM device - also valid for remote (external) touch panel mounting TP-905
(Dwg. TGB-027--/01.00)

DGB-004-1.04
Housing type LARGE Device (84 U width)
Cabinet door cutout for a LARGE device - also valid for remote (external) touch panel mounting TP-955
(Dwg. TGB-028--/01.00)

DGB-004-1.04
4.4. DIMENSION DRAWING TOUCH PANEL FOR FLUSH MOUNTING

The following minimum distances between touch panel and cabinet walls, cable ducts and support rails are
required for
 the sufficient space during installation and plugging the ethernet cable
At the back 90 mm
External Touch panel MEDIUM (42 U width)
Cabinet door cutout for a External Touch panel MEDIUM (Dwg. TGB-027--/01.00)

DGB-004-1.04
Example of a remote (external) touch panel TP-905 mounted in cabinet door cutout
External Touch panel LARGE (84 U width)
Cabinet door cutout for External Touch panel LARGE (Dwg. TGB-028--/01.00)

DGB-004-1.04
5. NAME PLATE AND SERIAL NUMBER
5.1. NAME PLATE OF DEVICE
Placement
 on the upper housing area on the terminal side
 on the shipping carton of the device

DGB-004-1.04
Content
Icons from left to right:
Underlying standard or
Icon designation Meaning
regulation / directive
Warning of potential danger of electrical voltages.

Warning of electrical voltage ISO 7010, ISO 3864, IEC 60417
Used to increase the attention and mindfulness.
Electrostatic discharges can destroy or damage

Warning of electrostatic sensitive devices sensitive components in the device and are to be
IEC 60417
ESD avoided completely in certain areas. Ensure a proper
handling of such components!
5 kV pulses with 1.2 µs rise time and decay time of

50 µs. For the design of air distances the expected
overvoltages and characteristics of the contamination
and the overvoltage protection measures have to be
considered on site. For this device a contamination
level 2 is expected. (Only non-conductive pollution
can happen. Occasionally, however, a temporary
Surge test voltage 5 kV conductivity must be expected due to condensation.) IEC 60664-1
Decisive for dimensioning of the air distance is the
rated surge voltage, resulting from the overvoltage
category and the mains voltage derived from the
voltage conductor-ground. From the rated surge
voltage and the contamination level, the minimum air
distances are determined (at altitudes up to 2000 m
above sea level).
These are equipments in fixed installations and for

Surge category III cases where particular requirements are placed on IEC 60664-1
the reliability and availability of the equipment.
Dielectric test of the device of safety class I

Dielectric test voltage 2.2 kV (protective conductor) with dielectric test voltage 2.2 IEC 61557-2
kV rms (50 Hz)
The product meets the applicable requirements

CE marking (Conformité Européenne) which are defined in the harmonization legislation of EU regulation 765/2008
the European Community for its affixing.

DGB-004-1.04
This product may not be disposed of together with

household waste. By ensuring proper disposal of this
product, you will help to prevent potential negative
effects on human health and the environment which
Electric and electronic equipment waste might arise by inappropriate waste handling. For WEEE directive 2012/19/EU
more detailed information about recycling of this
product, please contact your local communal
authorities, your household waste disposal service or
the retailer where you purchased the product.
Restriction of Hazardous Substances: Lead (Pb),

Mercury (Hg), Cadmium (Cd), Hexavalent chromium
RoHS marking EU directive 2011/65/EU
(Cr6+), Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB),
Polybrominated diphenyl ether (PBDE)
Before commissioning please read and follow the

Operating and safety instructions ISO 11684
operating and safety instructions.
Data fields from left to right:
Text on device name plate Meaning
Q.C. PASSED Placeholder for quality inspection label by the manufacturer
ORDER NUMBER / POS. ANDRITZ Hydro internal order number and order item to the manufacturer
Permissible range of both power supplies on mandatory power supply board

UAUX1
(in MEDIUM housing: slot H or F, in LARGE housing: slot S)
PAUX1.MAX Maximum value of power consumption via the mandatory power supply board
Permissible range of both power supplies on optional power supply board

UAUX2
(in MEDIUM housing: no second power supply board possible, in LARGE housing: slot L)
PAUX2.MAX Maximum value of power consumption via the optional power supply board
UN Rated voltage of the voltage transformer inputs
IN Rated current of the current transformer inputs (adjustable by tool)
fN Rated frequency
Op. Tmp Permissible temperature range of ambient air for operation of the device in °C and °F
Permissible storage temperature range (corresponds to the transport temperature) in °C

Stor. Tmp
and °F
IP20: Protection against medium sized solid foreign objects (fingers and foreign objects
with diameters from 12.5 mm), no protection against water (protection provided by
IP Code
enclosures for suitability of electrical equipment for various environmental conditions acc.
to IEC 60529)
TYPE, MATERIAL NUMBER WITH

Type of device, material number with configuration code (oder data)
CONFIGURATION CODE

DGB-004-1.04
Text on device name plate Meaning
SERIAL NO. Placeholder for device serial number label (see below for details.)
These data correlate with the data on the test report.

DGB-004-1.04
5.2. NAME PLATE OF SPARE PART
Placement
 on shipping carton of spare part
Content
Icons from left to right:
The product meets the applicable requirements

CE marking (Conformité Européenne) which are defined in the harmonization legislation of EU regulation 765/2008
the European Community for its affixing.
Electrostatic discharges can destroy or damage

Warning of electrostatic sensitive devices sensitive components in the device and are to be
IEC 60417
ESD avoided completely in certain areas. Ensure a proper
handling of such components!
Restriction of Hazardous Substances: Lead (Pb),

Mercury (Hg), Cadmium (Cd), Hexavalent chromium
RoHS marking EU directive 2011/65/EU
(Cr6+), Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB),
Polybrominated diphenyl ether (PBDE)

DGB-004-1.04
This product may not be disposed of together with

household waste. By ensuring proper disposal of this
product, you will help to prevent potential negative
effects on human health and the environment which
Electric and electronic equipment waste might arise by inappropriate waste handling. For WEEE directive 2012/19/EU
more detailed information about recycling of this
product, please contact your local communal
authorities, your household waste disposal service or
the retailer where you purchased the product.
Before commissioning please read and follow the

Operating and safety instructions ISO 11684
operating and safety instructions.
Data fields from left to right:
Text on spare part name plate Meaning
Placeholder for spare part serial number label of the configured board starting with BG*
CONFIGURED SPARE PART BG*
(see below for details.)
Q.C. PASSED Placeholder for quality inspection label by the manufacturer
OPTIONAL EXTENSION MODULE #4 Placeholder for serial number label of 4th extension module, if equipped
BASE BOARD Placeholder for serial number label of base board
CPU MODULE #1 Placeholder for serial number label of 1st CPU module
CPU MODULE #2 OR OPTIONAL Placeholder for serial number label of 2nd CPU module - if equipped, or of the 1st
EXTENSION MODULE #1 extension module, if equipped
OPTIONAL EXTENSION MODULE #2 Placeholder for serial number label of 2nd extension module, if equipped
OPTIONAL EXTENSION MODULE #3 Placeholder for serial number label of 3rd extension module, if equipped
TYPE, MATERIAL NUMBER W.

Type of spare part, material number with configuration code (oder data), ANDRITZ Hydro
CONFIGURATION CODE, ORDER
internal order number and order item to the manufacturer
NO./POS.

DGB-004-1.04
5.3. ADHESIVE LABEL FOR SERIAL NUMBER

The square adhesive label has a dimension of 12 x 12 mm.
Placement
 Device serial number adhesive label on every device name plate.
 Serial number adhesive label of every single components on spare parts name plate at packaged spare
parts delivery.
 Serial number adhesive label of every single components on every single component in the device.
This ensures a unique identification, allocation and traceability of each delivered component.
Content structure of the serial number
16 alphanumeric characters consisting of:

Number of
Digits of serial number ↓ Meaning Example
characters
Material number without the first and second CGB018– (entsprechende

1 .. 7 7
hyphen, (incl. version –, A, B, ...) Materialnummer: CGB-018--)
Product state (corresponds to the term

8 .. 9 2 'Revision' in ISI-WEB, where even the 01
revision history can be viewed)
602, coded equivalent of

10 .. 12 3 Coded production year and month
year/month
B corresponds to manufacturer
13 1 Identification of manufacturer
XXX
14 .. 16 3 Consecutive number each production month 045
Example: CGB018-01602B045
Representation mode of information on serial number adhesive label

 DataMatrix ECC200 Code (IEC 16022:2000) for automated scanning of serial number.
 Alphanumeric text version divided into 2 text blocks with 9 and 7 characters, which are identical in content
with the coded data in the data matrix code.
If the alpha-numeric information on adhesive label got unreadable, the data matrix code can be photographed with
a smartphone with a corresponding app or by using an industrial 2D reader.
These data correlate with the data on the test report.

DGB-004-1.04
6. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
The HIPASE device complies with the requirements of the Council of the European Communities on the
approximation of the laws of the member states relating to electromagnetic compatibility (2004/108 / EC) and
electrical equipment for use within certain voltage limits (2006/95 / EC) and limitation (use of certain) hazardous
substances - RoHS2 (2011/65 / EC).
6.1. EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

For all components of the device following Declarations of Conformity are available:
Type ↓ Nomination of document Material number
AB-310 AB-310 EC Declaration of Conformity (ger, eng) CGE-001-A.XX/79
CGP-001--.XX/79
AB-320 AB-320 EC Declaration of Conformity (ger, eng)
CGP-001-A.XX/79
AM-010 AM-010 EC Declaration of Conformity (ger, eng) CGB-014--.XX/79
CGB-004-A.XX/79
CP-300 CP-300 EC Declaration of Conformity (ger, eng)
CGB-004-B.XX/79
PS-300
PS-500 PS-300 DX-010 EC Declaration of Conformity (ger, eng) CGB-007-A.XX/79
DX-010
TP-9xx TP-9xx EC Declaration of Conformity (ger, eng) CGB-017--.XX/79
TR-310 TR-310 EC Declaration of Conformity (ger, eng) CGB-023--.XX/79

DGB-004-1.04
6.2. ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY (ACC. TO IEC 60255-26)

System properties Emitted interference
Test Test standard Class Frequency range Limit value
40 dBµ quasi-peak value @ 10 m

30 MHz .. 230 MHz
50 dB(µV/m) quasi-peak value @ 3 m
IEC/CISPR 11 A
Housing 230 MHz .. 1 GHz
56 dB(µV/m) average
IEC/CISPR 22 *) A 1 GHz .. 3 GHz
76 dB(µV/m) peak value @ 3 m
79 dB(µV) quasi-peak value

0.15 MHz .. 0.5 MHz
66 dB(µV) average
Power supply connection IEC/CISPR 22 A
73 dB(µV) quasi-peak value
0.5 MHz .. 30 MHz
60 dB(µV) average
*) tested up to 2 GHz.
System properties Interference immunity
Test Test standard Class Test level
Electrostatic Discharge
IEC 61000-4-2 3 6 kV contact, 8 kV air
(ESD)
10 V/m (80 MHz .. 1 GHz)

Electromagnetic Field IEC 61000-4-3 3 10 V/m (1,4 GHz .. 2 GHz)
10 V/m (2 GHz .. 2,7 GHz)
Power frequency magnetic 30 A/m continuous

IEC 61000-4-8 4
field 300 A/m 1 .. 3 s

DGB-004-1.04
6.3. ADDITIONAL SAFETY INFORMATION

Operating wireless devices, including mobile phones in the immediate vicinity of a HIPASE device or unshielded
cables connected to a HIPASE device, may cause malfunction under certain circumstances.
It is therefore always to maintain a safe distance for the maintenance of undisturbed plant operation.
Power supply DC interference immunity
Burst IEC 61000-4-4 4 4 kV (5/50 ns, 5 kHz)
2 kV Connection – Connection
Surge IEC 61000-4-5 4
4 kV Connection - Earth
Conducted interference induced

IEC 61000-4-6 3 10 V (150 kHz .. 80 MHz)
by high frequency fields
40 % 200 ms
Voltage dips, short interruptions IEC 61000-4-29 - 70 % 500 ms
0 % 50 ms
CAUTION: Before isolation tests of cabinet wiring all connections on HIPASE device have to be removed.
CT inputs may be tested with max. 2.2 kV (duration 3 s)
Signal connections Interference immunity
Burst IEC 61000-4-4 >4 4 kV (5/50 ns, 5 kHz)
2 kV Connection – Connection
Surge IEC 61000-4-5 4
4 kV Connection - Earth
Conducted interference induced

IEC 61000-4-6 3 10 V (150 kHz .. 80 MHz)
by high frequency fields
Functional earth Interference immunity
IEC 61000-4-4 4 4 kV (5/50 ns, 5 kHz)

Burst
IEC 61000-4-6 3 10 kV (150 kHz .. 80 MHz)

DGB-004-1.04
6.4. CLIMATIC STRESS (ACC. TO IEC EN 60255-27)
Test Test standard Test level Evaluation criterion
IEC 60068-2-1 Out of service, proper function

Cold -40 °C 16 h
Test Ab before and after the test.
IEC 60068-2-2 Out of service, proper function

Dry heat +70 °C 16 h
Test Bb before and after the test.
lower temperature: –5 °C
IEC 60068-2-14 upper temperature +55 °C In operation, proper function
Temperature fluctuation
Test Nb dwell time 3h, temperature before and after the test.
gradient 3 °C/min, 5 cycles
IEC 60068-2-30 temperature: +40 °C

Out of service, proper function
Cycles with humid heat humidity: >95 %, <100 %
Test Db variant 2 before and after the test.
6 cycles
Temperature ranges CELSIUS FARENHEIT
Operation (with assured

– 5 .. + 55 °C 23 °F .. + 131 °F
accuracy)
Transport with factory packaging – 25 °C .. + 70 °C – 13 °F .. + 158 °F
0 °C .. + 55 °C, 32 °F .. + 131 °F
Storage with factory packaging
25 °C recommended 77 °F recommended
Reference conditions for

accuracy data
Ambient temperature + 20 °C .. + 23 °C // 68 °F .. + 73,4 °F
Air humidity 20 % - 80 % relative humidity, not condensing

DGB-004-1.04
6.5. MECHANICAL STRESS (ACC. TO IEC EN 60255-27)
Test Test standard Test level Evaluation criterion
In operation, proper function

Vibration IEC 60255-21-1 Class 1
before and after the test.

Shock IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1

Seismic IEC 60255-21-3 Class 1

DGB-004-1.04
7. HIPASE EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE
No batteries or accumulators or other periodically exchangeable components are used for the HIPASE device
variants. All components are designed for the whole lifetime of the HIPASE system at normal operating
environmental temperature. Therefore, regardless of the hardware version of all HIPASE device variants,
component replacement or module replacement is not intended in the course of revisions.
It is therefore necessary to check and retighten the following screw connections at periodic intervals:
 CT connections
 Screw terminals of the terminal blocks
 Device mounting and touch panel mounting
 Mounting screws of the modules
8. MTBF CALCULATION (MEAN TIME BETWEEN FAILURE)
For the MTBF calculation, a FIT value is specified for each function-relevant module of the HIPASE device in the
respective chapter "Order and technical data".
FIT values (Failure In Time) are referenced during the determination to a period of 10 9 hours. To calculate the
MTBF value of a HIPASE device variant, the FIT value for each module used and its subassemblies and the
housing must be taken from this document, summed up and reused as follows:
9
10
MTBF 
FIT1  FIT2  ..  FITn

DGB-004-1.04
9. ALL HIPASE HARDWARE COMPONENTS
In the following chapters, the following components are described.

The ranking is arranged alphabetically by the type designation.
Material number
Chapter & Link to
Type ↓ Nomination (for spare part
documentation
order)
AB-310 Application Board Excitation BGE-101-- plus

configuration code,
refer to chapter 43.5
11. - Link
AB-320 Application Board Protection BGP-101-- plus

configuration code,
12. - Link
AB-330 Application Board Turbine Governor BGT-101-- plus

configuration code,
13. - Link
(Photo with application module AM-020)
AM-010 Application Module (6AI 4AO 4PT100) CGB-014

(can not be ordered
separately)
14. - Link
AM-020 Application Module (6AI 8AO 2SM) CGB-015

(can not be ordered
separately)
15. - Link

DGB-004-1.04
Material number
Chapter & Link to
documentation
order)
CP-300 Processor Board BGB-104-- plus

configuration code,
16. - Link
CS-320 Housing MEDIUM 42 HP, 6 U height --

(can not be ordered
separately)
17. - Link
CS-330 Housing MEDIUM 84 HP, 6 U height --

(can not be ordered
separately)
18. - Link
DI-010 Digital Module 16DI CGB-008

(can not be ordered
separately)
19. - Link
DO-010 Digital Module 16DO CGB-010

(can not be ordered
separately)
20. - Link
DX-010 Digital Module 8DI 8DO CGB-009

(can not be ordered
separately)
21. - Link

DGB-004-1.04
Material number
Chapter & Link to
documentation
order)
PS-300 Power Supply Board 110/220VDC with 4FSO BGB-107-- plus

configuration code,
22. - Link
PS-500 Power Supply Board 24/60VDC with 4FSO BGB-113-- plus

configuration code,
23. - Link
TP-900 Internal Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE BGM-900--

TP-920 Internal Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE P BGP-920--
24. - Link

TP-925 External Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE P BGP-925--
25. - Link

26. - Link

27. - Link

DGB-004-1.04
Material number
Chapter & Link to
documentation
order)
TR-300 Transformer Board 4CT 4VT BGB-100--
28. - Link
TR-310 Transformer Board 12CT 8VT BGB-103--
29. - Link

DGB-004-1.04
10. BASIC FUNCTIONS IN HARDWARE COMPONENTS
In order to get the required basic functions in a device, the HIPASE device must be configured as follows.
Not all features with their maximum number are available at the same time, but priorities within a certain scope of
equipment have to be selected. The demand on high number of digital I/Os can come at the expense of the
number of application boards - and vice versa.
Therefor please refer to Ordering and Configuration.

Different features may be combined in each component (board or extension module).
Maximum
Maximum possible
Contained possible number
Type of board with number of boards
Basic function ↓ number of feature of boards
this feature in HIPASE MEDIUM
each board in HIPASE
device
LARGE device
6 AM-010 1 2
6 AM-020 1 1
Analog Input
1 AB-320 1 2
6 AB-330 1 1
4 AM-010 1 2
8 AM-020 1 1
Analog Output
1 AB-320 1 2
6 AB-330 1 1
1 for HIPASE-T
4 TR-300 1 and HIPASE-S
CT measuring input 1 A / 5 A
12 TR-310 1 2 for HIPASE-E
and HIPASE-P
Data interface
IRIG-B for time synchronization
Ethernet for station bus IEC61850, 1 CP-300 1 1

IEC60870-5-104, Modbus TCP
RS485 for station bus IEC60870-5-103
LWL-ST for station bus IEC60870-5-103
16 DI-010 4 8
Digital Input
8 DX-010 4 8
16 DO-010 4 8
8 DX-010 4 8
Digital Output
4 PS-300 1 2
4 PS-500 1 2

DGB-004-1.04
Maximum
Maximum possible
Contained possible number
Type of board with number of boards
Basic function ↓ number of feature of boards
this feature in HIPASE MEDIUM
each board in HIPASE
device
LARGE device
Gate control incl. measuring of field current,

field voltage, synchronization voltage, gate 1 AB-310 1 2
pulse blocking input and command outputs
1 (redundant
Power supply 110..250VDC with 4 FSO PS-300 1 2
supply)
1 (redundant
Power supply 24..60VDC with 4 FSO PS-500 1 2
supply)
4 (2 or 3 wire) AM-010 1 2
PT100 measuring input
1 (2 .. 4 wire) AB-320 1 2
Rotor and stator earth fault detection, shaft

1 AB-320 1 2
current detection, SFC earth fault detection
2 AB-330 1 1
Speed Input for active or passiv speed sensor
2 AM-020 1 1
1 for HIPASE-T
4 TR-300 1 and HIPASE-S
VT measuring input 100 VAC
8 TR-310 1 2 for HIPASE-E
and HIPASE-P
Frequency- resp. speed measuring over VT

2 AB-330 1 2
measuring input 100 VAC

DGB-004-1.04
11. AB-310 APPLICATION BOARD EXCITATION
The application board AB-310 (gate control) is required for control of thyristor bridges and is therefore mandatory in
each HIPASE-E device. Additional analog and digital inputs and outputs are used for measured value recording or
data point output or the detection of application-specific conditions such as the fuse trip. The application board AB-
310 requires at least one external pulse amplifier type LG6X. The synchronization of gate pulses derives from three
electrically isolated analog inputs which are connected either directly or via an auxiliary winding of the exciter
transformer to the power supply of the thyristor bridge. A ground fault on one of the three synchronizing voltages
does not affect the functionality of the gate control. For the maximum number of application boards in the device
please refer to basic functions in hardware components.
Top view of board AB-310
11.1. FEATURES
 Possibility of two-channel version of power supply, internal Ethernet communication and clock
synchronization to increase availability
 State monitoring and control of the thyristor bridge (synchronous voltage, pulse generation)
 Galvanically isolated field current and field voltage measurement inputs via transducer
 Detection of diode failures at generators with rotating rectifier by field current analysis
 Current distribution between thyristor bridges (use of 2 pieces of AB-310 required)
 Determining the temperature of the rotor winding via field voltage and current
 Requires external pulse isolation amplifier (e. g. LG6X) for thyristor firing
 Grounding point for shield wire on terminal end
 Monitoring the minimum impedance of the gate pulse cable for 2 groups, each with 3 channels

DGB-004-1.04
 2 x digital output for enabling and disabling of gate pulse blocking, 1 x digital input for command gate pulse
blocking
 Slot for optional extension module AM-010
11.2. TERM DEFINITION
Term ↓ Explanation
Activation of pulse angle preset When active, for pulse generation the pulse angle preset value is used instead of the current controller
(bin.) output.
Field current Is the sum of the thyristor bridge output currents and does not include the initial excitation current.
Hold-in range A The overlapping range of the lock-in ranges E1 and E2 is called working area A.
This direct current is used for initial excitation of the generator and is being provided by an external power
Initial excitation current
source.
Is that limit value of the pulse angle, which must not be exceeded in order to avoid inverter commutation
Inverter limit value (analog)
failure of the thyristor bridge.
When active, for pulse generation the parameterized inverter limit value is used regardless of pulse angle
Inverter limit forcing (bin.)
preset value (current controller output or pulse angle preset value).
In these V/f ranges of synchronizing voltage the pulse formation is always started with sudden
Lock-in ranges E1+E2
synchronizing voltage rise.
Outside the synchronizing range the pulse formation is no longer possible. Therefore, a status message is
Out of Synchronizing range
issued and the function "Gate pulse blocking" is automatically executed.
Phase-locked loop: Internal software function to form an internal reference signal for the gate pulse
PLL
generation which is in phase with the applied thyristor voltage
„Picket fence“ gate pulse

When active, gate pulses are output with a defined pulse shape during the conduction time of the active
generation in thyristor bridge
thyristor. Only this mode is not compatible with the characteristics of external pulse amplifier LG6X !
operation
A user accessible setting value for testing and commissioning purposes to define the pulse angle of the
Pulse angle preset value (analog)
output pulses directly.
Pulse chain for LG6X in diode or

When active, gate pulses are continuously output with the defined pulse-pause ratio.
freewheeling operation
Is that limit value of the pulse angle where the reliable firing is ensured from. It balances the largest value
Rectifier limit value (analog) of the three phase angle detection tolerance values for dynamic processes. (rapid change of frequency,
phase shift, amplitude jump)
Is the excitation current in the rotor winding. This corresponds to the field current in the case of a static
Rotor current
excitation. At exciter machines it is a tapped value from the exciter ring of the generator.
Synchronizing range S In this V/f range of the synchronizing voltage pulse formation is retained after successful synchronization.
Is that AC voltage which is applied at the input of the thyristor bridge. The measurement should be taken
Thyristor voltage without an intermediate switching device. For short-circuit protection a monitored circuit breaker on the
primary side of the synchronizing transformer has to be provide.

DGB-004-1.04
11.3. ORDER AND TECHNICAL DATA
Complete application board
BGE-101-- (orderable only together with configuration code, refer to

Material number for spare part order chapter 43.5)
Internal ASAP#: CON0BGE101-
Material number of physical base board (refer to serial number label) CGE-001 (can not be ordered separately)
Board width 2 slots
without AM-010: 0.42 kg

Weight
with AM-010: 0.6 kg
Dimensions incl. terminals (Height x Width x Depth) 262 x 198 x 40 mm
Power consumption (internal) 6W
Temperature range for operation – 5 .. 55 °C
Temperature range for storage and transport – 40 .. 75 °C
Allowed slot positions in MEDIUM sized housing F
Allowed slot positions in LARGE sized housing J, (2nd option: D)
Characteristic value in configuration code of device 'E' without extension module or 'D' with extension module
MTBF of component 814.332 hours (92.7 years)
FIT value for MTBF calculation of complete device

(Mean Time Between Failure)
1228
MTBF calculation refert to chap. 8, MTBF calculation (Mean Time
Between Failure)
Surge category III (These are equipments in fixed installations and for
cases where particular requirements are placed on the reliability and
availability of the equipment.)
Contamination level 2 is expected. (Only non-conductive pollution can
happen. Occasionally, however, a temporary conductivity must be
Isolation acc. IEC 60664-1 expected due to condensation.)
2,2 kV (50 Hz) 60 s,
5 kV pulse (1,2 / 50 μs) 5 positive und 5 negative pulses
Out of operation, proper function before and after the test

DGB-004-1.04
11.4. NUMBER OF BOARDS IN HIPASE DEVICE

HIPASE Medium: 1 x AB-310 + option AM-010
HIPASE Large: 2 x AB-310 + optional AM-010
If a second application board excitation is to be used, it must also be placed in the HIPASE Engineering Tool in the
"Configuration" ribbon in the "Hardware" group with the "Assembly" command. Afterwards, the "Secondary
application module" command can be selected in the "Excitation" ribbon in the "General" group.

DGB-004-1.04
11.5. GATE PULSE OUTPUTS OF GATE CONTROL
11.5.1. TECHNICAL DATA
The K133H or K233H cables are required to make the connection between the grid pulse outputs of the AB-310
module and the LG6X isolation amplifier and its LG6LU3b, HLG6CDC type.
Special wiring is required to make the connection between the grid pulse outputs of the AB-310 board and the
LG6P1 type of LG6X power amplifier.
Only the terminal strip X12 of the LG6X isolation amplifier or its types may be used for establishing the connection.
The use of terminal block X11 of the LG6X isolation amplifier for connection is NOT permitted.
Gate pulse Outputs These gate pulse outputs send control signals to downstream
GI1(L1+), GI2(L2+), GI3(L3+), GI4(L1-), GI5(L2-), GI6(L3-) (external) pulse amplifier with galvanic isolation.
Number of outputs 6
Output voltage / current each active pulse output 10 V / max. 60 mA
Output voltage / current each inactive pulse output < 0.4 V
Supported bridge types B6C, B6H Top, B6H Bottom, B2C, B2H Top, B2H Bottom, M3
LG6X BIT-070, with cable K133H / K233H

LG6LU3b BIT-053, with cable K133H / K233
HLG6CDC BIT-153, with cable K133H / K233H
Compatible pulse amplifier
LG6P1 BIT-152, requires special wiring
The connection with LG6X may only be made via its terminal
strip X12!
Maximum number of parallel connectable pulse amplifiers LG6X 5
Inverter limit value 90° .. 180°

(< 180° - commutation time - Phase angle detection tolerance) recommended: 150°
Rectifier limit value 0° .. 90°

(> Phase angle detection tolerance) recommended: 5°
Effective pulse angle preset value Between rectifier and inverter limit value
Gap between the end of a gate pulse and the beginning of the next
> 100 μs
gate pulse (minimum effective rate of change of pulse angle preset)
-1 pu correspond to 180°
Angle scaling 0 pu correspond to 90°
+1 pu correspond to 0°

DGB-004-1.04
Gate pulse Outputs These gate pulse outputs send control signals to downstream
GI1(L1+), GI2(L2+), GI3(L3+), GI4(L1-), GI5(L2-), GI6(L3-) (external) pulse amplifier with galvanic isolation.
Each 3 pulse channels have one isolated 2 watt power supply.

Supervision of gate pulse generation Does the internal power supply of the pulse generation fall below a
limit value, the status of the data point HWSupStatus changes.
EMC immunity EN 61131-2
Connection - Ground: 500V

Isolation voltage
Connection - Connection: 500V
Shielded system cable between AB-310 X1 and external pulse

amplifier LG6X resp. ZUP:
type K133H [TI4-133-A (1.2 m), TI5-133-A (2.4 m) or TI6-133-A (5.0
Special wiring recommendations m)] or
type K233H [TI4-233-- (1,2 m), TI5-233-- (2,4 m) or TI6-233-- (5,0 m)];
Cable shielding and U AUX 0V of 24V supply of LG6X to be
connected at earthing point (Faston plug) on LG6X.
11.5.2. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
For proper operation of the pulse amplifier, it must be connected to a 24 VDC / 1 A auxiliary supply via X10.
On the base board of the LG6X, the jumper X910 must be equipped!
Connection AB-310 with LG6X for all bridge types. The adjustment to the actual type of bridge is done by means of
parameterization and by means of wiring at the output side of the LG6X. The grounding of 24V power supply is exemplary
connected to the negative pole, but can be connected to the positive pole instead too.

DGB-004-1.04
11.6. FIELD / ROTOR VOLTAGE INPUT

Voltage input for connection of a measuring transducer for detecting the field or rotor voltage of a synchronous
generator.
CAUTION: Overloading or short circuit of the auxiliary voltage output is not monitored and distorts the
measurement via the external transducer! The auxiliary supply of the Uf-measurement input is independent of the
auxiliary supply of the measuring inputs and If1 If2.
Because of possible overloading the proper function of the measuring inputs must be checked 10 minutes after
turning on the HIPASE device.
Due to the voltage input is very high impedance and in order to avoid faulty measurements, it is recommended to
short-circuit the unused voltage input.
Measuring of the voltage on terminals of exciter field or on rotor

Analog Input field / rotor voltage measurement Uf terminals of synchronous machine using external voltage
transformer
SINEAX TV809, LEM CV 3

CAUTION: up to CGE-001-A with PZ23 / PZ30: in order to avoid
overloading the auxiliary supply, LEM CV3 or SINEAX TV809 must be
Compatible measuring transducers
powered externally! For all higher product states (from PZ24 or PZ31)
LEM CV3 or SINEAX TV809 can be supplied by the module.
Data point Uf
Measuring range input voltage (from transducer) 0 .. ±8 VDC
Max. permissible input voltage ±10 V
Input frequency range

0 .. 60 Hz
(Frequency response of the measuring transducer not considered)
27.8 µs low-pass 1. order, corresponds to 572 Hz @ -3 dB

Input filter time constant hardware
0 .. 10 s, low-pass 2. Order
Input filter time constant software
Accuracy of module input within the specified temperature range

2%
(accuracy of transducer not considered)
Resolution 15 Bit + sign
Sampling rate min. 4 ksps
Input impedance of measuring input 10 kOhm

DGB-004-1.04
Measuring of the voltage on terminals of exciter field or on rotor

Analog Input field / rotor voltage measurement Uf terminals of synchronous machine using external voltage
transformer
±15 V, 1,2 W for Uaux of Uf

Auxiliary supply for transducer overloading the auxiliary supply, LEM CV3 or SINEAX TV809 must be
powered externally! For all higher product states (from PZ24 or PZ31)
LEM CV3 or SINEAX TV809 can be supplied by the module.
Connection - Ground: 2.2 kV (50 Hz), 5 kV peak (1.2/50 μs)

Isolation voltage
Connection - Connection: 2.2 kV (50 Hz), 5 kV peak (1.2/50 μs)
System cable direct: type K45H_l=10m (TI5-045) from AB-310 to

LG6X
or at using of ZUP1:
Special wiring recommendations Shielded cable type K133H [TI4-133-A (1,2 m), TI5-133-A (2,4 m) or
TI6-133-A (5,0 m)] between AB-310 X1 and ZUP1.
System cable type: K45H_l=10m (TI5-045) from ZUP1 to LG6X
Apply cable shield at the ground point (faston plug) of AB-310!

DGB-004-1.04
11.6.2. BOARD PARAMETER
Related Data Value setting Default Setting

Parameter name Description
point range value step size
Transformer
Uf 1 .. 2000 V 500 V 1V Refer to data sheet of field voltage transformer
primary value
Transformer
Uf 1 .. 10 V 4V 0,01 V Refer to data sheet of field voltage transformer
secondary value
If not written in data sheet of generator:

Calculation of rated value of field voltage = Resistance of
Rated value Uf 1 .. 2000 V 300 V 1V
field winding at operation temperature * field rated
current (at rated power, voltage and power factor)
Offset correction value for field voltage measuring via

analog input Uf.
Setting of data point:
Standstill of the machine,
supplied measuring transducer,
-200000 .. setting of transformer secondary value = 8 V,
Offset Uf 0 pu 0,000001 pu
+200000 pu set rated value to transformer primary value.
Save and reload project.
Display of output Uf of POE GateControlIn.
Enter this displayed value with same sign as offset
value. Reset rated value to plant value again.
Filter time constant for one or two lowpass filters.

When using measuring transducer TV809 the low limit
value for time constant is 80 ms. An additional filtering in
Time constant 160 us .. 160
Uf 80 ms 1 us HIPASE device must therefore be avoided and thus set
lowpass filter ms
160 us.
When using measuring transducer CV3 the time
constant should be 80 ms in HIPASE device.
No filter
Activation and setting of lowpass filter steepness.
lowpass 1.
Filter charakteristic
Uf Order No filter - lowpass filter 1. order .. 20 dB each decade
lowpass filter
lowpass 2. lowpass filter 2. order .. 40 dB each decade
order

DGB-004-1.04
CAUTION: up to CGE-001-A with PZ23 / PZ30: in order to avoid overloading the auxiliary supply, LEM CV3 or
SINEAX TV809 must be powered externally! For all higher product states (from PZ24 or PZ31) LEM CV3 or
SINEAX TV809 can be supplied by the module.
Connection of LEM CV 3 to measuring input Uf of AB-310
Connection of SINEAX TV809 to measuring input Uf of AB-310
Parallel connection of two AB-310 modules for transducer supply

DGB-004-1.04
Connection of LEM CV 3 to measuring input Uf of two boards AB-310 in dual channel version

DGB-004-1.04
11.7. FIELD / ROTOR CURRENT INPUTS

Voltage input for connection of a measuring transducer for measuring the field or rotor current of a synchronous
generator.
CAUTION: For both measurement channels If1 and If2 internally one common auxiliary voltage source for
operation of the external transducers is available. This auxiliary supply is totally independent of that of the U-
measurement input. If the common auxiliary voltage output for If1 and If2 is overloaded or shorted, thus acts on
both possibly connected transducer for If1 and If2. The overload or short circuit of the auxiliary voltage is not being
monitored!
The correct function of the measurement must be checked 10 minutes after turning on the HIPASE device.
Due to the measurement inputs have very high impedance and in order to avoid incorrect measurements, it is
recommended to short-circuit not used measurement inputs.
Measurement of the field or rotor current of a synchronous

machine using external DC-DC converter.
If the internal current regulator and / or the internal thyristor
Analog Inputs field / rotor current measurement If1, If2
failure monitoring is used, one of two analog inputs are required
to recognize the positive or the negative field / rotor current. The
other analog input can be freely used in the FBD.
LEM HAS, LEM HAX, LEM HAL;

Compatible measuring transducer
LEM CV 3, SINEAX TV809
Measuring principle Hall effect CT: LEM HAS, LEM HAX

Measuring principle voltage drop on the shunt resistor: LEM CV 3,
SINEAX TV809.
Recommended measuring transducer CAUTION: up to CGE-001-A with PZ23 / PZ30: in order to avoid
overloading the auxiliary supply, LEM CV3 or SINEAX TV809 must be
powered externally!
For all higher product states (from PZ24 or PZ31) in sum (if1 and If2)
only one LEM CV3 or SINEAX TV809 can be supplied by the module.
Data points If1, If2
Measuring range input voltage (from transducer) 0 .. ±8 VDC
Max. permissible input voltage ±10 V
Input frequency range 0 .. 300 Hz, 3 dB cut-off frequency
Input filter time constant hardware expected 10 ms low-pass 1. order
Input filter time constant software max. 10 ms, low-pass 2. order
Accuracy of module input within the specified temperature range 0,2 % (±8V measuring range, 0 ... 100 Hz input frequency)
(accuracy of transducer not considered) 2 % (±8V measuring range, 300 Hz input frequency)

DGB-004-1.04
Measurement of the field or rotor current of a synchronous

machine using external DC-DC converter.
If the internal current regulator and / or the internal thyristor
Analog Inputs field / rotor current measurement If1, If2
failure monitoring is used, one of two analog inputs are required
to recognize the positive or the negative field / rotor current. The
other analog input can be freely used in the FBD.
Resolution 15 bit + 1 bit sign
Input impedance of measuring input 1 kOhm (from CGE-001-A with PZ24 / PZ31: 3 kOhm)
±15 V, 1,2 W total for aux. voltage of If1 and If2

Common aux. Supply for both external transducers (double overloading the auxiliary supply, LEM CV3 or SINEAX TV809 must be
connections) powered externally!
For all higher product states (from PZ24 or PZ31) in sum (if1 and If2)

Isolation voltage
System cable type K45H_l=10m (TI5-045). Apply cable shield at the

Special wiring recommendations
ground point (faston plug) of AB-310!

DGB-004-1.04
These become effective only after reloading the project.

Transformer
If1, If2 1 .. 10000 A 1000 A 1A Refer to data sheet of measuring transducer
primary value
Transformer
If1, If2 1 .. 10 V 4V 0,01 V Refer to data sheet of measuring transducer
secondary value
Field rated current from generator data sheet (at rated

Rated value If1, If2 1 .. 2000 A 600 A 1A
power, -voltage, -power factor)
Offset correction value for field current measuring via

analog input If1 or If2.
Setting of data point:
Standstill of the machine,
supplied measuring transducer,
-200000 .. setting of transformer secondary value = 8 V,
Offset If1, If2 0 pu 0,000001 pu
+200000 pu set rated value to transformer primary value.
Display of output If1 or If2 of POE GateControlIn.
Enter this displayed value with same sign as offset
value. Reset rated value to plant value again.
Filter time constant for one or two lowpass filters.

When using HAS- or HAX- LEM transducers the time
constant should be 5 ms in HIPASE device.
Time constant 160 us .. 159
If1, If2 5 ms 1 us
lowpass filter ms When using measuring transducer TV809 the low limit
value for time constant is 80 ms. An additional filtering in
HIPASE device must therefore be avoided and thus set
160 us.
No filter
Activation and setting of lowpass filter steepness.
lowpass 1.
Filter charakteristic
If1, If2 Order No filter - lowpass filter 1. order .. 20 dB each decade
lowpass filter
lowpass 2. lowpass filter 2. order .. 40 dB each decade
order

DGB-004-1.04
The connection diagrams with stated If1 are equally applicable for If2. In this case the terminals X2 / 13 ..16 have
to be used.
CAUTION: up to CGE-001-A with PZ23 / PZ30: in order to avoid overloading the auxiliary supply, LEM CV3 or
SINEAX TV809 must be powered externally! For all higher product states (from PZ24 or PZ31) in sum (if1 and If2)
For the measurement using a shunt in the field current circuit following circuits are provided:
Connection of LEM CV 3 with measuring of filed current via a shunt on measuring input If of AB-310. Suitable for actual value
measuring.
Connection of SINEAX TV809 with measuring of filed current via a shunt on measuring input If of AB-310 - CAUTION: Only
suitable for display, but too slow for actual value measuring!
For directly measuring of field current by a Hall current transformer the following circuits are provided:
Connection of LEM HAL, HAS or HAX to measuring input If of AB-310

DGB-004-1.04
11.8. SYNCHRONIZATION VOLTAGE INPUTS OF GATE CONTROL
Value and phase position of the synchronization voltages are

Analog Inputs Synchronization voltage measurement
used for the timing position of the pulses and for control
UsynL1, UsynL2, UsynL3
purposes.
Dimensioning: 10VA, PRIM.: 1- or 3-phase (1,3 x U ThyNom), SEC.:

Compatible synchronization voltage transformer (regulator 20 V free-wheel, Yyn0
transformer)
E.g.: Trafomodern type: DTZ 0,1/W
Input values AC voltage U L1, U L2, U L3 at thyristor bridges
UsynL1 for X2 / Pin 01

Data points UsynL2 for X2 / Pin 02
UsynL3 for X2 / Pin 03
Nominal voltage 15 V rms phase-to-phase
Measurement range 0.4 .. 21 V rms (max. 30 V peak) phase-to-phase
Max. permitted input voltage 26,5 V rms (max. 38 V peak) phase-to-phase
Max. permitted frequency change without loss of pulse

30 Hz / s
synchronization
16.66 .. 99 Hz (continuously adjustable)

For nominal frequencies above 100Hz, the parameter PLL_PropGain
Nominal frequency must be adapted.
100 .. 249 Hz: PLL_PropGain = 150
250 .. 450 Hz: PLL_PropGain = 300
Working frequency range

für Nennfrequenzbereich 16.66 .. 99 Hz: 10 Hz .. 4 x Nennfrequenz (default PLL_PropGain = 50)
für Nennfrequenzbereich 100 .. 124 Hz: 30 Hz .. 4 x Nennfrequenz (default PLL_PropGain = 150)
für Nennfrequenzbereich 125 .. 249 Hz: 30 Hz .. 500 Hz (PLL_PropGain = 150)
oder für Nennfrequenzbereich 250 .. 450 Hz: 60 Hz .. 670 Hz (PLL_PropGain = 300)
Input filter cut-off frequency 600 Hz, low pass 1. order
Lock-in range 1 (area E1 in figure) 0.75 V rms .. 21 V rms, in frequency range fn ± 10%
Lock-in range 2 (area E2 in figure) 12 V rms .. 21 V rms, in working frequency range
Hold-in range with specified measuring accuracy of phase angle and

12 V rms .. 21 V rms, in frequency range fn ± 10%
voltage (area A in figure)
3 V / 10 Hz .. 0.75 V / 40 Hz .. 0.75 V / 80 Hz .. 6 V / 500 Hz

Synchronizing range (area S in figure)
(see figure below)

DGB-004-1.04
Value and phase position of the synchronization voltages are

Analog Inputs Synchronization voltage measurement
used for the timing position of the pulses and for control
UsynL1, UsynL2, UsynL3
purposes.
Accuracy of measuring of phase angle within temperature and working

2°
range
Accuracy of measuring of phase angle outside the temperature and

4 ° static, 5 .. 10 ° dynamic
working range
Accuracy of voltage measuring within temperature and working range 2 % for sinusoidal input signals
Accuracy of voltage measuring outside the temperature and working

5 % for sinusoidal input signals
range
Resolution 15 bit + sign
Measuring tolerance of phase angle at frequency shift related to

max. 20 ° (rate of change: 40% nominal frequency / s)
nominal frequency
Regulation time at phase shift for reaching the accuracy of the phase
0,3 s at 180 ° phase shift and constant frequency
angle measurement in the work area.
Measuring tolerance of phase angle at amplitude shift related to Asymmetric (1 of 3 phases) 5° / V (rate of change: 1 pu / ms)
nominal voltage Symmetric (3 of 3 phases) 3° / V (rate of change: 1 pu / ms)
Input impedance > 70 kOhm

Isolation voltage
Place wires with low inductance and do not place near lines that are
subjected to high voltage or current changes.
Wire cross section 1.0 .. 1.5 mm² stranded with ferrule
Wire cross section AWG (kcmil) 17 .. 15 stranded with ferrule

DGB-004-1.04
11.8.2. DIAGRAMS OF SYNCHRONIZING AND LOCK-IN RANGE
U[pu]
A
Fn=16,7Hz
1.30
E2
0.80
S
E1
0.40
0.20 4*fn
0.05
0
13 20 66 f[Hz]
0
10
16.7
Figure: Synchronizing and lock-in range depending on the value at nominal frequency 16.7Hz of synchronizing voltage, (A)
working area, (S) synchronizing area, (E1) Lock-in range 1, (E2) Lock-in range 2
U[pu]
A
fn=50Hz
1.30
E2
0.80
S
0.40 E1
0.20
4*fn
0.05
0
10 45 55 200 f[Hz]
0
50
Figure: Synchronizing and lock-in range depending on the value at nominal frequency 50Hz of synchronizing voltage, (A)

DGB-004-1.04
U[pu] A
fn=60Hz
1.30
E2
0.80 S
0.40 E1
0.20 4*fn
0.05
0
10 54 66 240 f[Hz]
0
60
U[pu]
A
fn=250Hz
1.30 E2
0.80
S
E1
0.40
0.20
0.05
0
225 275 f[Hz]
25 500
0 250

DGB-004-1.04
The settings of transformer primary value, transformer secondary value und rated value are also used for the
generator voltage limiter function and for displaying of primary values in the HIPASE Engineering Tool.
The way of calculating the setting values for the parameters distinguishes between displaying the generator voltage
or the thyristor voltage as primary value.
Parameter name Display of thyristor voltage Display of generator voltage
primary value of synchronization voltage

Transformer primary value of excitation tranformer, which is connected with
transformer (regulator transformer), which is
primary value the machine terminals.
connected with the HIPASE device terminals.
Secondary value of synchronization voltage transformer

(regulator transformer), which is connected with the HIPASE
device.
(The synchronization voltage transformer is connected after the
secondary value of synchronization voltage excitation transformer)
Transformer
transformer (regulator transformer), which is
secondary value calculating of setting value:
connected with the HIPASE device.
transformer secondary value = U2SEC / U2PR * U1SEC
U2SEC .. regulator transformer secondary value
U2PR .. regulator transformer primary value
U1SEC .. excitation transformer secondary value
calculating of setting value:

Generator rated voltage at shunt excitation
rated value = U1SEC / U1PR * UGK
Rated value resp.
UGK .. Generator terminal voltage
U1PR .. excitation transformer primary value rated voltage of separate excitation
U1SEC .. excitation transformer secondary value
Design for displaying of primary values
Setting values in table

UsynL1
Transformer Refer to table ‘Design for displaying of
UsynL2 1 .. 100000 V 13800 V 1V
primary value primary value’
UsynL3
UsynL1
Transformer Refer to table ‘Design for displaying of
UsynL2 1 .. 100 V 15,38 V 0,01 V
secondary value primary value’
UsynL3
UsynL1
Refer to table ‘Design for displaying of
Rated value UsynL2 1 .. 100000 V 13800 V 1V
primary value’
UsynL3

DGB-004-1.04

Filter time constant for one or two lowpass

filters.
UsynL1
Time constant This time constant has to be equal as time
UsynL2 160 us .. 160 ms 16 ms 1 us
lowpass filter constant of generator voltage filter.
UsynL3
Setting value has to be the same for all
three phases.
Activation and adjustment of the slope of

the lowpass filter.
UsynL1 No filter 1st order low pass: 20 dB per decade
Filter characteristic
UsynL2 lowpass 1. order No filter - 2nd order low pass: 40 dB per decade
lowpass filter
UsynL3 lowpass 2. order For proper operation of the PLL, the default
value in all three phases must be equally
set to 'No filter'.

DGB-004-1.04
When a synchronizing transformer is provided for adapting the thyristor bridge voltage to the synchronizing voltage
inputs, following should be noted:
 No phase rotation
 Over excitability in accordance with the maximum possible voltage thyristor
 Grounded shield winding
 Secondary side of the synchronizing transformer (AB-310 side) earthed, otherwise large measuring errors
possible
Connection 3-phase
Connection of the synchronizing transformer to the measuring inputs of the AB-310

applies to topologies B6C, B6H (top and bottom), M3 (top and bottom)
Connection 2-phase
AB-310
Synchronisier-
Trafo X2
Thyristor- L1 01 UsynL1
Spannung 02 UsynL2
einphasig N 03 UsynL3
Connection of the synchronizing transformer to the measuring inputs of the AB-310

applies to topologies B2C, B2H (top and bottom), M2 (top and bottom)
11.9. THYRISTOR CONDUCTIVITY MONITORING, POU BRIDGESUPERVISION

Please refer to chap. Error! Reference source not found. Error! Reference source not found.(LINK)

DGB-004-1.04
11.10. DIGITAL INPUT GATE PULSE BLOCKING GPB

For blocking thyristor bridges individually, the external pulse amplifier LG6X has a bistable relay that is controlled
by the digital outputs GPBON and GPBOFF of AB-310. So the common supply voltage (+ UB, + 24V) from all 6
amplifier stages is switched off in LG6X. The exact function is described below.
This input always blocks the pulse generation for all pulse outputs
Digital Input GPB (Gate Pulse Blocking) of AB-310 and is passed through via the contact GPBON to the
external pulse amplifier to shut down the pulse outputs.
Jumper between Pin 2-3: input range 0 .. 24 VDC, threshold 17 VDC

Input range / threshold - selectable via plug position of the hardware Jumper between Pin 1-2: input range 0 .. 48 VDC, threshold 35 VDC
jumper X901 Jumper between Pin 3-4: input range 0 .. 110 VDC, threshold 79 VDC
No Jumper: input range 0 .. 220 VDC, threshold 158 VDC
Terminal connection X2 / 04, 05
Data point GPB (Gate Pulse Blocking)
Input current constant 2,5 mA after exceeding the threshold
Input current 10 ms (Arc forcing) not available
Minimum pulse duration 2 ms

Isolation voltage

DGB-004-1.04
11.10.2. JUMPER SETTING FOR SWITCHING THRESHOLD
Digital input GPB / Input range and threshold setting with jumper position of
hardware jumper X901 on application board AB-310

DGB-004-1.04
11.11. DIGITAL OUTPUT GATE PULSE BLOCKING GPBON / GPBOFF
Relay Output GPBON (Command pulse blocking) Starting command for pulse blocking in external pulse amplifier.
Latency of the relay output
Pulse duration of normally open contact 1s
Data point GPBON (Gate Pulse Blocking ON)
Nominal current (ohmic load) 8 A, 30 A @ 0,5 sec Make & Carry
Maximum switching capacity (ohmic load) 2000 W
Maximum switching voltage 250 VAC / 230 VDC
Minimum switching current 100 mA / 5V

Isolation voltage
Terminating the pulse blocking command for the external pulse

Relay Output GPBOFF (Command pulse release)
amplifier.
Latency of the relay output
Pulse duration of normally open contact 1s
Data point GPBOFF (Gate Pulse Blocking OFF)
Nominal current (ohmic load) 8 A, 30 A @ 0,5 sec Make & Carry
Maximum switching capacity (ohmic load) 2000 W
Maximum switching voltage 250 VAC / 230 VDC

DGB-004-1.04
Terminating the pulse blocking command for the external pulse

Relay Output GPBOFF (Command pulse release)
amplifier.
Minimum switching current 100 mA / 5V

Isolation voltage
11.11.2. DATA POINTS
Inputs
Signal terminal
Name Value Description
connection
Additional gate pulse generation in AB-310 is

suppressed as long as this digital input is active.
GPB (Gate Pulse 0 .. no pulse blocking
X2 / 04, 05 The rising edge of this input causes a pulse on digital
Blocking) 1 .. active pulse blocking
output GPBON, the falling edge causes a pulse on
digital output GBPOFF.
Outputs
Signal terminal
Name Value Description
connection
GPBOFF 0 .. inactive Digital output for 1 s - pulse to control the external

(Gate Pulse Blocking X2 / 06, 07 downstream pulse amplifier. This output is set to end
OFF) 1 .. finish pulse blocking a pulse blocking.
GPBON 0 .. inactive Digital output for 1 s - pulse to control the external

(Gate Pulse Blocking X2 / 06, 08 downstream pulse amplifier. This output is set to
ON) 1 .. starting pulse blocking begin a pulse blocking.

DGB-004-1.04
Connection diagram between pulse blocking contacts together with feedback and external pulse amplifier LG6X

DGB-004-1.04
11.11.4. LOGIC BEHAVIOR
The POU Input GatePulseEna enables the gate pulse generation. The POU Output GatePulseStatus indicates if
the gate pulses are generated at the moment. Via the digital input GPB the gate pulse generation can externally be
blocked (e.g. protection trip). To increase the blocking security the power supply for the pulse amplifier LG6X is
also switched via the digital outputs GPBON and GPBOFF.
Since Ver. 0.90.00
up to Ver. 0.49.30 inclusive

DGB-004-1.04
11.12. GATE PULSE MODES
11.12.1. SPECIAL PULSE MODE: GATE BLOCKING
This superordinate pulse mode always suppresses pulse generation regardless of the defined pulse mode. During
the transition to this mode ‘Gate blocking’ the current pulse remains preserved, until the next pulse is suppressed.
The reaction time in normal operation is dependent on the frequency of Usyn.
11.12.2. PULSE MODE: RECTIFIER MODE (DIODE OPERATION)
The pulse mode ‘Rectifier mode’ is usually required for field flashing at rated speed of the machine. In this mode
the thyristor voltage is not rated. This mode is selected via the input ‘OpMode’ of POU GateControlOut. Gate puls
chains are submitted to all thyristors simultaneously with 600 Hz and with a 1 : 6 pulse-period ratio.
11.12.3. PULSE MODE: FREE-WHEELING MODE
The free-wheeling mode is usually required for the feed switchover of a thyristor bridge or for static de-excitation in
case of a failure in the excitation system (not de-activation of thyristor bridge). With the input ‘OpMode’ of the POU
GateControlOut the freewheeling thyristor L1 or L2 or L3 can be selected. For the chosen thyristor branch gate puls
chains are submitted to the thyristors
GI1 (L1+) and GI4 (L1-) or
GI2 (L2+) and GI5 (L2-) or
GI3 (L3+) and GI6 (L3-)
with 600 Hz and with a 1 : 6 pulse-period ratio.
11.12.4. PULSE MODE: THYRISTOR NORMAL MODE
This mode is selected via the input ‘OpMode’ of POU GateControlOut. For details please refer to chapter
application excitation!

DGB-004-1.04
11.12.5. PULSE MODE: THYRISTOR INVERTER MODE
This mode is commonly used to demagnetize the magnet wheel of the machine. The pulse angle is set to the value
of parameter MaxGatePulseAngle (upper inverter limit) of POU GateControlOut. All other setting are copied from
setting for ‘thyristor normal mode’.
11.13. ERROR IMPACT TABLE

Error messages are generally passed without release delay (exception: PLL error of 1 s OFF delay). A self-hold is
not implemented (non-persistent).
If the AB-310 module loses communication with the CP-300 central processing unit during operation, a device
error is triggered immediately.
If the AB-310 module loses communication with the CP-300 central unit during a restart, a device error is signaled
and the HIPASE device changes to the "Load" mode.
Gate pulse modes
ParameterStatus
PhaseSeqStatus
PhaseSeqFault
HWSupStatus
HWSupFault
POU output
POU output
POU output
POU output
POU output
POU output
POU output
POU output
POU output
PLLStatus
OpStatus
PLLFault
FAULT
Curren - - - - -
Currently Currently tly no
Internal loss of
no error no error error - -
communication
processing processing proces
sing
10 (Error) 3 (Error) Active - - -

Gate pule
PLLFault Active for Active - -
blocking
1s
PhaseSeqFault Gate pule 2 - - - - -

Active 4 (Error) Active
blocking (Standby)
SyncVoltFault 10 (Error) - Active - - -

Gate pule
(missing sync. voltage, Active for Active 1 (Init) Active
blocking
singe / three phase) only 1ms
HWSupFault 10 (Error) - - 1 Active -

Gate pule (Thyristo
(Loss of gate pulse Active for Active - -
blocking r Pulse)
supply) only 1ms
Curren - - - - -
tly no
Bridge current-
- - error - -
distribution error
proces
sing
- - - - 3
Not
Parameter error - - - - (Paramet
Active
er error)

DGB-004-1.04
11.14. CONNECTION DIAGRAM AB-310

DGB-004-1.04
Block diagram with marked red coding pins on the socket as polarity protection* / physical view of board cover plate from device
back view
*) Caution: A factory assembly with mechanical terminal coding was only realized between product state 21 and
product state 32 of the CGE-001-A.
11.15. TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OF TERMINAL STRIPS (X1, X2)
Connection
Data point Function
nomination
X1/01 - Gate pulse Output 1 12 V
X1/02 - Gate pulse Output 1 GND
X1/13 - Uf measuring transducer aux. voltage +15 V
X1/14 Uf Scaled field voltage actual value measured by analog input Uf connection ±15 V
X1/15 Uf Scaled field voltage actual value measured by analog input Uf connection 0 V
X1/16 - Uf measuring transducer aux. voltage -15 V

DGB-004-1.04
Connection
Data point Function
nomination
X2/01 UsynL1 Effective value of phase voltage Usync L1-L3 ±20 V
X2/04 GatePulseBlocking Gate Pulse Blocking Digital Input +24 V
X2/05 GatePulseBlocking Gate Pulse Blocking Digital Input GND
X2/06 - Relay Digital Output COM
X2/07 GatePulseBlockingOFF Digital Output Normally Open relay contact
X2/08 GatePulseBlockingON Digital Output Normally Open relay contact
X2/09 - If1 measuring transducer aux. voltage +15 V
X2/10 If1 Scaled field current actual value measured by analog input If1 connection ±15 V
X2/11 If1 Scaled field current actual value measured by analog input If1 connection 0 V
X2/12 - If1 measuring transducer aux. voltage -15 V
X2/13 - If2 measuring transducer aux. voltage +15 V
X2/14 If2 Scaled field current actual value measured by analog input If2 connection ±15 V
X2/15 If2 Scaled field current actual value measured by analog input If2 connection 0 V
X2/16 - If2 measuring transducer aux. voltage -15 V
11.16. CONNECTION FOR SHIELD GROUNDING
Connection for Shield Grounding (X1 / P1, P2 and X2 / P1, P2)
Fast-on connection DIN 46342 6,35 x 0,83 2 groups with 2 fast-on male connectors each
Fast-on female plug connector plug width: 6.35 mm plug thickness:

0.5 mm 180 °

DGB-004-1.04
11.17. EQUIPPING OPTIONS WITH EXTENSION MODULES
Material number Nomination Data sheet
CGB-014 AM-010 Application Module 6AI, 4AO, 4PT100 Refer to data sheet
11.18. MECHANICAL TERMINAL CODING

Caution: A factory assembly with mechanical terminal coding was only realized between product state 21 and
product state 32 of the CGE-001-A.
Black areas indicate inserted coding pins on the socket (B) and the plug (S).

DGB-004-1.04
11.19. ACCESSORIES, SPARE PARTS
Nomination Material number Details
Plug connector with strain relief with two

screws, Nominal current: 12 A, Number of
PHOENIX Contact FRONT-MSTB 2,5/16-
contacts: 16, pitch: 5.08 mm, Connection EI959506--
STF-5,08 BU - 1704588
method: screw terminals, Color: blue (fully
equipped at delivery)
Pulse amplifier LG6X BIT-070-B External gate pulse amplifier with cover
External dual channel switch-over module

Dual channel switch-over module ZUP1 Var.1 BIT-045-A (required for dual channel gate pulse switch-
over)
Required for measuring of field voltage Uf at

Voltage measuring transformer 350V LEM CV 3-500
the measuring input
Isolation amplifier, unipolar/bipolar, 1 channel, Required for measuring of field voltage Uf at

GMC SINEAX TV809
programmable, Ex/NEx the measuring input
100 VA three phase-control transformer Required for measuring of synchronization

PRIM.: 3 x (1.3 x U ThyNom), SEC.: 20 V no- Trafomodern DTZ 0,1 voltage UsynL1, UsynL2, UsynL3 at the
load, Yyn0 measuring input
1.2 m long non-halogenic and shielded

K133H Cable for gate pulses and measuring connection between AB-310 X1 and external
TI4-133-A
of field voltage 1.2 m non-halogenic gate pulse amplifier LG6X or ZUP1 and to
field voltage measuring transducer

TI5-133-A

TI6-133-A

connection between AB-310 X1 and external
K233H Cable for gate pulses 1.2 m non-
TI4-233-- gate pulse amplifier LG6X or ZUP1 without
halogenic
connection to field voltage measuring
transducer

halogenic
transducer

halogenic
transducer

DGB-004-1.04
10.0 m long connection between AB-310 and

System cable type K45H_l=10 m non-
TI5-045 external measuring transformers of LEM HAL,
halogenic
HAS, HAX
11.20. VALIDITY
Document valid for hardware: Mat. No. CGE-001-- and CGE-001-A
Devices higher than V 1.00.00 support only application boards higher than version CGE-001-A with product state
00.

DGB-004-1.04
12. AB-320 APPLICATION BOARD PROTECTION
AB-320 is used as an optional part for the application of protective device HIPASE-P. Additional analog and digital
inputs and outputs are used for data acquisition or data point output or the detection of application-specific
conditions such as insulation resistance. The AB-320 requires external ballasts. For the maximum number of
modules in the device please refer to basic functions in hardware components.
12.1. FEATURES
 Measurement and calculation of rotor earth fault protection

 Measurement and calculation of 100% stator earth fault protection
 Measurement and calculation of shaft current protection
 Measurement of temperature (2-, 3- or 4-wire PT100 measurement)
 Measurement of start-up frequency converter earth fault protection
 Parametrizable Analog Output 0 .. 5 V, 0 .. 10 V, ± 5 V, ± 10 V, 4 .. 20 mA, 0 .. 20 mA, 0 .. 24 mA
 2 x Analog Input 0(4) .. 20 mA or ± 10 V
 Slot for an optional AM-010 submodule
For the realization of a 20Hz stator earth fault protection external ballasts are required.

DGB-004-1.04
Complete board
BGP-101-- (orderable only together with configuration code, refer to

Internal ASAP Mat. No.: CON0BGP101-
Material number of physical base board (refer to serial number label) CGP-001 (can not be ordered separately)
Board width 2 slots

Weight
with AM-010: 0.7 kg
Temperature range for operation – 5 °C .. 55 °C
Temperature range for transport – 25 °C .. + 70 °C
Temperature range for storage 0 °C .. + 55 °C, 25 °C recommended
Characteristic value in configuration code of device 'P' without extension module or 'G' with extension module

1248
Between Failure)

DGB-004-1.04
12.3. NUMBER OF BOARDS IN THE HIPASE DEVICE

HIPASE Medium: 1 x AB-320 + optional AM-010
HIPASE Large: 2 x AB-320 + optional AM-010
If a second application board protection is to be used, it must also be placed in the HIPASE Engineering Tool in the
"Configuration" ribbon in the "Hardware" group with the "Assembly" command. Then the "Configuration" ribbon in
the "Hardware" group can be used to display the display of the HIPASE device configuration with the "Assembly"
command. After selecting the desired modules and selecting the context menu "Edit with the right mouse button,
the module parameters can be edited.
1. A HIPASE Large housing has been equipped with two AB-320 application boards and the optional AM-010
expansion board.
2. The boards parameters of the selected module can be changed via the context menu "Edit". After the change,
"Load" must be selected for the changes to the boards parameters to take effect.

DGB-004-1.04
12.4. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS, WHICH REQUIRE AB-320
Mat. No. Description ID ANSI Code Input
ovrAnalogInput,
SGP-012-- OverAnalogInput / UnderAnalogInput 76, 50DC, 51DC, 37DC AI-01 or AI-02
udrAnalogInput
SGP-014-- Overtemperature ovrTemp 38 AI-T-01
SGP-017-- Over/Undervoltage DC ovrVltDc, udrVltDc 59DC, 27DC AI-01 or AI-02
SGP-028-- Stator earth fault 20Hz resistance (AB) StatorEarth20HzRes 64G StatorEarth
SGP-029-- Rotor earth fault RotorEarth 64R RotorEarth
SGP-033-- SFC earth fault SfcEarth 64SFC U SFC
SGP-034-- Shaft overcurrent ovrCurShaft 50SH, 51SH I Shaft

DGB-004-1.04
12.5. ANALOG INPUT

CAUTION: The default setting for the measuring ranges of the inputs is voltage measurement. To avoid damaging
the module, before the first application of the input signals the proper input range of the input signals must be
selected by HIPASE engineering tool!
Analog Input AI-01, AI-02
Data point AI-01, AI-02
-10 .. +10 VDC (default setting)

Input range of input signal (via measuring transducer)
0 .. 20 mA
terminals X2 / 12, 13 or 15, 16
Selectable with parameter in HIPASE Engineering Tool
Maximum input signal ± 12 VDC, ± 25 mA
Behavior at signal overrange or wire break Saturation resp. zero
Input frequency range 0 .. 500 Hz
Input filter time constant of hardware lower 33 μs lowpass 1. order (-3 dB @ 4800 Hz)
Accuracy of board voltage input within the specified temperature

1 % (± 0.1 V)
range (without accuracy of external measuring transducer)
Accuracy of board current input within the specified temperature range

1 % (± 0,2 mA)
(without accuracy of external measuring transducer)
Sampling rate 1ksps
Minimum burden for operation mode voltage input 20 kOhm
Maximum burden for operation mode current input 10 Ohm
EMC immunity IEC 60255-26, EN 61131-2
Connection - Ground: 1.5 kV (50 Hz), 2.5 kV peak (1.2/50 μs)

Isolation voltage
Connection - Connection: 1.5 kV (50 Hz), 2.5 kV peak (1.2/50 μs)
Place shielded wires with low inductance and do not place near lines
that are subjected to high voltage or current changes.

DGB-004-1.04
12.5.2. DATA POINTS - INPUTS
Datapoint name Data type Value Description
AI01 resp. AI-02 Float32 p.u. Value of signal of analog input
Error in ADC or communication with ADC

or
AI-01 disturbed (IV)
Bool
wire break, if input current <2 mA in current input mode
(4 - 20 mA)
12.5.3. BOARD PARAMETERS
Default value Setting step

Parameter name Value setting range Description
size
-10 .. +10 VDC

Measuring range 0 .. 20 mA -10 .. +10 VDC - 4 .. 20 mA range supports wire-break detection
4 .. 20 mA
Rated input value of current / voltage transformer or

measuring transducer.
Transformer primary 1 .. 10000 V, A, W, Refer to data sheet of measuring transducer.
1000 A 0,001 V, A
value VAr, VA, °el., Ohm
Selectable only if parameter ‘Transformer connected’ is
‘Yes’.
Rated output value of measuring transducer connected

- 10 .. + 10 V 4V with HIPASE device.
Transformer secondary Refer to data sheet of measuring transducer.
0,004 .. 0,02 A 0,01 A 0,01 V
value
- 0,02 .. + 0,02 A 0,01 A Selectable only if parameter ‘Transformer connected’ is
‘Yes’.
Rated value of measured plant variable.

1 .. 10000 V, A, W,
Rated value 1000 A 0,001 V, A Selectable only if parameter ‘Transformer connected’ is
VAr, VA, °el., Ohm
‘Yes’.
Yes: input scaling based on transformer data

Nein
Transformer connected Nein - No: input scaling based on straight line equation y = kx
Ja
+d
Assignment of the lower end range of the analog input

1 .. 10000 V, A, W,
Minimum value 1000 V, A 0,001 V, A (4 mA, 10 V, 20 mA) to the lowest possible primary
VAr, VA, °el., Ohm
value of the transducer connected to HIPASE device.

DGB-004-1.04
Default value Setting step

size
Assignment of the upper end range of the analog input

1 .. 10000 V, A, W,
Maximum value 1000 V, A 0,001 V, A (4 mA, 10 V, 20 mA) to the highest possible primary
VAr, VA, °el., Ohm
value of the transducer connected to HIPASE device.
Offset correction value used to compensate a possible

DC component of the input signal.
The permitted value range is determined by the
specifications for "Minimum value" and "Maximum
value" according to the following condition:
Offset See description 0 0,000001 pu ( Max  Min ) ( Max  Min )
 Korrekturwert 
2 2
Example:
Maximum value: 300, Minimum value: -200, then the
correction value must be in the interval [-249 .. +249].
Time constant lowpass

160 us .. 160 ms 5 ms 1 us Filter time constant for one or two lowpass filters.
filter
Kein Filter Activation and setting of lowpass filter steepness.

Filter characteristic Tiefpass 1.
Tiefpass 1. Ordnung - lowpass filter 1. order .. 20 dB each decade
lowpass filter Ordnung
Tiefpass 2. Ordnung lowpass filter 2. order .. 40 dB each decade
12.5.4. CONNECTION OF ANALOG INPUT
Connection of measuring transducer with ±24 mA or ±10 V output to voltage analog input AI-01
(Input AI-02 connected in the same way on X2 / 15, 16)

DGB-004-1.04
12.6. ANALOG OUTPUT

The current source may be used i.a. for remote indication of the rotor earth resistance at an electromechanical
instrument. A wire break or overloading of the current source will be recognized thereby initiating an appropriate
alarm.
CAUTION: The output value of the output channels is undefined during the startup or shutdown process of the
HIPASE device. The undefined state of the output channels is displayed with the HIPASE device output contact
"Device Error" and must be included for safety-relevant applications.
Analog Output AO-01
Configurable ranges in HIPASE Engineering Tool:

Output signal between terminals X2 / 01, 02
0 .. 20 mA
4 .. 20 mA
Data point AO-01
Max. burden at current output mode 500 Ohm
Min. burden at voltage output mode 1 kOhm
Output frequency range 0 .. 100 Hz
Low pass 1. order: 10 us at voltage, 1,8 us at current

Output filter time constant hardware
-3 dB: 15 kHz at voltage, 88 kHz at current
Accuracy of output within the specified temperature range 1%
Resolution DAC 15 bit + 1 bit sign
Output rate DAC 1 ksps

Isolation voltage

DGB-004-1.04
12.6.2. DATA POINTS - OUTPUTS
AO-01 Float32 p.u. Value of signal of analog output
Default Setting
value step size
- 10 .. + 10 VDC
- 10 .. +
Signal range 0 .. 20 mA - 4 .. 20 mA range supports wire-break detection
10 VDC
4 .. 20 mA
Assignment of a lower limit value of the data point to the lower end of
Minimum value 1 .. 200000 0 0,000001 the range of the analog output (4 mA, 0 mA, 0 V, -10 V). Output scaling
is based on the linear equation y = kx + d
Assignment of an upper limit value of the data point to the upper end of
Maximum value 1 .. 200000 100 0,000001 the range of the analog output (4 mA, 0 mA, 0 V, -10 V). Output scaling
is based on the linear equation y = kx + d
12.6.4. CONNECTION OF ANALOG OUTPUT
Connection of pointer instrument with moving coil movement to analog output AO1

DGB-004-1.04
12.7. TEMPERATURE MEASURING VIA PT100

The transducer is designed for use with PT100 elements in 2-, 3- and 4-wire configuration. A temperature range of
-50C to +200C would be possible but due to compatibility reasons the range is limited to
-40C to +120C. Temperatures below -40C are interpreted as wiring shorts and above +120C as wire break
which will in both case be annunciated.
Functional Principle
The measuring principle is based on a bridge circuit which is supplied by a reference voltage source. The voltage
difference of the two bridge branches is applied for the computation of the temperature.
Temperature evaluation AI-T-01
Compatible measuring sensors Ziehl TF101 / G3-5kV PT100 DIN / 2 wire
Possible connections 2-, 3-, or 4-wire-measuring method for PT100 evaluation
Name of protective function in HIPASE Engineering Tool ovrTemp , udrTemp
Max. allowed voltage between terminals X1 / 9, 10, 11, 12 0,7 Vpeak AC / 0,7 VDC
Measuring range temperature -40 .. 200 °C (-40 .. 392 °F)
Resolution ADC 15 bit, 1bit sign
Actualization rate of temperature value 10 output values / s
Measuring resolution 1K
Accuracy of temperature detection within specified temperature rate 1K
EMV immunity IEC 60255-26, EN 61131-2

Isolation voltage

DGB-004-1.04
Datenpunkt-Name Data type Values Description
AI-T-01 Uint32 -40 .. 200 °C Value of measured temperature in °C
Name of Value setting Default Setting Description

Data type
Parameter range value step size
AI-T-01 evaluates circuit with the 2-wire

measurement
2-wire
Mode SingleChoice 3- wire 3-wire -
measurement
4- wire
measurement
2 wire connection with PT100

DGB-004-1.04
12.7.5. PLANT CALIBRATION FOR TEMPERATURE MEASURING VIA PT100 FOR 2-WIRE
CONNECTION
As a prerequisite for a successful calibration, the correct wiring must be set under the "Mode" parameter in the
board parameters of the AB-320 board.
To compensate the measuring line lengths and terminal resistances the preparation for system calibration should
be done directly for the 2-wire or 3-wire connection type of a PT-100 sensor.
The 4-wire connection type is self-compensating and therefore requires no calibration.
2-wire connection with PT100
Preparation for the calibration

The electrical connection to the PT100 sensor to be calibrated must be disconnected as close as possible to the
sensor and a precision resistor with 100 Ohm 1W 0.1% has to be connected instead of the PT100 sensor.
Before the calibration is performed, the wiring must always be checked to avoid calibrations caused by errors.
To do this, after installing the 100 ohm precision resistor, it is sufficient to read the resulting temperature measured
value with the function "Assembly" in the "Configuration" ribbon in online operation of the HIPASE device. The
displayed value must be in the range - 20 °C .. + 20 °C. Otherwise the wiring should be checked for open or short
circuit or bad connection.
In the HIPASE project, the connection type must be set to 2-wire for the PT-100 input in the ribbon "Configuration"
under "HW placement" and the project must have been loaded into the device.
X2 AB-320
AUX+
04
M+ 05 AI-T-01
PT100
M– 06
AUX– PT-100
07
2-Leiter
100R, 1W, 0.1 %
A 100 ohm reference resistor is ground in place of the PT100 sensor for calibration

DGB-004-1.04
Calibration requires an online connection between HIPASE Engineering Tool and HIPASE device.
In the HIPASE Engineering Tool in the Ribbon device, icon HW placement with the mouse, select the X2 / 04-06
terminal of the AB-320 board to be calibrated and invoke the calibration menu with the right mouse button.
Preparation for calibration
 Open one connection at PT100 sensor

 Connect precision resistance 100 Ohm 1W 0,1% instead of PT100 sensor
Schematic for calibration of Pt100 sensor
For calibration, an online connection between HIPASE Engineering Tool and HIPASE device is required.
In HIPASE Engineering Tool in ribbon Device, Icon HW-Assembly select terminal X2 / 04,06 with the mouse of
the module AB-320 to be calibrated and start calibration with the right mouse button.
Calling the calibration process of the temperature input, then a query is made whether you want to perform
the calibration on AI-T-01.

DGB-004-1.04
Step 1:
Confirm that a 100 ohm resistor has been turned on instead of the PT100 sensor. Press "Step 1 Done", the HIPASE device will
now perform the calibration.
Finished:
After successful calibration, feedback is provided by the HIPASE engineering tool. The calibration is not affected by a new
project loading or firmware update.
Then remove the 100 ohm precision resistor and reconnect to PT100 sensor. The calibration can be repeated any
number of times. Simply repeat the first step and select the deletion of the calibration in the dialog box that points
to the already calibrated input.
12.7.6. PLANT CALIBRATION TEMPERATURE DETECTION FOR PT100 FOR 3 OR 4-WIRE

CONNECTION
For 3-wire connection, the 100 ohm 1W 0.1% precision resistor is to be connected directly to the transmitter as a
substitute. See chap. 12.7.5 System Calibration Temperature measurement for PT100 for 2-wire connection.
4-wire connections do not need to be calibrated as these are self-compensating.

DGB-004-1.04
12.8. 100% STATOR EARTH FAULT DETECTION WITH 20HZ SHIFT

The 100% stator earth fault protection with 20 Hz shift in the generator neutral is being realized using the
application board AB-320. Thereby the whole stator wiring is protected from insulation failures. Due to measuring of
low frequency signal and the complex algorithm the trip time is longer than the trip time for a neutral displacement
relay. Therefore this type of 100% protection is mainly used to detect earth faults near the generator neutral. This
function is intended as a complement to the 90% stator earth fault detection.
The measuring method evaluates the impedance of the generator stator against ground. Therefore a low frequency
signal (e.g. 20 Hz) is injected between generator stator and ground. The following figure shows the possible 2
principles: Connection to a neutral transformer in generator neutral or in the generator output line by delta winding:
{
I
Protection
U
Relay
G
RE CE RB 20Hz Generator
Neutral Transformer
Measuring principle of 20Hz-stator e/f detection
The protection relay is calculating the complex impedance for the 20Hz signal injected to the generator stator. A
healthy stator is a capacity only (CE) while the resistance (RE) is very high. The vector diagram shows the current
leading by nearly 90°, the stator to ground impedance becomes a reactance. In case of insulation failure the
resistance (RE) can be calculated out of the complex impedance.
Vector diagram of impedance to ground for healthy an faulty stator winding
Beside the calculation of the resistance RE the protection function incorporates a supervision of the 20Hz
Generator and the wiring to the generator stator.

DGB-004-1.04
100% stator earth fault detection IStatorEarth, UStatorEarth
Required external quadrupole SIPROTEC 7XT33, SIPROTEC 7XT34
Name of protective function in HIPASE Engineering Tool StatorEarth20HzRes
Max. allowed voltage on current measuring input X1 / 05, 06 500 mV
Input impedance of current measuring input X1 / 05, 06 300 mOhms
Max. allowed voltage on voltage measuring input X1 / 07, 08 300 V
Input impedance of voltage measuring input X1 / 07, 08 660 kOhms
Measuring range of isolation resistor stator - earth 0 .. 20 kOhm (display 0 .. >10 kOhm)
Frequency range of both measuring inputs 20 Hz
Max. allowed capacity stator - earth 10 μF
Minimum input voltage for proper detection 1V
Minimum input current for proper detection 4 mA
Resolution ADC 15 bit, 1 bit sign
Sampling rate ADC 4 ksps
Actualization rate of isolation resistor stator - earth 1000 output values / s
Accuracy of isolation resistor detection within specified temperature

< 1 kOhm
rate

Isolation voltage
Place shielded wires with low inductance and do not place near
lines that are subjected to high voltage or current changes.

DGB-004-1.04
12.8.2. LOGIC DIAGRAM OF 20HZ STATOR EARTH FAULT PROTECTION

DGB-004-1.04
Name of Data point Data type Values Description
Error bool Sum of „WiringError“ or „GeneratorError“
WiringError bool Wiring failure of 20Hz components
GeneratorError bool Failure of 20Hz generator
UstatorEF I_volt V Amplitude of 20Hz signal
IstatorEF I_ampere A Amplitude of 20Hz signal
Resistance I_ohm Ohm Calculated resistance value
U_RMS I_volt V RMS value of signal (50 Hz and 20 Hz)
I_RMS I_ampere A RMS value of signal (50 Hz and 20 Hz)
No board parameters are required.
Connection diagram of 100% stator earth fault detection

DGB-004-1.04
12.8.6. PLANT CALIBRATION FOR STATOR EARTH FAULT DETECTION
Please refer to document:
HIPASE Application Manual Prot (e), ISI-Material No.: DGP-002-1

DGB-004-1.04
12.9. ROTOR EARTH FAULT DETECTION

The rotor earth fault protection is provided for the detection of high- and low ohmic earth faults in the excitation
circuit of synchronous machines.
Whilst a single low ohmic earth fault does not represent immediate danger for the synchronous machine a double
earth fault would lead to large mechanical stresses for the machine due to severe magnetic unbalance. Also the
large service- and therefore fault currents in the rotor will lead to a high thermal overload of the rotor circuit.
Therefore even for a single earth fault an appropriate alarm or a shutdown sequence should be initiated.
High ohmic earth faults (insulation faults) occur either through moisture in the winding, ageing of the winding or by
forced liquid cooling of the machine due to impurities in the cooling medium. Therefore continuous supervision of
the insulation resistance is an essential estimation for the availability of the synchronous machine.
The rotor earth fault protection applies a voltage between the excitation circuit and earth for measuring the rotor-
earth resistance. The circulating current produced by the voltage is measured and compared with the also
measured voltage and this way the rotor-earth resistance is computed.
To equalize the displacement of the field voltage the voltage polarity is periodically changed and the current- and
voltage difference taken for the computation of the earth resistance Re.
Due to the capacitance to ground Ce the charging duration has to be finalized until a valid measurement is taken.
With the standard resistors of 47 kOhm a measuring frequency of approximately 3Hz for a small Ce < 200 nF and
up to 0.5 Hz with Ce=10 uF is obtained.
The internal measurement of the AB-320 evaluates earth resistances of 0 .. 1000 kOhm.
In addition to calculating the resistance Re also the measuring circuit is monitored.
Rotor earth fault detection RE RotorEarth
2 pcs. Rv 47 kOhm ceramics resistors, external wiring see at

Required external wiring
connection diagram below
Name of protective function in HIPASE Engineering Tool RotorEarth
Measuring range isolation resistor rotor - earth 0 .. 1000 kOhm
50 V (Caution regarding personal hazard at tests, dimensioning of

Measuring voltage
test resistors etc.)
Frequency range of test signal generator 0.5 .. 3 Hz
Max. permitted capacity rotor - earth 10 μF

DGB-004-1.04
Rotor earth fault detection RE RotorEarth
adaptive 0.5 .. 3 output values / s depending on value of capacity

Actualization rate of value of isolation resistor rotor - earth
rotor - earth
Measuring accuracy of isolation resistor within the specified

± 500 Ohms or 3% of measured value; whichever is greater
temperature range in master mode
Measuring accuracy of isolation resistor within the specified

± 1000 Ohms or 5% of measured value; whichever is greater
temperature range in slave mode
Max. permitted voltage at voltage input X1 / 03, 04 in slave mode ± 70 V
Input impedance of voltage input X1 / 03, 04 in slave mode 9.4 MOhms
EMC immunity IEC 60255-26, EN 61131-2,
Isolation voltage Measuring circuit - Ground: 2.2 kV (50 Hz), 5 kV peak (1.2/50 μs)
Special wiring recommendations Between connected resistors and measuring point the wiring shall
be provided in accordance with the field voltage. Place shielded
wires with low inductance and do not place near lines that are
Name of data point Data type Values Description
AO Uint32 IOhm Calculated resistance value
0 .. invalid False, if calculation not mor possible.  protective function is

Valid Bool
1 .. valid blocked
0 .. Off
1 .. Master at chain
OpMode Uint32 Provides actual mode.
circuit
2 .. Slave at chain circuit
No board parameters are required.

DGB-004-1.04
Connection of rotor earth fault detection
Rotor earth fault detection in master slave design with two or more HIPASE-P devices (not yet supported)

DGB-004-1.04
Connection of a rotor earth detection at static excitation system
Connection of rotor earth fault detection with rotating rectifier diodes and exciter machine

DGB-004-1.04
12.9.5. PLANT CALIBRATION FOR ROTOR EARTH FAULT DETECTION
Please refer to document:
HIPASE Application Manual Prot (e), ISI-Material No.: DGP-002-1

DGB-004-1.04
12.10. SFC EARTH FAULT DETECTION

The start-up earth fault protection provides detection of earth faults in the direct current circuit of a static frequency
converter, e.g. for gas turbines or motor-generators. An earth fault in the direct current circuit will produce a DC
displacement of the rotating field against ground thereby subjecting inductive VT's to DC voltage which are then
damaged or destroyed. Especially endangered is the VT necessary for the stator earth fault protection.
The measuring method evaluates the current circulating between the VT neutral and earth. This current is either
being measured by a DC current transformer, e.g. LEM HTR 50-SB or via a shunt. When using a shunt the risks of
a break in the earth connection have to be considered and therefore generally a DC-CT is preferred.
Since in generator mode no connection to the static frequency converter exists and, on the other hand, during a
stator earth fault in the generator a current is flowing through the LEM or shunt. The SFC-protection should
therefore be blocked in generator mode in order to prevent false trips.
Analog measuring Input for SFC earth fault detection ISFC
Compatible measuring transformer LEM HTR 50-SB
Name of protective function in HIPASE Engineering Tool SFCEarth
Input measuring range between terminals X1 / 14, 15 ±4V
Auxiliary supply for transducer ±15V, 25 mA
Resolution ADC 15 bit, 1bit sign
Sampling rate ADC 4 ksps, internal data exchange 1 ksps
Actualization rate of output value 1000 output values / s
Accuracy ± 5 % of input range

Isolation voltage

DGB-004-1.04
Name of data point Data type Value Description
ISFC Uint32 Volt Value of measured earth fault voltage of SFC
12.10.3. BORD PARAMETERS
Name of Value setting Default Setting

Data type Description
Single +/- 120mV For using a shunt resistor

Mode +/- 4 V -
choice +/- 4V For use of a Hall effect current transformer

DGB-004-1.04
12.10.4. EXTERNAL CONNECTION
Measuring principle of Start-Up earth fault detection
Connection of LEM CT between neutral point of VT and earth
Connection of LEM HTR 50-SB for ISFC measuring input with aux. supply

DGB-004-1.04
12.11. SHAFT CURRENT SUPERVISION

The shaft current supervision or bearing protection detects current flow in the generator shaft. The shaft voltage is
produced by asymmetries of the generator will force this current flow during bearing insulation failure. This current
flow over the bearing will cause deterioration of the bearing metal which will result in bearing failure should this
situation persist. Because of the large conductor cross sections and thus resulting low ohmic paths these currents
may well, in extreme cases, reach 100A or more.
To prevent such current flow one generator bearing is provided with an insulating base layer. However in case of
insulation failure the shaft current supervision will detect this condition and initiates a shutdown of the machine.
Shaft CT
E
Bearing Insulation
Shaft Current
Measuring principle of shaft current detection
Measuring Principle
Around the generator shaft a shaft CT is placed and the secondary current evaluated by the protective device. The
picture below shows a shaft CT for a generator shaft with 800mm diameter.
Shaft CT
The current signal produced by the shaft CT will be galvanically isolated in the protection relay and evaluated.
Thereby the RMS value as well as the 3rd , 5th , 7th and 9th harmonics of the current signal will be considered. By
parameter setting the trip command can be created by the RMS value, a higher harmonics or a relation between
the higher harmonics and the RMS value. Which signal is finally used can only being determined during primary
tests and on-load checks of the generator.

DGB-004-1.04
Shaft current detection IShaft
Required connection Shaft CT (e.g. ratio 1000 : 1) acc. to project specifications
Data point ovrCurShaft
Max. allowed voltage on current measuring input X2 / 01, 02 0.7 V peak AC / 0.7 VDC
Input impedance of current measuring input X2 / 01, 02 0.3 Ohm
Input range 0 .. 120 mA peak
Measuring frequency of first harmonic 16.7; 50; 60 Hz
Detection of higher harmonics 3., 5., 7., 9. harmonic
Actualization rate of measuring value 100 output values / s
Accuracy of shaft current detection ± 5 % of input range

Isolation voltage
12.11.2. DATAPOINT - OUTPUTS
Datapoint name Data typ Values Description
OverrangeError bool Determined by Overrange ADC
Frequency Int32 Measured frequency of shaft current
RMS I_Ampere A RMS value of shaft current
H3 I_Ampere A Amplitude of 3. Harmonic of shaft current

DGB-004-1.04
Datapoint name Data typ Values Description
P3 I_Percent A Ratio between amplitude of 3. Harmonic to RMS value of shaft
12.11.3. BORD PARAMETERS
Name of Value setting Default Setting

Data type Description
Fnenn I_hertz 5 .. 100 Hz 50 Hz 0,001 Hz Grid or generator frequency
Shaft CT connected to I Shaft measuring input

DGB-004-1.04
DEUTSCH
X1 AB-320 X1 AB-320
P1 Shield P1 Schirmung
01 01
ß+ *) ß+ *)
- 02 - 02
IRotorEarth IRotorEarth
+ 03 + 03
 URotorEarth  URotorEarth
- 04 - 04
05 not used 05 nicht verwendet
+ 07 + 07
 IStatorEarth  IStatorEarth
- 08 - 08
+ 09 + 09
 UStatorEarth  UStatorEarth
- 10 - 10
ß AUX+ 13 ß AUX+ 13
M+ 14 M+ 14
 ISFC  ISFC
M- 15 M- 15
ß AUX- 16 ß AUX- 16
X2 X2
OUT+ 01 OUT+ 01
ß AO-01 ß AO-01
OUT- 02 OUT- 02
ß AUX+ 04 ß AUX+ 04
M+ 05 M+ 05
 AI-T-01  AI-T-01
M- 06 2 ... 4 wire M- 06 2 ... 4 Leiter
ß AUX- 07 ß AUX- 07
M+ 09 M+ 09
 IShaft  IShaft
M- 10 M- 10
M+ 12 M+ 12
 AI-01  AI-01
M- 13 M- 13
M+ 15 M+ 15
 AI-02  AI-02
M- 16 M- 16
*) Slave Mode *) Slave-Modus

DGB-004-1.04
Block diagram with marked red coding pins on the socket as polarity protection* / physical view of board cover plate at view to
housing backside
product state 10 of the CGP-001-A.
Connection nomination Data point Function
X1/01 IRotorEarth I Rotor-Earth +
X1/02 IRotorEarth I Rotor-Earth -
X1/03 URotorEarth U Rotor-Earth +
X1/04 URotorEarth U Rotor-Earth -
X1/05 Not supported
X1/06 Not supported
X1/07 IStatorEarth I Stator-Earth +
X1/08 IStatorEarth I Stator-Earth -
X1/09 UStatorEarth U Stator-Earth +
X1/10 UStatorEarth U Stator-Earth -
X1/11 Not supported
X1/12 Not supported
X1/13 U SFC measuring transducer aux. voltage. +15 V
X1/14 ISFC U SFC measuring transducer input 0 .. 4 V
X1/15 ISFC U SFC measuring transducer input 0 V
X1/16 U SFC measuring transducer aux. voltage. -15 V

DGB-004-1.04
X2/01 AO-01 Analog output 01 OUT+
X2/02 AO-01 Analog output 01 OUT-
X2/03 Not supported
X2/04 Temperature measuring 01 4-wire aux.vltg. +
X2/05 AI-T-01 Temperature measuring 01 M+
X2/06 AI-T-01 Temperature measuring 01 M-
X2/07 Temperature measuring 01 4-wire aux.vltg. -
X2/08 Not supported
X2/09 IShaft I Shaft M+
X2/10 IShaft I Shaft M-
X2/11 Not supported
X2/12 AI-01 Analog input 01 M+ 10 V / 20 mA
X2/14 Not supported
12.14. CONNECTION OF SHIELD GROUNDING
Fast-on connection DIN 46342 6.35 X 0,8 2 groups with 2 fast-on male connectors each

0.5 mm 180 °

DGB-004-1.04
CGB-014 AM-010 Application Module 6AI, 4AO, 4PT100 Link to data sheet
product state 10 of the CGP-001-A.

DGB-004-1.04
20 Hz band-pass filter for 100% stator

SIPROTEC 7XT34 SIE+7XT3400-0CA0
earth fault protection
20 Hz generator for 100% stator earth

SIPROTEC 7XT33 SIE+7XT3300-0CA0
fault protection
Ceramic resistors 47 kOhm / 2 kV (2 pcs.) Required for function rotor earth fault
GIC-020--
incl. mounting material detection
pointer instrument with moving coil movement Display of rotor-earth isolation resistor via
WEIGEL P144x36
Slim Edgewise Type P144x36 output AO1 for Rot.EF detection
Shaft CT designed acc. to project specific ZELISKO special design acc. to plant
Required for shaft current detection
data specifications
Hall-effect CT for 50 A primary nominal Required for function SFC earth fault
LEM HTR 50-SB
current detection

Phoenix Contact FRONT-MSTB 2,5/16-
STF-5,08 BU - 1704588
12.18. VALIDITY
Document valid for hardware with mat. no.:
Tested functionality available CGP-001-- CGP-001-A
Rotor earth fault detection  
100% Stator earth fault detection 20Hz 
Temperature Measuring 
SFC earth fault detection 
Shaft current supervision 
Analog Output 
Analog Input  
Devices from V 1.00.00 support only application boards from version CGP-001-A with product state 00.

DGB-004-1.04
13. AB-330 APPLICATION BOARD TURBINE GOVERNOR
The application board AB-330 is required for the control and regulation of the hydraulic turbine and is therefore
mandatory in each HIPASE-T device. Additional analog and digital inputs and outputs are used for data acquisition
or data point output or the detection of application-specific states. For the maximum number of modules in the
device please refer to basic functions in hardware components.
13.1. FEATURES
 6 x galvanically isolated analog input

 6 x galvanically isolated analog output
 2 x active or passive speed sensor input with transient filter, glitch suppression and rotation
detection for sensors on the tooth wheel
 2 x analog, galvanically isolated voltage converter input for detecting the generator and the grid
frequency
 Slot for optional sub-module (AM-020: 6 x analog voltage / current input, 6 x analog voltage / current
output, 2 x speed sensor input)
 Grounding points for shielding line on terminal side
 Circuit monitoring of the analog inputs and outputs
 Technological adaptation of the values of the analog inputs and outputs (scaling, normalization)
 Dither signal generation for analog outputs
 6 x free routable PID loops for positioning circuits between analog input and output possible

DGB-004-1.04
13.2. TERM DEFINITION
Term ↓ Explanation
The active speed input provides a signal, which is modulated by a sensor (e.g. NAMUR) and is evaluated
Active speed input
by the AB-330.
Valid measuring range Defines a range in which the input values are accepted as valid.
Max. permissible input signal Exceeding the max. permissible input signal can damage the input permanently.
Measuring range input signal In this range the input signal is detected with the specified accuracy.
The passive speed input detects the signal from the sensor, which is evaluated by the AB-330. The sensor
Passive speed input
must be supplied with power on the plant side.
Technological value Process value (e.g. pressure, drop height)
Complete application board
BGT-101-- (orderable only together with configuration code, refer to

Internal ASAP Mat. No.: CON0BGT101-
Material number of physical base board (refer to serial number label) CGT-001 (can not be ordered separately)
Board width 2 slots

Weight
with AM-020: 0.7 kg
Characteristic value in configuration code of device 'A' without extension module or 'H' with extension module

DGB-004-1.04

1621
Between Failure)
13.4. AB-330 SPEED DATA POINTS - OUTPUTS
Name of data point Data type Values Description
The time sequence of the edges is checked and output. For

the correctness of this display, the following positioning of
the speed sensors is required:
Based on the level of the other input at a signal edge, the
direction of rotation can be reliably determined. For this
purpose, it is necessary that the sensors are mounted offset
corresponding to the tooth flanks.
0 .. invalid
Rotational direction Int32 1 .. Pulse at input SI-02 leads
2 .. Pulse at input SI-01 leads
Typical offset of the sensors with respect to the toothed disc.

Sensor on SI-01 detects a tooth flank when sensor on SI-02
detects a gap. For this, the sensors should be positioned
offset by 1 ½ tooth spacings (or integer multiples of them).
State 1 indicates that a number of pulses defined as

"number of pulses for creep detection" have been detected
0 .. no fault at either input SI-01 or SI-02. To do this, the function "Creep
Creep detected Bool
1 .. Creep detected detection" must be activated by means of parameter "Creep
detection active" and via a FBD output, which was assigned
to "FUP output for creep detection".
If active, an error has been detected in the speed detection.

0 .. Speed input OK This data point is active only for the duration of the
SI disturbed (IV) Bool
1 .. Speed input disturbed disturbance and therefore does not need to be reset
additionally.
0 .. Impeller is moving No pulse was detected on one of the two speed inputs SI-01
Standstill Bool or SI-02 for the measuring time "Time duration for standstill
1 .. Impeller stands still detection".
Turbine startup time 0: de-activated Set if the measured acceleration of the turbine exceeds the
Bool
active 1: activated specification by "Speed gradient turbine run time (s)".

DGB-004-1.04
13.5. ANALOG INPUTS

The group AI-01 .. AI-03 and the group AI-04 .. AI-06 are internally supplied separately. For a redundant
configuration for example a pair of AI-01 and AI-04 must be used.
Analog inputs AI-01 .. AI-06
Data points Input.AI-01 .. Input.AI-06
Selectable with parameter in HIPASE Engineering Tool:
Measuring range input signal -10 .. +10 VDC (default setting)

-20 .. +20 mA
4 .. 20 mA
± 11 VDC,
Max. permissible input signal
± 22 mA
Input frequency range for current or voltage detection 0 .. 500 Hz
Accuracy of the module input in voltage measurement mode under

reference conditions and when using shielded cables with single-sided 0.2% of the measuring range input signal
grounding
Accuracy of the module input in current measurement mode under

grounding

0.5% of the measuring range input signal
reference conditions and when using unshielded cables.

reference conditions and when using unshielded cables.
Sampling rate 1 ksps
Minimum burden for operation mode voltage input > 20 kOhm

DGB-004-1.04

Isolation voltage
Special wiring recommendations lines that are subjected to high voltage or current changes. Apply
cable shield at the ground point (faston plug) of AB-330!
These data points are visible in the HIPASE Explorer under AB-330, AI-0x and can be linked from there with FBD
inputs.
Value of the measuring signal at the analogue input.

AI-01 .. AI-06 Float32 - The standardization is based on the specifications for
"Minimum value" and "Maximum value"
Error in ADC or communication with ADC

Saturation indication when voltage measuring
operation and input voltage less than -13 VDC or
greater, approximately +13 VDC.
AI-01 Disturbed (IV) or
AI-02 Disturbed (IV) 0 .. valid measured
AI-03 Disturbed (IV) value
Bool
AI-04 Disturbed (IV) 1 .. invalid
AI-05 Disturbed (IV) Line break if input current <2 mA in current input (4 -
measurement 20 mA) or input current > approx. 26 mA
AI-06 Disturbed (IV)
or
Saturation indication if current input (-20 .. +20 mA)
and input current less than -26 mA or greater approx.
+26 mA.
AI-01 over range

AI-02 over range 0 .. valid measured If the input measuring range + of the specification
AI-03 over range value MaxOverrange (%) is exceeded, this data point is set.
Bool
AI-04 over range 1 .. invalid Thus, a measurement error due to input overload can
AI-05 over range measurement be detected.
AI-06 over range

DGB-004-1.04
Data type Value setting Default value

range
+/- 10 VDC
Measuring range Choice between voltage or current mode and the input
- 4 – 20 mA +/- 10 VDC
(input) range
-20 – 20 mA
Assignment of a numerical value to the lower range end

Minimum value Float32 -50 000 .. 50 000 0
of the analog input (4 mA, -10 V, -20 mA).
Assignment of a numerical value to the upper range

Maximum value Float32 -50 000 .. 50 000 100
end of the analog input (20 mA, +10 V).
Offset correction value used to compensate a possible

DC component of the input signal.
Offset See description 0 0,000001 pu ( Max  Min ) ( Max  Min )
 Korrekturwert 
2 2
Example:
With the offset correction value, a DC component can

Correction value Float32 -50 000 .. 50 000 0
be added to the input signal.
Time constant low- -3dB or -6dB Cutoff frequency of the input low-pass
Time 160 us .. 160 ms 0,1 s
pass filter filter
no filter
Selection of the filter order of the input low pass filter
Filter characteristic Low pass 1st order
- Kein Filter 1st order low pass: 20 dB per decade
low-pass filter
Low pass 2nd
2nd order low pass: 40 dB per decade
order
Threshold, which is added to the lower and upper end

of the Eingangsmessbereicsh and whose underspeed
or exceeded by the input signal sets the data point
MaxOverrange Float32 0 .. 10 % 3% "Overrange". With this specification, the overload of the
input can be detected.
This threshold is available for all measuring ranges.

DGB-004-1.04
AB-330
Messwert-
umformer X2
 Signal 05
± 20 mA 0V AI-01
06
oder ± 10 V
Exemplary connection AB-330 with a transducer via AI-01

DGB-004-1.04
13.6. ANALOG OUTPUTS

The group AO-01 .. AO-03 and the group AO-04 .. AO-06 are internally supplied separately. For a redundant
configuration, for example a pair of AO-01 and AO-04, must be used.
CAUTION: The default setting for the outputs is voltage output. If a voltage output is connected to a current input,
the internal power supply can be overloaded for the group AO-01 .. AO-03 or AO-04 AO-06. To avoid damaging the
module, before the first application of the output signals the proper output range of the output signals must be
Analog Output AO-01 .. AI-06
AnalogOutput1, AnalogOutput2, AnalogOutput3, AnalogOutput4,

Data points
AnalogOutput5, AnalogOutput6
Output signal range -10 .. +10 VDC (default setting)

-20 .. +20 mA
4 .. 20 mA
-11 .. +11 VDC

Maximum output signal in dithered mode -24 .. + 24 mA
4 .. + 24 mA
Dither frequency 50, 55, 60, 70, 80, 100, 125, 165, 250, 500 Hz
0 .. ± 10 % of actual output value in steps of 1%, but limited by the

Dither amplitude
maximum value of the output signal in dithered mode
Dither signal type Rectangular signal
Accuracy of dither frequency at reference conditions 1%
Accuracy of dither amplitude at reference conditions 1%
0.4 % of maximum output signal value for range: 4 .. 20 mA

Accuracy of module output at reference conditions, using shielded
0.5 % of maximum output signal value for range: -20 ..+20 mA
wires and single-sided shield grounding on AB-330 (acc. to EN 60051)
0.2 % of maximum output signal value for range: -10 .. +10 VDC
Output rate 1 ksps
Maximum burden for operation mode current output 500 Ohm
Minimum burden for operation mode voltage output 7 kOhm

DGB-004-1.04
Analog Output AO-01 .. AI-06

Type test isolation voltage
Wiring and cable placement rules that are exposed to high voltage or current changes. Apply cable
shield at the ground point (faston plug) of AB-330!
13.6.2. DATA POINTS - INPUT
These data points are visible in the HIPASE Explorer under AB-330, AO-0x and are linked from there to function
sheet inputs.
Output of the signal value at the analog output. The

AO-01 … AO-06 Float32 - standardization is based on the specifications for "Minimum
value" and "Maximum value"
13.6.3. DATA POINTS - OUTPUT
These data points are visible in the HIPASE Explorer under AB-330, AO-0x and are linked from there to function
sheet inputs.
AO-01 over range If the analog output is written with a value less than
AO-02 over range "Minimum Value" x (1+ "MaxOverrange / 100") or greater
0 .. initial value ok
AO-03 over range than "Maximum Value" x (1+ "MaxOverrange / 100"), a
Bool 1 .. output value set to limit restriction is made.
AO-04 over range
AO-05 over range value
These data points indicate the intervention of the output
AO-06 over range value limit for each analog output separately.

DGB-004-1.04
These parameters are available for each analogue output AO-01 ... AO-06
Data type Value setting Default

range value
+/- 10 VDC
Signal mode Selection between voltage or current mode and
- 4 – 20 mA +/- 10 VDC
(output) the output range
-20 – 20 mA
Minimum value Float32 -50 000 .. 50 000 0 Assignment of a numerical value to the lower
end of the analogue output (4 mA, 0 mA, 0 V, -
10 V).
Maximum value Float32 -50 000 .. 50 000 100 Assignment of a numerical value to the upper
range end of the analogue output (20 mA, +10
V).
Time constant low- -3dB or -6dB Cutoff frequency of the input low-
Time 160 us .. 160 ms 0,1 s
pass filter pass filter
no filter
Selection of the filter order of the input low pass
Low pass 1st filter
- order no filter
low-pass filter 1st order low pass: 20 dB per decade
Low pass 2nd
2nd order low pass: 40 dB per decade
order
This parameter defines the minimum or

maximum permissible output value.
If the value falls below a limit, the value in the
data point for the analog output is set to a value
of
MaxOverrange Float32 0 .. 10 % 0
"Minimum value" x (1+ "MaxOverrange / 100")
or if exceeded on:
"Maximum value" x (1+ "MaxOverrange /
100").
Amplitude of the oscillator signal relative to the

signal value in the data point for the analog
output.
Dither amplitude Float32 0 .. 20 % 0
The signal value in the data point for the analog
output is superimposed with an adjustable
oscillator signal.
No,
50 Hz,
55.55 Hz,
62.5 Hz,
71.43 Hz,
Dither frequency - 83.33 Hz, undefined Frequency of the superimposed oscillator signal
100 Hz,
125 Hz,
166.66 Hz,
250 Hz,
500 Hz

DGB-004-1.04
Connection of analog output AO-01

(Output AO-02 .. AO-06 connected in the same way)

DGB-004-1.04
13.7. VOLTAGE INPUT FOR ELECTRICAL SPEED MEASURING

Via the voltage input VT-01 the frequency and thus the speed of the generator and the turbine can be determined.
The mains frequency can be determined via the voltage input VT-02.
Because the voltage inputs have very high impedance and in order to avoid incorrect measurements, not used
voltage inputs are recommended to be short-circuited.
VT Inputs VT-01, VT-02
Data points VT-01, VT-02
Nominal voltage 100 .. 127 Vrms
Measuring range 0.15 .. 177 Vrms
Short time overload 284 V peak value
Nominal frequency 16.7 / 50 / 60 Hz
Frequency range DC .. 120 Hz
Sampling of digitization 1 ksps
Accuracy of voltage measurement

better 1% of the nominal value, for sinusoidal input signals
(RMS) at reference conditions
Voltage range of frequency

0.2 V .. maximum permissible input voltage
measuring
Accuracy frequency measurement

10 mHz at nominal frequency (50 Hz, 60 Hz, 16.7 Hz) for 50 .. 140 V input voltage
at reference conditions
Resolution frequency
2.5 mHz at nominal frequency (50 Hz, 60 Hz, 16.7 Hz) for 50 .. 140 V input voltage
measurement
Burden Less than 0.3 VA

Place transformer wires shielded and with low inductance and do not place near lines that are subjected
to high voltage or current changes. Apply cable shield at the ground point (faston plug) of AB-330!
Wire cross section 1.5 .. 2.5 mm² stranded, with ferrule

DGB-004-1.04
VT Inputs VT-01, VT-02
Wire cross section AWG/kcmil min. 17 .. max. 15 stranded, with ferrule
13.7.2. VOLTAGE INPUT VT-01 DATA POINTS - OUTPUTS
Frequency measured value of the measuring signal at

the voltage input in pu referred to the generator rated
VT-01 Float32 -
frequency parameter (see Section 38.1.1, parameter
"Speed inputs")
0: valid measuring If the applied voltage is less than about 0.5 VAC, the
VT-01 disturbed (IV) Bool frequency value can no longer be reliably determined.
1: invalid measuring In this case, this data point goes to 1.
13.7.3. VOLTAGE INPUT VT-02 DATA POINTS - OUTPUTS
Frequency measured value of the measuring signal at

the voltage input in pu referred to the generator rated
VT-02 Float32 -
frequency parameter (see Section 38.1.1, parameter
"Speed inputs")
0: valid measuring If the applied voltage is less than about 0.5 VAC, the
VT-02 disturbed (IV) Bool frequency value can no longer be reliably determined.
1: invalid measuring In this case, this data point goes to 1.
There are no module parameters available for this function. As in Chap. 41.1.1, parameter "Speed inputs", the
nominal frequency of the driven generator must be specified.

DGB-004-1.04
13.7.5. CONNECTION OF VOLTAGE INPUT
AB-330
X1
 Signal 01
0V VT-01
02
Connection of a voltage signal e.g. Generator with the voltage input of the module AB-330
(Input VT-02 connected in the same way)
13.8. PID CONTROLLER FOR POSITIONING CIRCUITS

The modules AB-330 and AM-020 each contain 6 PID controller blocks, whose inputs and outputs can be freely
allocated and with which so-called positioning circuits can be realized.
13.8.1. TRANSFER FUNCTION OF PID CONTROLLER
The parameters are set in the function "Positioning Circuits" in the ribbon group "Turbine Controller", "Settings"

DGB-004-1.04
X1 AB-330
P1 Schirmung
Signal 01
 0V VT-01
02
Signal 03
 0V VT-02
04
+ 05
ß AO-01
- 06
+ 07
ß AO-02
- 08
+ 09
ß AO-03
- 10
+ 11
ß AO-04
- 12
+ 13
ß AO-05
- 14
+ 15
ß 16
AO-06
-
P2 Schirmung
X2
P1 Schirmung
Signal 01
 SI-01
Ref/Src 02
Signal 03
 SI-02
Ref/Src 04
Signal 05
 0V AI-01
06
Signal 07
 0V 08
AI-02
Signal 09
 0V AI-03
10
Signal 11
 0V AI-04
12
Signal 13
 0V AI-05
14
Signal 15
 0V AI-06
16
P2 Schirmung

DGB-004-1.04
housing backside
*) Caution: A factory assembly with mechanical terminal coding was only realized up to product state 23 of the
CGT-001--.
X1/01 VT-01 Voltage Input 1 Signal
X1/02 VT-01 Voltage Input 1 0V
X1/03 VT-02 Voltage Input 2 Signal
X1/04 VT-02 Voltage Input 2 0V
X1/05 AO-01 Analog Output 1 +
X1/06 AO-01 Analog Output 1 -
X1/10 AO-03 Analog Output 3-

DGB-004-1.04
X2/01 SI-01 Speed Sensor Input 1 Signal
X2/02 SI-01 Speed Sensor Input 1 Ref / Src
X2/03 SI-02 Speed Sensor Input 2 Signal
X2/04 SI-02 Speed Sensor Input 2 Ref / Src
X2/05 AI-01 Analog Input 1 Signal
X2/06 AI-01 Analog Input 1 0V

0.5 mm 180 °

DGB-004-1.04
CGB-015 AM-020 Application Module (6AI, 8AO, 2SM) Link to data sheet

Caution: A factory assembly with mechanical terminal coding was only realized up to product state 23 of the CGT-
001--.

STF-5,08 BU - 1704588
13.15. VALIDITY
Document valid for hardware with Mat. No. CGT-001--
Devices from V 1.00.00 support only application boards from version CGT-001-- with product state 10.

DGB-004-1.04
14. AM-010 APPLICATION MODULE (6AI, 4AO, 4PT100)
The AM-010 module is an extension module for the boards AB-310 and AB-320. Thus, the number of analog inputs
and outputs of the AB-boards can be expanded as needed. For the maximum number of AM-010 in the device
please refer to basic functions in hardware components.
Top view of module AM-010
14.1. FEATURES
 Extension module for application boards AB-310 and AB-320

 6 x Analog input for 4 .. 20 mA, ± 20 mA or ± 10 V
 2 x Temperature measuring (2- or 3-wire measuring of PT100)
 4 x Analog output for 4 .. 20 mA, ± 20 mA or ± 10 V

DGB-004-1.04
14.2. ORDERING DATA AND TECHNICAL DATA
Complete board
Material number CGB-014-- (can not be ordered separately)
Board width 1 Slot
Weight 0.2 kg
Power consumption (internal) 4.5 W
Temperature range with specified accuracy – 5 .. 55 °C
Working temperature range – 40 .. 75 °C
Allowed slot position in MEDIUM sized housing G
Allowed slot position in LARGE sized housing K, (2nd option: E)
Characteristic value in configuration code of device 'Q'
MTBF of component 1,076.426 hours (122.8 years)

929
Between Failure)

DGB-004-1.04
14.3. ANALOG INPUTS

The group AI1 .. AI3 and the group AI4 .. AI6 are internally supplied separately. For a redundant configuration for
example a pair of AI1 and AI4 must be used.
Analog Inputs AI1 .. AI6
Data points AI1 .. AI6
Following ranges are configurable by using jumpers:

-10 .. +10 VDC (factory default setting)
0 .. 20 mA (select mode 0 .. 20 mA or 4 .. 20 mA in HIPASE
Measuring range of input signal (from measuring transducer) Engineering Tools)
Valid only for CGB-014-- (not applicable for module CGB-014-A): In
board parameters settings of HIPASE Engineering Tool for AM-010
the measuring range has to be selected how it is configured on
hardware by jumper positions.
Max. allowed input signal ± 12 VDC, 22 mA
Input frequency range 0 .. 500 Hz
Input filter time constant hardware 800 μs, low-pass 1. order (-3 dB @ 600 Hz)
Accuracy of module input in voltage measuring mode within reference

conditions 1%
(accuracy of external measuring transducer not included)
Accuracy of module input in current measuring mode within reference

conditions 1%
(accuracy of external measuring transducer not included)
Sampling rate ADC 4 ksps, reduced to 1ksps for FUP
Minimum burden at voltage measuring mode 20 kOhm
Maximum burden at current measuring mode 10 Ohm
EMC immunity IEC 60255-26, EN 61131-2, IEC 61850-3 Ed.2.0


DGB-004-1.04
Analog Inputs AI1 .. AI6
Special wiring recommendations that are subjected to high voltage or current changes. Apply cable
shield at the ground point (faston plug) of AM-010!
Wire cross section AWG (kcmil) 17 .. 15 stranded, with ferrule
14.3.2. CONFIGURATION OF MEASURING RANGE
Valid only for CGB-014-- (not applicable for module CGB-014-A):
A coincidence between the selected range by jumper position and the tool parameters must be ensured!
Pin header Analog Input Measuring range Measuring range

for jumper 0 .. 20 mA resp. 4 .. 20 mA ± 10 VDC
X402 AI1
X502 AI2
X602 AI3
X702 AI4
X802 AI5
X902 AI6

DGB-004-1.04
Assignment AI1 .. AI6 with jumper position
Data point name Data type Value Description
AI-01 .. AI-04 Float32 p.u. Value of signal of analog input
AI-01 disturbed (IV) Error in ADC or communication with ADC

AI-02 disturbed (IV) or
Bool
AI-03 disturbed (IV) Wire break, if input current <2 mA in current input mode (4 - 20
AI-04 disturbed (IV) mA)

DGB-004-1.04
Value setting Default Setting step

range value size
-10 .. +10 VDC

-10 .. +10
Measuring range 0 .. 20 mA - 4 .. 20 mA range supports wire-break detection
VDC
4 .. 20 mA
Rated input value of current / voltage transformer or measuring

Transformer transducer.
1 .. 10000 V, A 1000 V, A 0,001 V, A Refer to data sheet of measuring transducer.
primary value
Selectable only if parameter ‘Transformer connected’ is ‘Yes’.
Rated output value of measuring transducer connected with

Transformer HIPASE device.
1 .. 10000 V, A 1 V, A 0,01 V, A Refer to data sheet of measuring transducer.
secondary value
Rated value of measured plant variable.

Rated value 1 .. 10000 V, A 1000 V, A 0,001 V, A
Transformer No Yes: input scaling based on transformer data

No -
connected Yes No: input scaling based on straight line equation y = kx + d
With the offset correction value, a DC component can be added to

Correction value -10 .. 10 0 0,000001
the input signal.
Assignment of a numerical value to the lower range end of the

Minimum value -1000 .. 999 0 0,001
analog input (0 mA, 4 mA, -10 V).
Assignment of a numerical value to the upper range end of the

Maximum value -999 .. 1000 100 0,001 analog input (20 mA, +10 V).
Offset correction value used to compensate a possible DC

component of the input signal.
The permitted value range is determined by the specifications for
"Minimum value" and "Maximum value" according to the following
condition:
( Max  Min ) ( Max  Min )

Offset See description 0 0,000001 pu  Korrekturwert 
2 2
Example:
Maximum value: 300, Minimum value: -200, then the correction
value must be in the interval [-249 .. +249].
Time constant
160 us .. 160 ms 2s 10 us Filter time constant for one or two lowpass filters. ( 1 .. 1000 Hz)
lowpass filter

DGB-004-1.04
Value setting Default Setting step

range value size
No filter
lowpass filter 1st lowpass Activation and setting of lowpass filter steepness.
order filter 1st - lowpass filter 1. Order: 20 dB each decade
lowpass filter
order lowpass filter 2. Order: 40 dB each decade
lowpass filter 2nd
order
Connection of measuring transducer with 4 .. 20 mA or 0 .. 10 V output to analog input AI1

(Other Inputs AI-02 .. AI-06 connected in the same way)

DGB-004-1.04
14.4. TEMPERATURE MEASURING

The transducer is designed for use with PT100 elements in 2- and 3-wire configuration. A temperature range of -
50C to +200C would be possible but due to compatibility reasons the range is limited to -40C to +120C.
Temperatures below -40C are interpreted as wiring shorts and above +120C as wire break which will in both case
be annunciated.
The measuring principle is based on a bridge circuit which is supplied by a reference voltage source. The voltage
difference of the two bridge branches is applied for the computation of the temperature.
PT100 temperature evaluation PT1 .. PT4
Ziehl TF101 / G3-5kV PT100 DIN / 2 wire

Compatible measuring sensors
Volton 28.75 PT100 / Kl. F 0,15 TCT2 (CH0-519--)
Possible connections 2- or 3-wire-measuring method for PT100 evaluation
Data points PT1 .. PT4
Max. allowed voltage between terminals X1 / 9, 10, 11, 12 0,7 Vpeak AC / 0,7 VDC
Measuring range temperature –40 .. 200 °C (–40 .. 392 °F)
Actualization rate of temperature value 100 output values / s
Measuring resolution 1K
Accuracy of temperature detection at reference conditions 1K
EMV immunity IEC 60255-26, EN 61131-2, IEC 61850-3 Ed.2.0

Special wiring recommendations that are subjected to high voltage or current changes. Apply cable
14.4.2. DATA POINTS - TEMPERATURE INPUTS
Data point name Data type Value Description
AI-T-01 .. AI-T-04 Float32 p.u. Temperature measurement value at the input 1 ... 4

DGB-004-1.04
Parameter name Value setting range Default value Description
2-wire PT100
Mode 3-wire Selection of the external wiring of the temperature measurement
3-wire PT100
14.4.4. 2-WIRE CONNECTION OF TEMPERATURE MEASURING
2-wire connection with PT100 for PT100 input PT1

(Other PT100 inputs PT2 .. PT4 to be connected in same way)
For the compensation of the measuring line lengths and terminal contact resistances, a system calibration should
be carried out for the 2-wire connection type of a PT-100 sensor.
For instructions on system calibration see: Chap. 12.7.5, System Calibration Temperature measurement for PT100
14.4.5. 3-WIRE CONNECTION OF TEMPERATURE MEASURING
3-wire connection with PT100 for PT100 input PT1

(Other PT100 inputs PT2 .. PT4 to be connected in same way)

DGB-004-1.04

The selection of the output signal range is done exclusively in HIPASE engineering tool. No jumpers must be set.
The group AO1 .. AO3 and the group AO4 .. AO6 are internally supplied separately. For a redundant configuration
for example a pair of AO-01 and AO-04 must be used.
the internal power supply can be overloaded for the group AO-01 .. AO-03 or AO-04 .. AO-06. To avoid damaging
the module, before the first application of the output signals the proper output range of the output signals must be
NOTICE: The output value of the output channels is undefined during the startup or shutdown process of the
ATTENTION: Voltage outputs may only be connected in parallel via diodes decoupled. Current outputs must never
be connected in parallel!
Analog Outputs AO1 .. AO4
Data points AO1 .. AO4

Output signal
0 .. 20 mA
4 .. 20 mA
Output filter time constant hardware 800 μs low-pass 1. order (-3 dB @ 600 Hz)
Accuracy of module output at reference conditions 1%
Output rate 1 ksps
Max. burden at current output mode 500 Ohm
Min. burden at voltage output mode 1 kOhm

Special wiring recommendations Place shielded wires with low inductance and do not place near lines
that are subjected to high voltage or current changes. Apply cable

DGB-004-1.04
14.5.2. DATA POINTS - OUTPUT
AO-01 .. AO-04 Float32 p.u. Output of the signal value at the analog output
Parameter Value setting Default value Setting

Description
name range step size
- 10 .. + 10 VDC
Signal range
0 .. 20 mA - 10 .. + 10 VDC - 4 .. 20 mA range supports wire-break detection
(output)
4 .. 20 mA
Assignment of a lower limit value of the data point to the lower

Minimum value 1 .. 200000 0 0,000001
end of the range of the analog output (4 mA, 0 mA, 0 V, -10 V).
Assignment of an upper limit value of the data point to the upper

Maximum value 1 .. 200000 1000 0,000001
end of the range of the analog output (20 mA, +10 V).
If the output range has been parameterized to 4 ... 20 mA, the display instrument
for 4 .. 20 mA has to be connected at the analogue output AO1.
If the output range has been parameterized to -10 .. +10 VDC, the display instrument
for -10 or 0 .. +10 VDC has to be connected to analogue output AO1.
(This applies to the other analog outputs AO2 .. AO4 in the same way)

DGB-004-1.04
14.6. CONNECTION DIAGRAM AM-010

DGB-004-1.04
housing backside
CGB-014-A.
14.7. TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OF TERMINAL STRIP (X1, X2)
Terminal-
Data point Function
nomination
X1/01 AI1 Analog Input 1 + / M
X1/02 AI1 Analog Input 1 - / 0 V
X1/03 AI2 Analog Input 2 + /M
X1/07 PT1 PT100 temperature detection 1 + / M+
X1/08 PT1 PT100 temperature detection 1 M-
X1/09 PT100 temperature detection 1 aux. voltage -
X1/13 AO1 Analog Output 1 +
X1/14 AO1 Analog Output 1 -

DGB-004-1.04
Terminal-
Data point Function
nomination
X2/10 PT4 PT100 temperature detection 4 +/ M+
14.8. CONNECTION FOR SHIELD GROUNDING

0.5 mm 180 °

DGB-004-1.04
14.9. USAGE EACH APPLICATION

Excitation system (in combination with AB-310)
 AI1 .. AI3 for detection of phase currents of thyristor bridge A at current sharing, conductivity supervision of
thyristors
 PT1, PT2 for detection of thyristor bridge temperature of thyristor bridge A
 AI4 .. AI6 for detection of phase currents of thyristor bridge B at current sharing, conductivity supervision of
thyristors
 PT3, PT4 for detection of thyristor bridge temperature of thyristor bridge B
Caution: A factory assembly with mechanical terminal coding was only realized up to product state 01 of the
CGB-014-A.

DGB-004-1.04

STF-5,08 BU - 1704588
14.12. VALIDITY
Document valid for hardware: Mat. No. CGB-014-A, Product state: 00
Devices from V 1.00.00 support only application modules from version CGB-014-A with product state 00.

DGB-004-1.04
15. AM-020 APPLICATION MODULE (6AI, 8AO, 2SM)
The module AM-020 is an extension module for the board AB-330. Thus, the number of analog inputs and outputs
of the board AB-330 be expanded as needed. For maximum number of modules in the unit, see basic functions in
components.
Top view on module AM-020
15.1. FEATURES
 6 x galvanically isolated analog input

 8 x galvanically isolated analog output
 Grounding points for shielding line on terminal side
 Circuit monitoring of the analog inputs and outputs
 Technological adaptation of the values of the analog inputs and outputs (scaling, normalization)
 Dither signal generation for analog outputs

DGB-004-1.04
Complete module
Material number CGB-015 (can not be ordered separately)
Board width 1 slot
Weight 0.2 kg
Power consumption (internal) 4.4 W
Allowed slot positions in MEDIUM sized housing G
Allowed slot positions in LARGE sized housing K, (2nd option: E)
Characteristic value in configuration code of device 'N'

1351
Between Failure)

DGB-004-1.04
15.3. ANALOG INPUTS

The group AI-01 .. AI-03 and the group AI-04 .. AI-06 are internally supplied separately. For a redundant
configuration for example a pair of AI-01 and AI-04 must be used.
Data points Input.AI-01 .. Input.AI-06
Selectable with parameter in HIPASE Engineering Tool:
Measuring range input signal -10 .. +10 VDC (default setting)

-20 .. +20 mA
4 .. 20 mA
± 11 VDC,
Max. permissible input signal
± 22 mA
Input frequency range for current or voltage detection 0 .. 500 Hz

grounding

grounding

reference conditions and when using unshielded cables

reference conditions and when using unshielded cables
Sampling rate 1 ksps
Minimum burden for operation mode voltage input > 20 kOhm

DGB-004-1.04

cable shield at the ground point (faston plug) of AM-020!
AI-01 .. AI-06 Float32 p.u. Value of signal of analog input
AI-01 disturbed (IV) Error in ADC or communication with ADC

AI-03 disturbed (IV) or
Bool
AI-05 disturbed (IV) Wire break, if input current <2 mA in current input
AI-06 disturbed (IV) mode (4 - 20 mA)
AI-01 over range

AI-02 over range If the input measuring range + of the specification
AI-03 over range 0 .. valid measured value MaxOverrange (%) is exceeded, this data point is set.
Bool
AI-04 over range 1 .. invalid measurement Thus, a measurement error due to input overload can
AI-05 over range be detected.
AI-06 over range
Default
Parameter name Data type Value setting range Description
value
1: -10 .. +10 VDC

Measuring range 1: -10 .. +10 Selection between voltage and current mode of input
- 2: -20 .. -20 mA
(Input) VDC range
3: 4 .. 20 mA
Assignment of a numerical value to the lower range

Minimum Value Float32 -50 000 .. 50 000 0
end of the analog input (4 mA, -10 V, -20 mA).
Assignment of a numerical value to the upper range

Maximum Value Float32 -50 000 .. 50 000 100
end of the analog input (20 mA, +10 V).

DGB-004-1.04
Default
value
Offset correction value used to compensate a

possible DC component of the input signal.
( Max  Min ) ( Max  Min )

Offset See description 0 0,000001 pu  Korrekturwert 
2 2
Example:
Time constant -3dB or -6dB Cutoff frequency of the input low-pass

Time 160 us .. 160 ms 0,1 s
lowpass filter filter
0: No filter Activation and setting of lowpass filter steepness.

- 1: 1st order No filter Lowpass filter 1. order: 20 dB each decade
lowpass filter
2: 2nd order Lowpass filter 2. order: 40 dB each decade
Threshold, which is added to the lower and upper

end of the Eingangsmessbereicsh and whose
underspeed or exceeded by the input signal sets the
MaxOverrange Float32 0 .. 10 % 3% data point "Overrange". With this specification, the
overload of the input can be detected.
This threshold is available for all measuring ranges.
AM-020
Messwert-
umformer X2
 Signal
05
± 20 mA 0V AI-01
06
oder ± 10 V
Connection of measuring transducer with ±20 mA or ±10 V output to analog input AI-01
(Input AI-02 .. AI-06 connected in the same way)
15.3.5. WIRE BREAK MONITORING
The AB-330 board has a sensor circuit for each speed input to detect a wire break between the AB-330 board and
the sensor.

DGB-004-1.04
Active speed sensors
AM-020
+U AUX
X2
 Signal
Aktiver 01 SI-01
Ref
Geber 02
GND c
b
a
AM-020
f
+U AUX
X2
 Signal
01 SI-02
Ref
02
GND
e d
Active speed sensors are usually grounded on the sensor side. If more than one speed input is wired with an active
speed sensor, an interruption (a) or (d), as shown in the above diagram, does not lead to a breaker monitoring
response, as the sensor current will flow through the connection path (b) and ( c) can dodge.
In this case, both speed sensors still provide correct speed signals. However, it may be that with widely spaced
rotational speed sensors interference voltages are scattered into the resulting ground loop, which influence the
speed values.
Here can be provided applicatively a measure for the detection of a conductor break in this topology.
Only when there is an interruption at (a) and (d) at the same time does the conductor break monitoring respond. In
this case, both sensors no longer deliver speed values.
A conductor break within the sensor, as shown under (e), can only be detected by means of applicative measures
when two speed sensors are used at the same time.
A wire break, as shown in (f), leads to an immediate loss of the speed value and the response of the conductor
break monitoring.
Passive speed sensors

DGB-004-1.04
AM-020
c SI-01
NAMUR-
Geber X2
 Signal
01
Stromquelle
02
SI-01
a
AM-020
SI-02
NAMUR-
Geber X2
 Signal
01
Stromquelle
02
SI-02
b
When using only one or more passive speed sensors, the open-circuit monitoring always responds immediately to
an interruption, as shown under (a) or (b) or (c).

DGB-004-1.04
15.4. SPEED MEASUREMENT WITH TOOTH WHEEL

An active or passive input can be selected for speed measurement. For detection of rotation direction a second one
of the same type must be applied.
CAUTION: If one voltage output of the analog outputs on this module is shorted or overloaded, it may influence
one or both speed inputs!
Speed sensor inputs SI-01, SI-02
Data points SI-01, SI-02
Active input for the connection of a NAMUR sensor Acc. to EN 60947-5-6 resp. DIN 19243
Open circuit voltage 8 VDC
Short circuit current 8 mA
Threshold logic "0": >= 2 mA
logic "1": <= 1,3 mA
with hysteresis characteristic between logic "0" and "1"
Input circuits The circuits are operated with internally formed voltages.
Selection of the input type is done in the HIPASE Engineering
Tool in the window "Parameter Speed measurement" under "Input
type".
See chapter: 41.2.1, parameter speed measurement
Passive input
maximum permissible input voltage 32 VDC
input impedance > 5 kOhm
Threshold logic "0": <= 2,0 VDC
logic "1": >= 3,4 VDC
with hysteresis characteristic between logic "0" and "1"
Selection of the input type is done in the HIPASE Engineering
Tool in the window "Parameter Speed measurement" under "Input
type".
See chapter: 41.1.1, parameters
Frequency range of the speed sensor signal for passive and active input 0 .. 12 kHz
0.02% of input pulse frequency

Accuracy of speed detection at reference conditions 0.5% of the input pulse frequency when using a sensor with open
collector output
Resolution of speed detection 0.005% of input pulse frequency
Recommended sensor offset for rotation detection 90 degrees

DGB-004-1.04
Speed sensor inputs SI-01, SI-02

cable shield at the ground point (faston plug) of AB-330!
Recommended wire cross section 1.0 .. 1.5 mm² stranded with ferrule
Recommended wire cross section AWG (kcmil) 17 .. 15 stranded with ferrule
15.4.2. SPEED SENSOR INPUT SI-01 DATA POINTS - OUTPUTS
These data points are visible in the HIPASE Explorer under AM-020, SI-01 and are linked from there to function
sheet inputs.
Speed measurement, number of revolutions / minute
SI-01 Float32 - When switching on or off a signal from a speed sensor to input SI-
01, the measured value is increased or decreased with the set
gradient of the speed gradient.
SI-01 frequency Float32 - Pulse frequency of the sensor signal to SI-01 in Hz
0: no fault This data point indicates an error at the connection to the speed
SI-01 disturbed bool
1: wire break sensor.
0: speed < speed

threshold The speed measured value in rpm is compared with the default
SI-01 ThresholdSpeed bool
1: speed > speed value "speed threshold (%).
threshold

DGB-004-1.04
15.4.3. SPEED SENSOR INPUT SI-02 DATA POINTS - OUTPUTS
These data points are visible in the HIPASE Explorer under AM-020, SI-02 and are linked from there to function
sheet inputs.
Speed measurement, number of revolutions / minute
SI-02 Float32 - When switching on or off a signal from a speed sensor to input SI-
02, the measured value is increased or decreased with the set
gradient of the speed gradient.
SI-02 frequency Float32 - Pulse frequency of the sensor signal to SI-02 in Hz
0: no fault This data point indicates an error at the connection to the speed
SI-02 disturbed bool
1: wire break sensor.
0: speed < speed

threshold The speed measured value in rpm is compared with the default
SI-02 ThresholdSpeed bool
1: speed > speed value "speed threshold (%).
threshold
There are no module parameters available for this function. Parameterization is described in Chap. 41.1, "Speed
detection" described.
15.4.5. CONNECTION OF SPEED SENSOR INPUT
AM-020
SI-01
NAMUR-
Geber X2
 Signal
01
Stromquelle
02
Connection of a NAMUR sensor with speed sensor input SI-01 (active input - Input Mode = active)
(Speed sensor input SI-02 connected in the same way)

DGB-004-1.04
AM-020
+U AUX
X2
 Signal
01 SI-01
Ref
02
GND
Connection of an active sensor with speed sensor input SI-01 (passive Input - Input Mode = 0)
(Speed sensor input SI-02 connected in the same way)
15.4.6. WIRE BREAK MONITORING
The AM-020 module has a sensor circuit for each speed input to detect a wire break between the AM-020 module
and the sensor.
Active speed sensors
AM-020
+U AUX
X2
 Signal
Aktiver 01 SI-01
Ref
Geber 02
GND c
b
a
AM-020
f
+U AUX
X2
 Signal
01 SI-02
Ref
02
GND
e d
Active speed sensors are usually grounded on the sensor side. If more than one speed input is wired with an active
speed sensor, an interruption (a) or (d), as shown in the above diagram, does not lead to a breaker monitoring
response, as the sensor current will flow through the connection path (b) and ( c) can dodge.
In this case, both speed sensors still provide correct speed signals. However, it may be that with widely spaced
rotational speed sensors interference voltages are scattered into the resulting ground loop, which influence the
speed values.
Here can be provided applicatively a measure for the detection of a conductor break in this topology.

DGB-004-1.04
Only when there is an interruption at (a) and (d) at the same time does the conductor break monitoring respond. In
this case, both sensors no longer deliver speed values.
A conductor break within the sensor, as shown under (e), can only be detected by means of applicative measures
when two speed sensors are used at the same time.
A wire break, as shown in (f), leads to an immediate loss of the speed value and the response of the conductor
break monitoring.
Passive speed sensors
AM-020
c SI-01
NAMUR-
Geber X2
 Signal
01
Stromquelle
02
SI-01
a
AM-020
SI-02
NAMUR-
Geber X2
 Signal
01
Stromquelle
02
SI-02
b
When using only one or more passive speed sensors, the open-circuit monitoring always responds immediately to
an interruption, as shown under (a) or (b) or (c).

DGB-004-1.04

The group AO-01 .. AO-04 and the group AO-05 .. AO-08 are internally supplied separately. For a redundant
configuration for example a pair of AO-01 and AO-05 must be used.
the internal power supply can be overloaded for the group AO-01 .. AO-04 or AO-05 .. AO-08. To avoid damaging
the module, before the first application of the output signals the proper output range of the output signals must be
NOTICE: The output value of the output channels is undefined during the startup or shutdown process of the
ATTENTION: Voltage outputs may only be connected in parallel via diodes decoupled. Current outputs must never
be connected in parallel!
Analog Output AO-01 .. AO-08
AnalogOutput1, AnalogOutput2, AnalogOutput3, AnalogOutput4,

Data points
AnalogOutput5, AnalogOutput6, AnalogOutput7, AnalogOutput8
Output signal -10 .. +10 VDC (default setting)

-20 .. +20 mA
4 .. 20 mA
-11 .. +11 VDC

Maximum output signal in dithered mode -24 .. + 24 mA
4 .. + 24 mA
Dither frequency 50, 55, 60, 70, 80, 100, 125, 165, 250, 500 Hz
0 .. ± 10 % of actual output value in steps of 1%, but limited by the

Dither amplitude
maximum value of the output signal in dithered mode
Dither signal type Rectangular signal
Accuracy Ditherfrequenz 1%
Accuracy Ditheramplitude 1%
0.4 % of maximum output signal value for range: 4 .. 20 mA

Accuracy of module output at reference conditions, using shielded
0.5 % of maximum output signal value for range: -20 ..+20 mA
wires and single-sided shield grounding on AB-330 (acc. to EN 60051)
0.2 % of maximum output signal value for range: -10 .. +10 VDC

DGB-004-1.04
Analog Output AO-01 .. AO-08
Output rate 1 ksps
Maximum burden for operation mode current output 500 Ohm
Minimum burden for operation mode voltage output 7 kOhm

Wiring and cable placement rules that are exposed to high voltage or current changes. Apply cable
These data points are visible in the HIPASE Explorer under AM-020 as AO-0x and from there will be linked to
function chart outputs.
Output of the signal value at the analog output. The

AO-01 … AO-08 Float32 p.u. standardization is based on the specifications for
"Minimum value" and "Maximum value"
These data points are visible in the HIPASE Explorer under AM-020 as AO-0x and from there will be linked to
function chart outputs.
AO-01 overrange
AO-02 overrange If the analog output is written with a value less than
AO-03 overrange "Minimum Value" x (1+ "MaxOverrange / 100") or
0 .. output value ok
AO-04 overrange greater than "Maximum Value" x (1+ "MaxOverrange /
Bool 1 .. output value set to 100"), a restriction is made.
AO-05 overrange
AO-06 overrange limit value
These data points indicate the intervention of the
AO-07 overrange output value limit for each analog output separately.
AO-08 overrange

DGB-004-1.04
These parameters are available for each analogue output AO-01 ... AO-08
Parameter Data Default

Value setting range Description
name type value
+/- 10 VDC
Mode - 4 – 20 mA +/- 10 VDC Selection between voltage and current mode and of output range
-20 – 20 mA
Assignment of a numerical value to the lower end of the analogue

Minimaler Wert Float32 -50 000 .. 50 000 0
output (4 mA, 0 mA, 0 V, -10 V).
Assignment of a numerical value to the upper end of the analogue

Maximaler Wert Float32 -50 000 .. 50 000 100
output (20 mA, +10 V).
Time constant
Time 160 us .. 160 ms 0,1 s -3dB or -6dB Cutoff frequency of the input low-pass filter
Low pass filter
No filter Selection of the filter order of the input low pass filter
Low pass filter
- Low pass 1st order No filter 1st order low pass: 20 dB per decade
charakteristic
Low pass 2nd order 2nd order low pass: 40 dB per decade
This parameter defines the minimum or maximum permissible

output value.
If the value falls below a limit, the value in the data point for the
analog output is set to a value of
MaxOverrange Float32 0 .. 10 % 0
"Minimum value" x (1+ "MaxOverrange / 100")
or if exceeded on:
"Maximum value" x (1+ "MaxOverrange / 100").
The output signal is overlaid with a variable oscillator signal.

Dither amplitude Float32 0 .. 20 % 0
Amplitude of the oscillator signal.
Undefiniert,
50 Hz,
55,55 Hz,
62,5 Hz,
71,43 Hz,
Dither frequency - 83,33 Hz, No Frequency of oscillaton signal
100 Hz,
125 Hz,
166,66 Hz,
250 Hz,
500 Hz

DGB-004-1.04
Connection of analog output AO-01

(Output AO-02 .. AO-08 connected in the same way)

DGB-004-1.04
15.6. CONNECTION DIAGRAM AM-020
X1 AM-020
P1 Schirmung
+ 01
ß AO-01
- 02
+ 03
ß AO-02
- 04
+ 05
ß AO-03
- 06
+ 07
ß AO-04
- 08
+ 09
ß AO-05
- 10
+ 11
ß AO-06
- 12
+ 13
ß AO-07
- 14
+ 15
ß 16
AO-08
-
P2 Schirmung
X2
P1 Schirmung
Signal 01
 SI-01
Ref/Src 02
Signal 03
 SI-02
Ref/Src 04
Signal 05
AI-01
 0V 06
Signal 07
 0V 08
AI-02
Signal 09
 0V AI-03
10
Signal 11
 0V AI-04
12
Signal 13
 0V AI-05
14
Signal 15
 0V AI-06
16
P2 Schirmung

DGB-004-1.04
housing backside
CGB-015--.

DGB-004-1.04
X2/01 SI-01 Speed Input 1 M
X2/02 SI-01 Speed Input 1 0 V
X2/03 SI-02 Speed Input 2 M
X2/04 SI-02 Speed Input 2 0 V
X2/05 AI-01 Analog Input 1 M
X2/06 AI-01 Analog Input 1 0 V

0.5 mm 180 °

DGB-004-1.04

CGB-015--.

STF-5,08 BU - 1704588
15.11. VALIDITY
Document valid for hardware with mat. no. CGB-015--
Devices from V 1.00.00 support only application boards from version CGB-015-- with product state 10.

DGB-004-1.04
16. CP-300 PROCESSOR BOARD
On the Processor Board CP-300 the function block diagrams and the station bus protocols are processed. Data is
exchanged via the HIPASE internal process bus with the other modules in the HIPASE device. It is necessary to
provide exactly one CP-300 in a HIPASE device. Please also refer to basic functions in components.
Top view of board CP-300
16.1. FEATURES
 Station bus IEC 60870-5-103 electrical and optical

 Station bus IEC 60870-5-104 Ed. 2.0 electrical
 Station bus IEC 61850 Ed. 2.0 electrical
 IRIG-A/-B/-AM input
 Second pulse input
 Separate Touch Panel connection via Ethernet with HIPASE-PoE (Power over Ethernet)
 32-bit Processors with 400 MHz
 4 LEDs (V1 .. V4) and one accept button (S1)

DGB-004-1.04
Complete board
BGB-104-- (orderable only together with configuration code, refer to

Material number for spare part order
chapter 43.5)
CON0BGB104- (orderable only together with configuration code, refer

Internal ASAP material number for spare part order
to chapter 43.5)
Material number of physical base board (refer to serial number label) CGB-004 (can not be ordered separately)
Board width 2 slots
Weight 0.5 kg
Power consumption 12 W
Allowed slot position in MEDIUM sized housing D
Allowed slot position in LARGE sized housing G
Characteristic value in configuration code of device ‘R’

1757
Between Failure)

DGB-004-1.04
16.3. INTERFACES
Port X01 IEC60870-5-103
Connection type RS485 electrical, each wire pair up to 32 interfaces in half duplex operation are possible in parallel
Plug type D-Sub 9 Female
Pin assignment Pin 2: RX+, Pin 3: RX-, Pin 4: TX-, Pin 5: TX+
Galvanic isolation Yes
Isolation voltage
500 V
(Connection - Ground)
Special wiring
Shielded cable up to 100 m length at 9600 baud
recommendations
Port X02 IEC60870-5-103 optical - Receive
Connection type RS232C optical
Plug type Fiber optic ST/BFOC 2.5 mm (IEC 61754-2), Receiver 820 nm
Isolation voltage
Optical connection
Simplex or Duplex full core HCS-fiber (core diameter: 50/125 μm, 62.5/125 μm, 100/140 μm, and 200 μm) with
Special wiring
ST/BFOC-plug; Length up to 2 km
recommendations
Note bending radius: e.g. short-term 50 x core diameter, long-term 400 x core diameter

DGB-004-1.04
Port X03 IEC60870-5-103 optical - Transmit
Connection type RS232C optical
Plug type Fiber optic ST/BFOC 2.5 mm (IEC 61754-2), Transmitter 820 nm
Isolation voltage
Optical connection
Simplex or Duplex full core HCS-fiber (core diameter: 50/125 μm, 62.5/125 μm, 100/140 μm, and 200 μm) with
Special wiring
ST/BFOC-plug; Length up to 2 km
recommendations
Note bending radius: e.g. short-term 50 x core diameter, long-term 400 x core diameter
Port X04 USB-connection to PC (for future purpose)
Connection type USB 2.0 electrical
Plug type USB Type-B
Isolation voltage
500 V
Special wiring
Up to 5 m USB A to B Printer Cable
recommendations
Port X05 Second pulse (e. g. IEC 61850 Ed.2.0) (for future purpose)
Connection type electrical
Plug type SMB Sub-miniature coaxial socket, not terminated
Signal Input Rising edge 1 Hz, 3 .. 24 VDC @ 1 µs
Isolation voltage
500 V
Special wiring
Coaxial cable 50 ohms, length max. 10 m
recommendations

DGB-004-1.04
Port X06 For Touch panel with PoE ONLY !
Connection type Ethernet electrical
Plug type RJ45
Baud rate 10/100 Mbit/s
Cable connection on The PoE-enabled Ethernet cable (up to 5 m in length!) has to be plugged on the external touch panel in RJ45
Touch panel socket X10.
10.0.0.1 (IPv4 dotted decimal notation)

(10.99.20.1 deliveries up to beginning of November 2015)
CAUTION: If there are several HIPASE devices in a network different IP addresses for each device have to be
IP address (factory default assigned!
setting, changeable)
Net mask: 255.255.255.0 (“Class C”-size, /24)
Standard gateway: 10.0.0.254
Alias-IP address (factory 10.99.20.1 (static) (IPv4 dotted decimal notation)

default setting, not
changeable) Net mask: 255.255.255.0 (“Class C”-size, /24)
Power over Ethernet HIPASE-PoE (30V)
Galvanic isolation Data isolated, supply HIPASE-PoE not isolated
Isolation voltage
500 V data lines only
Special wiring
Min. CAT5, Length max. 5 m with HIPASE-PoE
recommendations
PC with HIPASE Engineering Tool / Station Bus (IEC 60870-5-104 Ed. 2.0 / MODBUS TCP / IEC 61850
Port X07
Ed. 2.0)
Plug type RJ45



DGB-004-1.04
PC with HIPASE Engineering Tool / Station Bus (IEC 60870-5-104 Ed. 2.0 / MODBUS TCP / IEC 61850
Port X07
Ed. 2.0)
Power over Ethernet –
Isolation voltage
Special wiring
Min. CAT5, Length max. 100 m
recommendations
Port X08 Station Bus (IEC 60870-5-104 Ed. 2.0 / MODBUS TCP / IEC 61850 Ed. 2.0)
Connection type Ethernet optical
Plug type SFF, Small form-factor pluggable (for SFP, Mini-GBIC)
Baud rate 10/100 Mbit/s provided, actually depending on equipped SFP module


Isolation voltage
optical connection
Special wiring
Refer to SFP Module manufacturer
recommendations

DGB-004-1.04
Connection with further HIPASE devices (for future purpose)

Port X09
PLEASE DO NOT PLUG ANYTHING!
Plug type RJ45
Isolation voltage
500 V
Special wiring
Min. CAT5, Length max. 5 m
recommendations
Port X10 Time Input via IRIG-A/-B or Meinberg telegram
Standard IRIG 200-98, formats A002, A132, B002, B122
Connection type DC-Level shift codes, AM, RS232, TTL
Plug type SMB Subminiature coaxial socket, not terminated
Supported Carrier
1 kHz or 10 kHz
frequency IRIG
Supported baud rates

1200 .. 115200 baud
Meinberg telegram
Logic High Level 3 .. 10 V
Logic Low Level 1 .. 3 V
Input voltage level 1 .. 10 V
Input impedance Non-linear, approx. 4 kOhms @ 3.5 VDC, 3 kOhms @ 10 VDC
Isolation voltage
500 V
Special wiring
Coaxial cable 50 ohms, length max. 10 m
recommendations

DGB-004-1.04
16.4. INDICATION AND OPERATING ELEMENTS (HMI): LEDS AND BUTTON
Element Color Symbol Function Description
LED V1 GREEN O OPERATION CP-300 is in operation and functional
LED V2 RED F FAULT CP-300 has a malfunction, and can meet limited or no services
A
LED V3 YELLOW (‘S’ until beginning ALARM A function of the function block diagram changed to status "Alarm"
of year 2016)
LED V4 RED T TRIP A function of the function block diagram changed to status "Trip"
Accept button Accepting of latched LED status “Alarm” and "Trip" (yellow LED V3
R RESET
S1 and red LED V4), if it is no longer active
For further details please refert to chapter ‘LED Indicators and Accept Button’.

DGB-004-1.04

DGB-004-1.04
16.5. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
CP-300 CP-3
ß X1 STATION BUS ß X1 STATIONSB

 
EL. DSUB9F EL. DSUB9F
 X2 STATION BUS  X2 STATIONSB

Rx OPT. ST Rx OPT. ST

Tx OPT. ST Tx OPT. ST
ß X4
For future ß X4
Für zukünftig
 purpose.  Zwecke.
For future Für zukünftig

 X5
purpose.  X5
Zwecke.
RESET BUTTON QUITTIER-TA
OPERATION BETRIEB
LEDs
FAULT STÖRUNG
TRIP AUSLÖSUNG
WARNING WARNUNG
ß X6 ß X6
 TOUCH PANEL  TOUCH PAN
RJ45 (HIPASE-PoE) RJ45 (HIPASE-P

 
RJ45 RJ45

 
SFP SFP
ß For future ß Für zukünftig

X9 X9
 purpose.  Zwecke.
 X10 IRIG -A/-B/-AM  X10 IRIG -A/-B/-A

SMB SMB
Connection diagram with physical view of the module cover plate from the perspective of the device back side

DGB-004-1.04
Supports connections up to 500 m,

1000BASE-SX (1.25 Gbps), Class 1 Laser,
CGB-025-- 850 nm, LC plug (duplex), operation temp.
range 0 .. 70 °C. Type: AXGD-5854-0511
SFP Transceiver MultiMode fiber-optic 850nm
ASAP Mat.No.: For port X08 of CP-300. Please order pair-
wise.
300753738
Characteristic value in configuration code of
device: '1'
Supports connections up to 10 km,

1000BASE-LX (1.25 Gbps), Class 1 Laser,
CGB-026-- 1310nm, LC plug (duplex), operation temp.
range 0 .. 70 °C. Type: AXGD-1354-0531
SFP Transceiver SingleMode fiber-optic
1310nm ASAP Mat.No.: For port X08 of CP-300. Please order pair-
wise.
300753739
Characteristic value in configuration code of
device: '2'
16.7. VALIDITY
Document valid for hardware: Mat. No.:
Tested functionality available CGB-004-A CGB-004-B
IEC 60870-5-103 electrical at Port X1
IEC 60870-5-103 optical at Port X2 / X3
USB connection to PC at Port X4 
Second pulse (e.g. IEC 61850 Ed.2.0) at Port X5  
Touch panel / HIPASE Engineering Tool via Ethernet at Port X6 
IEC 60870-5-104 Ed. 2.0 / IEC 61850 Ed. 2.0 / HIPASE Engineering Tool
 
via Ethernet at Port X7
IEC 60870-5-104 Ed. 2.0 / IEC 61850 Ed. 2.0 via SFP-Module at Port X8 
Connection to further HIPASE device via Ethernet at Port X9  
Time input via IRIG-A/-B or Meinberg telegram at Port X10  
Devices from V 1.00.00 support only application modules from version CGB-004-A with product state 00.

DGB-004-1.04
17. CS-320 HOUSING MEDIUM 42HP 6U
The design of the housing CS-320 is based on 19-inch rack mounted system (IEC 60297) with 42 horizontal pitch
units (HP) and 6 rack units (6U = high sub rack) for up to 10 double-size eurocards (PCBs). On front side of the
housing (closed side) the mounting of touch panel TP-900/TP-910/TP-920 is possible. The housing can be
mounted as cabinet door flush mounting or as rack mounting in a 19-inch frame. An integrated Ethernet connector
with PoE is provided. In case of device panel mounting the housing without touch panel is mounted with closed
front side to the panel. In this case the external touch panel TP-905/TP-915/TP-925 has to be placed separately in
a door cutout.
Each of the 10 slots is assigned to a letter, which are beginning from the left hand side: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J, K.
The slot position of the equipped boards or modules is part of every data point address. Nine of ten available slots
are equal. The purpose of slot D is to being equipped with board CP-300.
Rear and front view of housing CS-320
17.1. FEATURES
 All mounting types are possible: 19-inch frame, panel mounting or door flush mounting
 Optionally integrated touch panel for door flush mounting and 19-inch frame mounting
 Boards and modules equipped with rack slot mounting. (Simple spare part replacement)
 Modular terminal socket system - except CT connections
 Corrosion-resistant material

DGB-004-1.04
17.2. TECHNICAL DATA
Complete Housing
Outside Dimension 214 x 303 x 203 mm (W x H x D)
Dimensions for door cutout 218 x 270 mm (W x H)
Material number Not orderable
Material number of back plane (refer to serial number label) CGB-005 (can not be ordered separately)
Weight 2,5 kg
Number of slots 10
1 x TR-310, 1 x CP-300, 1 x PS-xxx, 1 x AB-3xx. Not all boards with

Maximum possible number of boards their maximum number can be equipped at the same time.
Refer to: Configuration and ordering of a HIPASE device and Features
IP 20
Protection against medium sized solid foreign objects (fingers and
IP Code acc. to IEC EN 60529
foreign objects with diameters from 12.5 mm), no protection against
water
Environmental conditions, test classes, standards Refer to: Environmental requirements
The Ethernet port (highlighted in red) may only be used for HIPASE touch panel with PoE !

DGB-004-1.04
Ethernet Port Exclusively used for HIPASE touch panel with PoE - no other opposite allowed!
Plug type RJ45


Isolation voltage
Special wiring
recommendations

DGB-004-1.04
17.3. DIMENSIONAL DRAWING
Housing dimensions (Dwg. TGB-008--/01.00)
17.4. VALIDITY
Document valid for hardware: Mat. No. TGB-320--
Devices from V 1.00.00 support only modules from version CGB-005-- with product state 20.

DGB-004-1.04
18. CS-330 HOUSING LARGE 84HP 6U
The design of the housing CS-330 is based on 19-inch rack mounted system (IEC 60297) with 84 horizontal pitch
units (HP) and 6 rack units (6U = high sub rack) for up to 21 double-size eurocards (PCBs). On front side of the
housing (closed side) the mounting of touch panel TP-950/TP-960/TP-970 is possible. The housing can be
mounted as cabinet door flush mounting or as rack mounting in a 19-inch frame. An integrated Ethernet connector
with PoE is provided. In case of device panel mounting the housing without touch panel is mounted with closed
front side to the panel. In this case the external touch panel TP-955/TP-965/TP-975 has to be placed separately in
a door cutout.
Each of the 21 slots is assigned to a letter, which are beginning from the left hand side: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J, K,
L, M, N, P, Q, R, S, T, U, V, W. The slot position of the equipped boards or modules is part of every data point
address. Twenty of twenty one available slots are equal. The purpose of slots G and J is to being equipped with
board CP-300.
Rear and front view of housing CS-330
18.1. FEATURES
 All mounting types are possible: 19-inch frame, panel mounting or door flush mounting
 Optional integrated touch panel for door flush mounting and 19-inch frame mounting
 Boards and modules equipped with rack slot mounting. (Simply spare part replacement.)
 Modular and easy terminal socket system (except CT connections)
 Corrosion-resistant material

DGB-004-1.04
Complete Housing
Outside Dimension 441 x 303 x 203 mm (W x H x D)
Dimensions for door cutout 444 x 270 mm (W x H)
Material number Not orderable
Material number of back plane (refer to serial number label) CGB-006 (can not be ordered separately)
Weight 4 kg
Number of slots 21
Maximum possible number of boards 2 x TR-310, 1 x CP-300, 2 x PS-xxx, 2 x AB-3xx. Not all boards with
their maximum number can be equipped at the same time.
Refer to: Configuration and ordering of a HIPASE device and Features
IP Code acc. to IEC EN 60529 IP 20

Protection against medium sized solid foreign objects (fingers and
foreign objects with diameters from 12.5 mm), no protection against
water
Environmental conditions, test classes, standards Refer to: Environmental requirements
The Ethernet port (highlighted in red) may only be used for HIPASE touch panel with PoE !

DGB-004-1.04
Ethernet Port Exclusively used for HIPASE touch panel with PoE - no other opposite allowed!
Plug type RJ45


Isolation voltage
Special wiring
recommendations

DGB-004-1.04
Housing dimensions (Dwg. TGB-010--/01.00)
18.4. VALIDITY
Document valid for hardware: Mat. No. TGB-330--

DGB-004-1.04
19. DI-010 DIGITAL MODULE 16DI
The DI-010 module is an extension module for the PS-300 and PS-500 boards. Thus, the number of digital inputs
of the PS boards can be expanded pairwise as needed. The extension module DI-010 is in operation as soon as
the corresponding PS base board itself is supplied with auxiliary voltage. For the maximum number of DI-010 in the
device please refer to basic functions in components.
Ansicht des Modules DI-010
19.1. FEATURES
 16 bipolar wide range inputs with individually by software adjustable switching thresholds and hysteresis
 Every bipolar wide range input supports sensor monitoring for wire break, contact failure or short-circuit
 For each wide-range input switchable Arc Forcing
 Adjustable input debouncing
 All inputs are galvanically isolated from each other
 Can be fitted to all PS boards

DGB-004-1.04
Complete module
Module width 1 slot
Weight 0.2 kg
Power consumption 2.2 W
Allowed slot position in MEDIUM sized housing J, K, (option: G, H)
Allowed slot position in LARGE sized housing T, U, V, W, (2nd option: M, N, P, Q)
Characteristic value in configuration code of device 'J'

581
Between Failure)

DGB-004-1.04
19.3. TECHNICAL DATA OF DIGITAL INPUTS
Digital Inputs complies with VDN directive 2003
Datenpunkte DI-01 .. DI-16
Input range 24 .. 250 VDC
In steps of 1 V continuously adjustable between 0 .. 250 VDC

Threshold
(hysteresis, wires short circuit, wire breakage)
Continuous input current 3 mA for 1 s / afterwards 1 mA continuous current
Input current 10ms 25 mA for 30 ms
Min. impulse duration for logic high longer 2 ms

19.4. DATA POINTS
Data point name Data type Values Description
0: FALSE
DI-0x bool Status of Digital Input, which is passed for further processing.
1: TRUE
0: inactive
Invalid bool Is active, if communication to peripheral CPU is faulty.
1: active
Wire break (Value below FalseLowerLimit)

ValidFalse (between FalseLowerLimit and FalseUpperLimit)
0: wire break
1: ValidFalse Contact faulty (between FalseUpperLimit and
Range uint32 2: contact faulty TrueLowerLimit)
3: ValidTrue ValidTrue (between TrueLowerLimit and TrueUpperLimit)
4: short circuit
Short circuit (above TrueUpperLimit) Refer to chaper below.
The abbreviation DI-0x stands for data point DI-01 .. DI-16.

DGB-004-1.04
19.5. BOARD PARAMETERS
Default Setting
value step size
Threshold of Digital Input. Only visible if the

Threshold i_volt 0 .. 250 VDC 12 VDC 1V
parameter Sensor Supervision is set to inactive.
Debounce time of Digital Input. For preset

debounce time the state of Digital Input must be
Debounce time TimeSpan64 0 .. 1000 ms 0 ms 1 ms
continuous logic 1 to be taken. Setting
recommendation: 5 ms
Arc Forcing: Immediately after activation, the

input becomes low-resistance for a short time to
1: Standard (Arc effect a safe switching current for the encoder
Forcing) Standar contact.
single
Mode d (Arc -
choice 2: trip circuit Trip circuit supervision: If a digital input is used
Forcing)
supervision for the "Out of range monitoring" protection
function, the "Out of range monitoring" mode
must be set for the input.
0: inactive Inversion of digital input on board.

Inversion bool 0 -
1: activ Recommended in exceptional cases only!
If inactive, the signal is evaluated at digital input

according to parameter threshold.
If active, the signal at the digital input is evaluated
0: inactive
Sensor Supervision bool 0 - according to the 4 parameter: False LowerLimit,
1: activ
False Upper Limit, Lower Limit True, True
UpperLimit.
Refer to next chapter.

DGB-004-1.04
19.6. SENSOR SUPERVISION

If sensor supervision is deactivated, each of the wide-range inputs has individually adjustable threshold and
hysteresis. This threshold should be 70% of the operating voltage. The hysteresis is permanently set to 5% of the
threshold. Normally, this mode is quite sufficient.
Inactive sensor supervision of Digital Inputs
If sensor supervision is activated individually defined areas with respective upper and lower limits for each of the
wide-range inputs are adjustable, in which
 Wire break (to low input voltage),
 Logic 0 (valid voltage range for FALSE),
 Contact fault (invalid intermediate range, old state remains),
 Logic 1 (valid voltage range for TRUE) and
 Short circuit (to high input voltage)
are recognized and are available in the three data points of the digital input.
WARNING: A parameterization of the range limits requires experience and knowledge of the system influences
and should be used carefully considering only in special cases.
Active sensor supervision of Digital Inputs with threshold

DGB-004-1.04
19.7. ARC FORCING AND TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION (TCS)

Low currents at digital inputs represent a challenge for
 the reliable closing of the relay contacts of signal transmitters in the field and
 for evaluation at the digital input.

To certainly ensure the low current flow, the signal transmitters contact is briefly forced (30 mA @ 30 ms) by the
HIPASE digital input during bounce time to connect the contact areas safely by a small arc.
Thereafter, the forcing still remains for 1 s slightly increased to about 3 mA before it is completely disabled and an
economical, minimal current flow of about 1 mA will be maintained, which is now being monitored.
~30ms
Ue ~30mA
Ie
~1s
~3mA
~1mA
t
Digital inputs during switch-on procedure: Modes ArcForcing (30 ms + 1 s) and Trip Circuit Supervision only 1 mA
Q1
EIN AUS
This so called trip circuit supervision ensures, that it is checked in case of a voltage
t dip, whether it is
 an interference from capacitive

Q2 coupling EIN
in the input line, which is recognized by arc forcing and thereby
AUS
being not misinterpreted; or it is t
 a contact weakness of the signal transmitter, which can be remedied through the Arc Forcing, or it is
 an actual switch-off of the signal transmitter.

The goal is that disturbances are evaluated and intercepted once and thereby no incorrect states of the datapoint
DI 0x are caused.
<1ms ~30ms
Ue ~30mA
Ie du/dt
~3mA
~1mA
 t
Digital input during switching off: Mode Arc Forcing for testing whether a voltage dip took place by an interference
coupling,
Q1
a contact weakness, or by actual switch-off.
AUS EIN AUS
t
Q2
AUS EIN
t
t1
PB0
+5V GND t2 +5V
t

DGB-004-1.04
19.8. CONNECTION DIAGRAM DI-010

DGB-004-1.04
housing backside
CGB-008--.
Terminal nomination Data point Function
X1/01 DI-01 Digital Input 1 + 24 ... 250 VDC
X1/02 DI-01 Digital Input 1 GND

DGB-004-1.04

DGB-004-1.04

CGB-008--.

STF-5,08 BU - 1704588
19.12. VALIDITY
Document valid for hardware: Mat. No. CGB-008--.

DGB-004-1.04
20. DO-010 DIGITAL MODULE 16DO
The DO-010 module is an extension module for the PS-300 and PS-500 boards. Thus, the number of digital
outputs of the PS boards can be expanded as needed. The extension module DO-010 is in operation as soon as
the corresponding PS base board itself is supplied with auxiliary voltage. For the maximum number of DO-010 in
the device please refer to basic functions in components.
Top view of module DO-010
20.1. FEATURES
 16 relay outputs with self-monitoring of relay coil and measuring of coil exciting voltage
 Switching cycle counter each relay output
 Adjustable minimum output pulse duration
 All outputs are galvanically isolated from each other
 The relay contacts are triggered monostable

DGB-004-1.04
Complete module
Module width 1 slot
Weight 0.2 kg
Characteristic value in configuration code of device 'K'
MTBF of component 6,369.427 hours (727 years)

157
Between Failure)

DGB-004-1.04
20.3. TECHNICAL DATA OF DIGITAL OUTPUTS
Digital Outputs complies with VDN directive 2003
Data points DO-01 .. DO-16
Nominal current (ohmic load) 8 A 30VDC, 8A 250VDC, according to load diagram below
Max. permissible switching current for 0.5 s 30 A
Max. switching power (ohmic load) 2000 VA, 240W
To be able to switch off inductive loads, a protective freewheeling

Max. inductive switching power
diode has to be provided parallel with the load!
Max. switching voltage 440 VAC / 230 VDC
Min. switching current 100 mA / 5VDC
Average relay execution time

(Time between activation of the relay output and closing of the < 10 ms
contacts)
Accuracy of the parameterized holding time under reference

± 3 ms
conditions


DGB-004-1.04
Load curve of the relay switching contacts - taken from NAIS data sheet (type DE1a1b).
20.4. DATA POINTS
Data point name Data typ Values Description
0 .. contact open Switching command to the output relays. For error detection of the coil
DO-0x bool
1 .. contact closed monitoring an entry is made in the fault memory.
DO-0x Switching cycle

uint32 Number of switching-on operations from logic 0 to 1. Can not be reset.
counter
The abbreviation DO-0x stands for the range DO-01 .. DO-16.
20.5. BOARD PARAMETERS
Default- Einstell- Description

Name Datentyp Werte-Einstellbereich
Wert Schrittweite
dwell time of the output relay. Minimum duration

DO-0x dwell time uint32 0 .. 60 s 50 ms 1 ms
of an output pulse.
0: inactive Inversion of the digital output on the module.

DO-0x Inverting bool 0 -
1: active Recommended only in exceptional cases!

DGB-004-1.04
20.6. CONNECTION DIAGRAM DO-010

DGB-004-1.04
housing backside
*) Caution: A factory assembly with mechanical terminal coding was only realized in product state 00 of the CGB-
010--.
X1/01 DO-01 Digital Output 1 COM relay contact
X1/02 DO-01 Digital Output 1 N/O relay contact

DGB-004-1.04

DGB-004-1.04

Caution: A factory assembly with mechanical terminal coding was only realized in product state 00 of the
CGB-010--.

STF-5,08 BU - 1704588
20.10. VALIDITY
Document valid for hardware: Mat. No. CGB-010--.

DGB-004-1.04
21. DX-010 DIGITAL MODULE 8DI, 8DO
The DX-010 module is an extension module for the PS-300 and PS-500 boards. Thus, the number of digital inputs
and outputs of the PS boards can be expanded as needed. The extension module DX-010 is in operation as soon
as the corresponding PS base board itself is supplied with auxiliary voltage. For the maximum number of DX-010 in
the device please refer to basic functions in components.
Top view of module DX-010
21.1. FEATURES
 8 bipolar wide range inputs with individually by software adjustable switching thresholds and hysteresis
 Every bipolar wide range input supports sensor monitoring for wire break, contact failure or short-circuit
 For each wide-range input switchable Arc Forcing
 Adjustable input debouncing
 All inputs are galvanically isolated from each other
 8 relay outputs with self-monitoring of relay coil and measuring of coil exciting voltage
 Switching cycle counter each relay output
 Adjustable minimum output pulse duration
 All outputs are galvanically isolated from each other
 The relay contacts are triggered monostable

DGB-004-1.04
Complete module
Material number CGB-009-A (can not be ordered separately)
Module width 1 slot
Weight
Characteristic value in configuration code of device 'X'

581
Between Failure)

DGB-004-1.04
21.3. DIGITAL INPUTS
21.3.1. ARC FORCING AND TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION (TCS)
Low currents at digital inputs represent a challenge for
 the reliable closing of the relay contacts of signal transmitters in the field and
 for evaluation at the digital input.
To certainly ensure the low current flow, the signal transmitters contact is briefly forced (30 mA @ 30 ms) by the
HIPASE digital input during bounce time to connect the contact areas safely by a small arc.
Thereafter, the forcing still remains for 1 s slightly increased to about 3 mA before it is completely disabled and an
economical, minimal current flow of about 1 mA will be maintained, which is now being monitored.
~30ms
Ue ~30mA
Ie
~1s
~3mA
~1mA
t
Digital inputs during switch-on procedure: Modes ArcForcing (30 ms + 1 s) and Trip Circuit Supervision only 1 mA
Q1
EIN AUS
t
This so called trip circuit supervision ensures, that it is checked in case of a voltage dip, whether it is
Q2
EIN AUS
 an interference from capacitive coupling in the input line, which is recognized
t
by arc forcing and thereby
being not misinterpreted; or it is
 a contact weakness of the signal transmitter, which can be remedied through the Arc Forcing, or it is
 an actual switch-off of the signal transmitter.

The goal is that disturbances are evaluated and intercepted once and thereby no incorrect states of the datapoint
DI 0x are caused.
<1ms ~30ms
Ue ~30mA
Ie du/dt
~3mA
~1mA
 t
Digital input during switching off: Mode Arc Forcing for testing whether a voltage dip took place by an interference
coupling,
Q1
a contact weakness, or by actual switch-off.
AUS EIN AUS
t
Q2
AUS EIN
t
t1
PB0
+5V GND t2 +5V
t

DGB-004-1.04
Digital Inputs complies with VDN directive 2003
Datenpunkte DI-01 .. DI-08
Input range 24 .. 250 VDC
In steps of 1 V continuously adjustable between 0 .. 250 VDC

Threshold
(hysteresis, wires short circuit, wire breakage)
Input current (standard) 1 mA
Input current at Arc forcing 30 mA for 30 ms 3 mA for 1 s / afterwards 1 mA continuous current
Input current 10ms 25 mA for 30 ms
Min. impulse duration for logic high longer 2 ms

21.3.3. DATA POINTS
0 .. FALSE
DI-0x bool Status of Digital Input, which is passed for further processing.
1 .. TRUE
0 .. inactive
Invalid bool Is active, if communication to peripheral CPU is faulty.
1 .. active
Wire break (Value below FalseLowerLimit)

ValidFalse (between FalseLowerLimit and FalseUpperLimit)
0: wire break
1: ValidFalse Contact faulty (between FalseUpperLimit and
Range uint32 2: contact faulty TrueLowerLimit)
3: ValidTrue ValidTrue (between TrueLowerLimit and TrueUpperLimit)
4: short circuit
Short circuit (above TrueUpperLimit) Refer to chaper below.

DGB-004-1.04
The abbreviation DI-0x stands for data point DI-01 .. DI-08.
Default Setting
value step size
Switching threshold of the digital input. Only

visible if parameter Encoder monitoring has been
Threshold i_volt 0 .. 250 VDC 12 VDC 1V
set to inactive. For flutter suppression, the
threshold was provided with a 5% hysteresis.
Debounce time of Digital Input. For preset

debounce time the state of Digital Input must be
Debounce time TimeSpan64 0 .. 1000 ms 0 ms 1 ms
continuous logic 1 to be taken. Setting
recommendation: 5 ms
Arc Forcing: Immediately after activation, the

input becomes low-resistance for a short time to
1: Standard effect a safe switching current for the encoder
Standar contact.
single (Arc Forcing)
Mode d (Arc -
choice 2: trip circuit Trip circuit supervision: If a digital input is used
Forcing)
supervision for the "Trip circuit supervision" protection
function, the "Trip circuit supervision" mode must
be set for the input.
0 .. inactive Inversion of digital input on board.

Inversion bool 0 -
1 .. activ Recommended in exceptional cases only!
If inactive, the signal is evaluated at digital input

according to parameter threshold.
If active, the signal at the digital input is evaluated
0 .. inactive
Sensor Supervision bool 0 - according to the 4 parameter: False LowerLimit,
1 .. activ
False Upper Limit, Lower Limit True, True
UpperLimit.
Refer to next chapter.

DGB-004-1.04
21.3.5. SENSOR SUPERVISION
If sensor supervision is deactivated, each of the wide-range inputs has individually adjustable threshold and
hysteresis. This threshold should be 70% of the operating voltage. The hysteresis is permanently set to 5% of the
threshold. Normally, this mode is quite sufficient.
Inactive sensor supervision of Digital Inputs
If sensor supervision is activated individually defined areas with respective upper and lower limits for each of the
wide-range inputs are adjustable, in which
 Wire break (to low input voltage),
 Logic 0 (valid voltage range for FALSE),
 Contact fault (invalid intermediate range, old state remains),
 Logic 1 (valid voltage range for TRUE) and
 Short circuit (to high input voltage)
are recognized and are available in the three data points of the digital input.
WARNING: A parameterization of the range limits requires experience and knowledge of the system influences and
should be used carefully considering only in special cases.
Active sensor supervision of Digital Inputs with threshold

DGB-004-1.04
21.4. DIGITAL OUTPUTS
Digital Outputs complies with VDN directive 2003
Data points DO-01 .. DO-08


contacts)

± 3 ms
conditions


DGB-004-1.04
21.4.2. DATA POINTS
DO-0x bool
DO-0x Switching cycle

counter
The abbreviation DO-0x stands for the range DO-01 .. DO-08.

Wert Schrittweite

DO-0x dwell time uint32 0 .. 60 s 50 ms 1 ms
of an output pulse.
0 .. inactive Inversion of the digital output on the module.

DO-0x Inverting bool 0 -
1 .. active Recommended only in exceptional cases!

DGB-004-1.04
21.5. CONNECTION DIAGRAM DX-010

DGB-004-1.04
housing backside
product state 21 of the CGB-009-A.

DGB-004-1.04

DGB-004-1.04

product state 21 of the CGB-009-A.

STF-5,08 BU - 1704588
21.9. VALIDITY
Document valid for hardware: Mat. No. CGB-009-A.
Devices from V 1.00.00 support only modules from version CGB-009-A with product state 10.

DGB-004-1.04
22. PS-300 POWER SUPPLY BOARD 110/220VDC WITH 4 FSO
The board PS-300 is the power supply unit of HIPASE device. In addition, this module has a sum error signal
contact (Device Fault) and four fail-safe Outputs (FSO 0x).
Top view of board PS-300

Power Supply
The module PS-300 contains two power supplies that are connected together internally to produce redundant all
device internal operating voltages from the system-side auxiliary voltage. These two power supplies are to be wired
externally separated.
The MEDIUM device can be equipped with only one Power Supply Board.
The LARGE device can be equipped with one or with two Power Supply Boards.
The screenshot of HIPASE Engineering Tools shows the two possible equipping positions for
the Power Supply Boards each with four plugged extension modules.

DGB-004-1.04
The right Power Supply Board must always be equipped and will be referred as AUX1 on the nameplate.
The left Power Supply Board must be fitted if additional extension modules are required, or it is requires due to the
the total power demand of the device. The second power supply board is referred as AUX2 on the nameplate. For
the maximum number of PS-300 in the device please refer to basic functions in components.
REMARK:
 If a device is equipped with two power supply boards, then the two Fault alarm contacts "Device fault" have
to be wired parallel to a total sum fault signaling contact.
 Always both power supplies of one power supply board have to be wired parallel. (X1/01 with X1/09 and
X1/02 with X1/10 and X1/03 with X1/11)
Digital Inputs and Outputs

One PS-300 can be equipped with 2 or 4 extension modules for digital inputs or outputs.
Fail-safe contact FSO-01 .. FSO-04

For command activation of circuit breaker ON coils four separate fail-safe contacts FSO-01 .. FSO-04 are provided.
Fault alarm contact “Device Fault”

The behavior of the fault alarm contact is determined by the HIPASE Device Software. The fault signal output is
active (NC - COM closed) at:
 Missing auxiliary supply voltage in device

 Start-up of device
 Project loading in progress
 Fatal device failure
REMARK: If a device is equipped with two power supply boards, then the two Fault alarm contacts "Device fault"
have to be wired parallel to a total sum fault signaling contact.

DGB-004-1.04
22.1. FEATURES
 At least one PS-300 each device required

 Contains two separate supply parts A and B for redundant power supply
 Bridging of short-term voltage interruptions
 Failure signal relays with separate N/O and N/C contacts (with self-supervision of relay coil exciting
voltage)
 Four free usable digital fail-safe Outputs (galvanic separated N/O contact)
 Space for 2 or 4 further extension modules with digital inputs and outputs
Complete board

chapter 43.5)

to chapter 43.5)
Board width 3 or 5 slots
3 slots, no additional modules: 1 kg

3 slots, with two additional modules: 1.6 kg
Weight, approx..
5 slots, no additional modules: 1.1 kg
5 slots, with four additional modules: 2.1 kg
Allowed slot position in MEDIUM sized housing As AUX1: H, (option: F)
Allowed slot position in LARGE sized housing As AUX1: S, (2nd option as AUX2: L)
Characteristic value in configuration code of device 'T' with 2 extension modules or 'C' with 4 extension modules

DGB-004-1.04
Complete board

1271
Between Failure)

DGB-004-1.04
22.3. POWER SUPPLY

The power supply board PS-300 contains two separate internal power supplies, which always have to be supplied
in parallel. External bridging wires have to be made on the terminals.
Refer to: Chapter 22.5. „Connection diagram PS-300”.
This enables a redundant internal power supply in the HIPASE device.
Supply part for HIPASE device each channel (A or B)
Input range 110 .. 220 VDC (limits: 90 .. 250 VDC)
max. 18 A for t < 0,25 ms

Inrush current
max. 12 A for t <1 ms
Circuit breaker, characteristic C, 2A, 2-pole each device, 10kA

Type: ABB S201-C2 (2A), Product ID: 2CDS251001R0024
Recommended fuse (automatic circuit breaker)
sufficient for 2 PS boards in device (i.e. LARGE device in maximum
configuration)
Frequency range - (DC)
Max. output power (internal) 40 W
Max. power consumption 75 W
Max. allowed duration of voltage interruption without loss of

50 ms at nominal voltage
functionality of device
Connection - Ground: 2.2 kV (50 Hz), 5 kV peak (1.2/50μs)

Connection - Connection: 2.2 kV (50 Hz), 5 kV peak (1.2/50μs)

DGB-004-1.04
22.4. DIGITAL OUTPUT DEVICE FAULT / DEVICE READY

The occurrence of a fatal error (device is in fault state) is latest reported after 50 ms.
The following causes lead to a device error:
 Hardware error CP-300

 HW Error during initialization of the modules
 TR-310 not time synchronized
 Communication error between CP-300 and the other modules
 Overload CP-300
 Overload TR-310
Status of device Device Fault X2 / 03, 04 Device Ready X2 / 01, 02
No voltage power supply Contact closed Contact open
Fatal error (Device is in fault state) Contact closed Contact open
Device ready and no project loaded Contact closed Contact open
Device ready and FUP in operation Contact open Contact closed
Digital Output "Device Ready” resp. “Device Fault" complies with VDN directive 2003


contacts)

± 3 ms
conditions

DGB-004-1.04

22.5. DIGITAL OUTPUTS FSO-01 .. 04

These outputs are equipped with a FailSafe circuit that prevents accidental switching due to HW or SW errors. Due
to the fail-safe circuit, the relay execution time is considerably longer than with all other digital outputs (eg DX-010)
Digital Outputs FSO-0x complies with VDN directive 2003
Data points FSO-01, FSO-02, FSO-03, FSO-04

DGB-004-1.04


contacts)

± 3 ms
conditions


DGB-004-1.04
22.5.2. DATA POINTS
FSO-0x bool
FSO-0x Switching cycle

counter
The abbreviation FSO-0x stands for the range FSO-01 .. FSO-04.

Wert Schrittweite

FSO-0x dwell time uint32 0 .. 60 s 50 ms 1 ms
of an output pulse.

DGB-004-1.04
22.6. CONNECTION DIAGRAM PS-300
PS-300
X1 X1
+ 01 + + 0
AUX1.A
 – 02 –  – 0
PE 03 110 .. 250 VDC PE 0
04 not used 0
This external 05 not used Diese externe
0
wiring has to be 06 not used Verdrahtung muss 0
done by the user. 07 not used vom Anwender 0
08 not used hergestellt werden. 0
09 + 0
– AUX1.B
10 1
11 110 .. 250 VDC 1
12 not used 1
13 not used 1
14 not used 1
15 not used 1
16 not used 1
X2 X2
+ 01 DEVICE + 0
ß ß
– 02 READY – 0
+ 03 DEVICE + 0
ß ß
– 04 FAULT – 0
05 not used 0
06 not used 0
07 not used 0
08 not used 0
+ 09 + 0
ß FSO-01 ß
– 10 – 1
+ 11 + 1
ß FSO-02 ß
– 12 – 1
+ 13 + 1
ß FSO-03 ß
– 14 – 1
+ 15 + 1
ß FSO-04 ß
– 16 – 1

DGB-004-1.04
housing backside used as AUX1 in device
*) Caution: A factory assembly with mechanical terminal coding was only realized at product state 11 of the
CGB-007-A.
X1/01 - Input aux. supply voltage channel A + 110 .. 250VDC
X1/02 - Input aux. supply voltage channel A GND
X1/03 - Protective earth
X1/04 - --- Not used ---
X1/05 - --- Not used ---
X1/06 - --- Not used ---
X1/07 - --- Not used ---
X1/08 - --- Not used ---
X1/09 - Input aux. supply voltage channel B + 110 .. 250VDC
X1/10 - Input aux. supply voltage channel B GND
X1/12 - --- Not used ---
X1/13 - --- Not used ---
X1/14 - --- Not used ---
X1/15 - --- Not used ---
X1/16 - --- Not used ---

DGB-004-1.04
X2/01 Device Fault Fault signal Output COM relay contact
X2/02 Device Fault Fault signal Output N/O relay contact DEVICE READY
X2/04 Device Fault Fault signal Output N/C relay contact DEVICE FAULT
X2/05 - --- Not used ---
X2/06 - --- Not used ---
X2/07 - --- Not used ---
X2/08 - --- Not used ---
X2/09 FSO-01 Fail-safe Output 1 COM relay contact
X2/10 FSO-01 Fail-safe Output 1 N/O relay contact
CGB-008-- DI-010 Digital Module 16DI Link to data sheet
CGB-010-- DO-010 Digital Module 16DO Link to data sheet
CGB-009-A DX-010 Digital Module 8DI 8DO Link to data sheet
Two or four pieces of these extension modules can be equipped to a PS-300.

DGB-004-1.04

Caution: A factory assembly with mechanical terminal coding was only realized at product state 11 of the
CGB-007-A.

STF-5,08 BU - 1704588
Miniature Circuit Breaker - S200 - 1P - C - 2 A

ABB Circuit breaker
For protecting a HIPASE device with one or ABB Art.-Nr. 2CDS251001R0024
Type S201-C2
two PS-300 power supply boards.
22.11. VALIDITY
Document valid for hardware: Mat. No. BGB-107--.

DGB-004-1.04
23. PS-500 POWER SUPPLY BOARD 24/60VDC WITH 4 FSO
The board PS-500 is the power supply unit of HIPASE device. In addition, this module has a sum error signal
contact (Device Fault) and four fail-safe Outputs (FSO 0x).
Top view of board PS-500
Power Supply
The module PS-500 contains two power supplies that are connected together internally to produce redundant all
device internal operating voltages from the system-side auxiliary voltage. These two power supplies are to be wired
externally separated.
The MEDIUM device can be equipped with only one Power Supply Board.
The LARGE device can be equipped with one or with two Power Supply Boards.
The screenshot of HIPASE Engineering Tools shows the two possible equipping positions for
the Power Supply Boards each with four plugged extension modules.

DGB-004-1.04
The right Power Supply Board must always be equipped and will be referred as AUX1 on the nameplate.
The left Power Supply Board must be fitted if additional extension modules are required, or it is requires due to the
the total power demand of the device. The second power supply board is referred as AUX2 on the nameplate. For
the maximum number of PS-500 with extension modules in the device please refer to basic functions in
components.
REMARK:
 If a device is equipped with two power supply boards, then the two Fault alarm contacts "Device fault" have
to be wired parallel to a total sum fault signaling contact.
 Always both power supplies of one power supply board have to be wired parallel. (X1/01 with X1/09 and
X1/02 with X1/10 and X1/03 with X1/11)
Digital Inputs and Outputs

One PS-500 can be equipped with 2 or 4 extension modules for digital inputs or outputs.
Fail-safe contact FSO-01 .. FSO-04

For command activation of circuit breaker ON coils four separate fail-safe contacts FSO-01 .. FSO-04 are provided.
The fail-safe contacts are available as data points in HIPASE function block diagram.
Fault alarm contact “Device Fault”

The behavior of the fault alarm contact is determined by the HIPASE Device Software. The fault signal output is
active (NC - COM closed) at:
 Missing auxiliary supply voltage in device

 Start-up of device
 Project loading in progress
 Fatal device failure
REMARK: If a device is equipped with two power supply boards, then the two Fault alarm contacts "Device fault"
have to be wired parallel to a total sum fault signaling contact.

DGB-004-1.04
23.1. FEATURES
 At least one PS-500 each device required

 Contains two separate supply parts A and B for redundant power supply
 Bridging of short-term voltage interruptions
 Failure signal relays with separate N/O and N/C contacts (with self-supervision of relay coil exciting voltage)
 Four free usable digital fail-safe Outputs (galvanic separated N/O contact)
 Space for 2 or 4 further extension modules with digital inputs and outputs
Complete board

chapter 43.5)

to chapter 43.5)
Board width 3 slots
3 slots, no additional modules: 1 kg

3 slots, with two additional modules: 1.6 kg
Weight
5 slots, no additional modules: 1.1 kg
5 slots, with four additional modules: 2.1 kg
Allowed slot position in MEDIUM sized housing As AUX1: H, (option: F)
Allowed slot position in LARGE sized housing As AUX1: S, (2nd option as AUX2: L)
Characteristic value in configuration code of device 'U' with 2 extension modules or 'W' with 4 extension modules

DGB-004-1.04
Complete board

1271
Between Failure)

DGB-004-1.04
23.3. POWER SUPPLY

The power supply board PS-500 contains two separate internal power supplies, which always have to be supplied
in parallel. External bridging wires have to be made on the terminals. Refer to: Chapter 23.5. „Connection diagram
PS-500”.
This enables a redundant internal power supply in the HIPASE device.
Supply part for HIPASE device each channel
Input range 24 .. 60 VDC (limits: 20 .. 72 VDC)
max. 18 A for t < 0,25 ms

Inrush current
max. 12 A for t <1 ms
Circuit breaker, characteristic C, 6A, 2-pole each device, 10kA

Type: ABB S201-C6 (6A), Product ID: 2CDS251001R0064
Recommended fuse (automatic circuit breaker)
sufficient for 2 PS boards in a device (i.e., LARGE device in maximum
configuration)
Frequency range - (DC)
Max. output power (internal) 40 W
Max. power consumption 75 W
Max. allowed duration of voltage interruption without loss of

50 ms at nominal voltage
functionality of device
Connection - Ground: 2.2 kV (50 Hz), 5 kV peak (1.2/50μs)

Connection - Connection: 2.2 kV (50 Hz), 5 kV peak (1.2/50μs)

DGB-004-1.04
23.4. DIGITAL OUTPUTS DEVICE FAULT / DEVICE READY

The occurrence of a fatal error (device is in fault state) is latest reported after 50 ms.
The following causes lead to a device error:
 Hardware error CP-300

 HW Error during initialization of the modules
 TR-310 not time synchronized
 Communication error between CP-300 and the other modules
 Overload CP-300
 Overload TR-310
Status of device Device Fault X2 / 03, 04 Device Ready X2 / 01, 02
No voltage power supply Contact closed Contact open
Fatal error (Device is in fault state) Contact closed Contact open
Device ready and no project loaded Contact closed Contact open
Device ready and FUP in operation Contact open Contact closed


contacts)

± 3 ms
conditions

DGB-004-1.04

23.5. DIGITAL OUTPUTS FSO-01 .. 04

These outputs are equipped with a FailSafe circuit that prevents accidental switching due to HW or SW errors. Due
to the fail-safe circuit, the relay execution time is considerably longer than with all other digital outputs (eg DX-010)
Data points FSO-01, FSO-02, FSO-03, FSO-04

DGB-004-1.04


contacts)

± 3 ms
conditions


DGB-004-1.04
23.5.2. DATA POINTS
FSO-0x bool
FSO-0x Switching cycle

counter
The abbreviation FSO-0x stands for the range FSO-01 .. FSO-04.

Wert Schrittweite

FSO-0x dwell time uint32 0 .. 60 s 50 ms 1 ms
of an output pulse.

DGB-004-1.04
23.6. CONNECTION DIAGRAM PS-500
PS-500
X1
+ 01 + +
AUX1.A
 – 02 –  –
PE 03 24 .. 60 VDC PE
04 not used
05 not used Diese externe
This external Verdrahtung muss
wiring has to be 06 not used
vom Anwender
done by the user. 07 not used hergestellt werden.
08 not used
09 +
– AUX1.B
10
11 24 .. 60 VDC
12 not used
13 not used
14 not used
15 not used
16 not used
X2
+ 01 DEVICE
ß ß
– 02 READY
+ 03 DEVICE
ß ß
– 04 FAULT
05 not used
06 not used
07 not used
08 not used
+ 09
ß FSO-01 ß
– 10
+ 11
ß FSO-02 ß
– 12
+ 13
ß FSO-03 ß
– 14
+ 15
ß FSO-04 ß
– 16

DGB-004-1.04
housing backside used as AUX1 in device
*) Caution: A factory assembly with mechanical terminal coding was only realized at product state 11 of the
CGB-013-A.
X1/01 - Input aux. supply voltage channel A + 24 .. 60VDC
X1/02 - Input aux. supply voltage channel A GND
X1/04 - --- Not used ---
X1/05 - --- Not used ---
X1/06 - --- Not used ---
X1/07 - --- Not used ---
X1/08 - --- Not used ---
X1/09 - Input aux. supply voltage channel B + 24 .. 60VDC
X1/10 - Input aux. supply voltage channel B GND
X1/12 - --- Not used ---
X1/13 - --- Not used ---
X1/14 - --- Not used ---
X1/15 - --- Not used ---
X1/16 - --- Not used ---

DGB-004-1.04
X2/02 Device Fault Fault signal Output N/O relay contact DEVICE READY
X2/04 Device Fault Fault signal Output N/C relay contact DEVICE FAULT
X2/05 - --- Not used ---
X2/06 - --- Not used ---
X2/07 - --- Not used ---
X2/08 - --- Not used ---
CGB-008-- DI-010 Digital Module 16DI Link to data sheet
CGB-010-- DO-010 Digital Module 16DO Link to data sheet
CGB-009-A DX-010 Digital Module 8DI 8DO Link to data sheet
Two or four pieces of these extension modules can be equipped to a PS-500.

DGB-004-1.04

Caution: A factory assembly with mechanical terminal coding was only realized at product state 11 of the
CGB-013-A.

STF-5,08 BU - 1704588

ABB Circuit breaker
For protecting a HIPASE device with one or ABB Art.-Nr. 2CDS251001R0064
Type S201-C6
two PS-500 power supply boards.
23.11. VALIDITY
Document valid for hardware: Mat. No. BGB-113--, Product state: 00

DGB-004-1.04
24. TP-900 INTERNAL TOUCH PANEL MEDIUM - AND VARIANTS
In HIPASE system an "internal touch panel" is a front panel with built-in touch panel without cover hood, which is
integrated into HIPASE device. This "internal touch panel" is internally and directly connected to the ethernet port
on the backplane of HIPASE device and is supplied via HIPASE PoE via this ethernet cable.
On the touch panel, the PoE power mode shall be preserved to the factory default setting "HIPASE PoE"!
Available variants
Type ↓ Nomination Material number
TP-900 Internal Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE BGM-900--

TP-920 Internal Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE P BGP-920--
24.1. FEATURES
 4 LEDs for status indication of device functionality

 Touch panel with illuminated 7-inch color TFT with Touch-on-Screen operation
 Power supply and communication via Ethernet cable with PoE
 Mountable on medium sized housing CS-320.

DGB-004-1.04
24.2. ORDERING DATA
Complete Touch panel
BGE-910-- (requires no additional configuration code)

BGM-900-- (requires no additional configuration code)
Material number for spare part order BGP-920-- (requires no additional configuration code)
BGS-940-- (requires no additional configuration code)
BGT-930-- (requires no additional configuration code)
ASAP# 300753383 for TP-910

ASAP# 300753387 for TP-900
Interne ASAP Materialnummer für Ersatzteilbestellung ASAP# 300753391 for TP-920
ASAP# 300753397 for TP-930
ASAP# 300753395 for TP-940
Width 42 HP, half 19-inch
Weight 0.8 kg
Dimensions (Height x Width x Depth) 310 x 226 x 55 mm
Characteristic value in configuration code of device 'B'
Characteristic Values
Power supply (galvanically isolated) Jumper position: HIPASE-PoE (30 V) (factory default setting)
The PoE-supporting Ethernet cable (length 30cm at MEDIUM device resp. 50cm at LARGE
Cable connection in HIPASE device device) between internal touch panel and HIPASE device is plugged on the RJ45-socket
X10 on touch panel and on the RJ45-socket on back plane of device.
0,30 A @ 24 V at 100 % brightness,

0,15 A @ 24 V at 25 % brightness
Current consumption
(automatic dimming to 0 % after an adjustable time of inactivity in the HIPASE Engineering
Tool)
Power consumption 9 W (PoE Power class 3)
Life time display 10.000 hours @ 25°C with activated background light
Effective area of display 152.4 x 91.44 mm (7“ diagonal)

DGB-004-1.04
Resolution 800 x 480 pixels (WVGA), 262K colors
Contrast 200:1
Brightness 350 cd/m2 at 100 % brightness, adjustable by software
Viewing angle 100 ° horizontal / vertical
sensitive to mechanical pressure (resistive touch screen),

Actuation of touch panel
no multi-touch operation. Ensures reliable operation at all temperatures and humidities.
CPU 32Bit / 400MHz
Memory 8 MB-NOR-Flash, 128 MB NAND-Flash, 128 MB-SDRAM
Adapter for MicroSD-Card
Interfaces 1 x 10/100MBit Ethernet, 1 x USB-Host

CAUTION: If there are several HIPASE devices in a network different IP addresses for each
IP address (factory default setting, changeable) device have to be forgiven!

10.99.20.2 (static) (IPv4 dotted decimal notation)

Alias-IP address (factory default setting, not (192.168.0.132 deliveries up to beginning of November 2015)
changeable)
Number of status indication LEDs 4
Naming Material number Details
For making thereof a TP-905. Required for

Touch panel Cover hood set TGB-040--
external mounting in door cutout.
For internal touch panel MEDIUM TP-900 -

Ethernet cable CAT5 - 30 cm T41-257--
included at device delivery

DGB-004-1.04
Dimensions of front plate 42HP (Dwg. TGB-012--/01.01)

DGB-004-1.04
24.6. ETHERNET CONNECTION
Connection of Ethernet cable on Touch panel on X10
Connection of Ethernet cable on back plane of HIPASE device (LARGE resp. MEDIUM device)
24.7. VALIDITY
Document valid for
Type ↓ Nomination Material number Product state
TP-900 Internal Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE BGM-900-- From 00
TP-910 Internal Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE E BGE-910-- From 00
TP-920 Internal Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE P BGP-920-- From 00
TP-930 Internal Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE T BGT-930-- From 00
TP-940 Internal Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE S BGS-940-- From 00

DGB-004-1.04
25. TP-905 EXTERNAL TOUCH PANEL MEDIUM - AND VARIANTS
In HIPASE system an "external touch panel" is a front panel with built-in touch panel with cover hood, which is
mounted in a cubicle, cabinet or panel.
The connection to the HIPASE system is possible in two ways:
1.) This "external touch panel" is directly connected via an ethernet cable to the ethernet port X6 of CP-300
Processor Board - it’s the connection port for "Touch panel with PoE". This means that both the data connection,
as well as the power supply is established. On the touch panel, the PoE power mode shall be preserved to the
factory default setting "HIPASE PoE"!
2.) This "external touch panel" is connected via an ethernet cable to a Ethernet switch with PoE functionality in the
cubicle and is power supplied via the standardized PoE voltage acc. to IEEE802.3. This Ethernet switch may only
be connected to Ethernet port X7 on CP-300 Processor Board, it’s the connection port for "Stations bus".
CAUTION: In this case on the touch panel the setting of the voltage supply via PoE shall be changed to the
IEEE802.3-compliant version!
Available Variants

TP-925 External Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE P BGP-925--

DGB-004-1.04
25.1. FEATURES

 inclusive Touch panel cover hood set
 mountable in cabinet door cutout

Material number for spare part order BGP-925-- (requires no additional configuration code)
BGS-945-- (requires no additional configuration code)
Width 42 HP, half 19-inch
Weight 1.2 kg
Protection class (IP Code) IP 30
HIPASE-POE
Power supply, switchover via jumper to X3
Power Over Ethernet acc. IEEE802.3af-2003
5m when powered by HIPASE-POE

Max. permissible length of the Ethernet cable
100m when powered by IEEE802.3-af-2003 POE
The PoE-compatible Ethernet cable (up to 5 m in length!) Between the

external touch panel and HIPASE device must be plugged into the
Cable connection to the HIPASE device
touch panel on the RJ45 socket X10 and on the device on the RJ45
socket X6 of the CP-300.
Dimensions for cabinet door cutout Refer to chapter 4.4
Characteristic value in configuration code of device 'J'
For further technical data and dimension drawing please refer to TP-900 Internal Touch panel MEDIUM - and
variants

DGB-004-1.04
25.3. SELECTION OF AUXILIARY POE SUPPLY LEVEL

In case of external mounting of the touch panel (usually in the cabinet door), it usually is also directly connected to
the device. Also in this case the default factory settings shall also stay unchanged on HIPASE-PoE.
CAUTION: Only in case of connecting the touch panel with a PoE-supporting switch the setting of the voltage
supply via PoE shall be changed to the IEEE802.3-compliant version!
For special applications, a 12V or 24V power supply can be provided. To do this, the printed-circuit board of the
touch panel must be equipped with a 2-pin Phoenix socket:
12 VDC 24 VDC
Jumper-Verbindungen: Pin7-9 und 8-10 Jumper-Verbindungen: Pin5-7 und 6-8

DGB-004-1.04
Connection of Ethernet cable on Touch panel on X10 (below the removable cover hood)
25.5. VALIDITY
Document valid for
TP-905 External Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE BGM-905-- 00
TP-915 External Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE E BGE-915-- 00
TP-925 External Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE P BGP-925-- 00
TP-935 External Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE T BGT-935-- 00
TP-945 External Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE S BGS-945-- 00

DGB-004-1.04
26. TP-950 INTERNAL TOUCH PANEL LARGE - AND VARIANTS
In HIPASE system an "internal touch panel" is a front panel with built-in touch panel without cover hood, which is
integrated into HIPASE device. This "internal touch panel" is internally and directly connected to the ethernet port
on the backplane of HIPASE device and is supplied via HIPASE PoE via this ethernet cable. On the touch panel,
the PoE power mode shall be preserved to the factory default setting "HIPASE PoE"!
Available Variants

26.1. FEATURES

 Mountable on LARGE housing CS-330

DGB-004-1.04

BGP-970-- (requires no additional configuration code)
Width 84 HP, 19-inch
Weight 1.3 kg
Characteristic value in configuration code of device '7'
Power supply (galvanically isolated) Jumper position: HIPASE-PoE (30 V) (factory default setting)
The PoE-supporting Ethernet cable (length 30cm at MEDIUM device resp. 50cm at LARGE
Cable connection in HIPASE device device) between internal touch panel and HIPASE device is plugged on the RJ45-socket
X10 on touch panel and on the RJ45-socket on back plane of device.
0,30 A @ 24 V at 100 % brightness,

0,15 A @ 24 V at 25 % brightness
Current consumption
(automatic dimming to 0 % after an adjustable time of inactivity in the HIPASE Engineering
Tool)
Power consumption 9 W (PoE Power class 3)
Life time display 10.000 hours @ 25°C with activated background light
Effective area of display 152.4 x 91.44 mm (7“ diagonal)
Resolution 800 x 480 pixels (WVGA), 262K colors
Contrast 200:1
Brightness 350 cd/m2 at 100 % brightness, adjustable by software
Viewing angle 100 ° horizontal / vertical

DGB-004-1.04
sensitive to mechanical pressure (resistive touch screen),

Actuation of touch panel
no multi-touch operation. Ensures reliable operation at all temperatures and humidities.
CPU 32Bit / 400MHz
Memory 8 MB-NOR-Flash, 128 MB NAND-Flash, 128 MB-SDRAM
Adapter for MicroSD-Card
Interfaces 1 x 10/100MBit Ethernet, 1 x USB-Host

CAUTION: If there are several HIPASE devices in a network different IP addresses for each
IP address (factory default setting, changeable) device have to be forgiven!

10.99.20.2 (static) (IPv4 dotted decimal notation)

Alias-IP address (factory default setting, not (192.168.0.132 deliveries up to beginning of November 2015)
changeable)
Number of status indication LEDs 4
Naming Material number Details
For making thereof a TP-955. Required for

Touch panel Cover hood set TGB-040--
external mounting in door cutout.
For internal touch panel LARGE TP-950 / TP-

Ethernet cable CAT5 - 50 cm YK120205--
960 / TP-970 - included at device delivery

DGB-004-1.04
Dimensions of front plate 84HP (Dwg. TGB-013--/01.01)

DGB-004-1.04
Connection of Ethernet cable on Touch panel X10
Connection of Ethernet cable on back plane of HIPASE device (LARGE Housing)
26.7. VALIDITY
Document valid for
TP-950 Internal Touch panel LARGE HIPASE BGM-950-- From 00
TP-960 Internal Touch panel LARGE HIPASE E BGE-960-- From 00
TP-970 Internal Touch panel LARGE HIPASE P BGP-970-- From 00
TP-980 Internal Touch panel LARGE HIPASE T BGT-980-- From 00

DGB-004-1.04
27. TP-955 EXTERNAL TOUCH PANEL LARGE - AND VARIANTS
In HIPASE system an "external touch panel" is a front panel with built-in touch panel with cover hood, which is
mounted in a cubicle, cabinet or panel. The connection to the HIPASE system is possible in two ways:
1.) This "external touch panel" is directly connected via an ethernet cable to the ethernet port X6 of CP-300
Processor Board - it’s the connection port for "Touch panel with PoE". This means that both the data connection,
as well as the power supply is established. On the touch panel, the PoE power mode shall be preserved to the
factory default setting "HIPASE PoE"!
2.) This "external touch panel" is connected via an ethernet cable to a Ethernet switch with PoE functionality in the
cubicle and is power supplied via the standardized PoE voltage acc. to IEEE802.3. This Ethernet switch may only
be connected to Ethernet port X7 on CP-300 Processor Board, it’s the connection port for "Stations bus".
CAUTION: In this case on the touch panel the setting of the voltage supply via PoE shall be changed to the
IEEE802.3-compliant version!
Available Variants


DGB-004-1.04
27.1. FEATURES

 inclusive Touch panel cover hood set
 mountable in cabinet door cutout

BGP-975-- (requires no additional configuration code)
Width 84 HP, 19-inch
Weight
Proteciton Class (IP Code) IP 30
HIPASE-POE
Power supply, switchover via jumper to X3
Power Over Ethernet acc. IEEE802.3af-2003
5m when powered by HIPASE-POE

Max. permissible length of the Ethernet cable
100m when powered by IEEE802.3-af-2003 POE
The PoE-compatible Ethernet cable (up to 5 m in length!) Between the

external touch panel and HIPASE device must be plugged into the
Cable connection to the HIPASE device
touch panel on the RJ45 socket X10 and on the device on the RJ45
socket X6 of the CP-300.
Dimensions for cabinet door cutout Refer to chapter 4.4
Characteristic value in configuration code of device 'S'
For further technical data and dimension drawing please refer to TP-950 Internal Touch panel LARGE - and
variants

DGB-004-1.04
27.3. SELECTION OF AUXILIARY POE SUPPLY LEVEL

In case of external mounting of the touch panel (usually in the cabinet door), it usually is also directly connected to
the device. Also in this case the default factory settings shall also stay unchanged on HIPASE-PoE.
CAUTION: Only in case of connecting the touch panel with a PoE-supporting switch the setting of the voltage
supply via PoE shall be changed to the IEEE802.3-compliant version!
For special applications, a 12V or 24V power supply can be provided. To do this, the printed-circuit board of the
touch panel must be equipped with a 2-pin Phoenix socket:
12 VDC 24 VDC
Jumper-Verbindungen: Pin7-9 und 8-10 Jumper-Verbindungen: Pin5-7 und 6-8

DGB-004-1.04
Connection of Ethernet cable on Touch panel on X10 (below the removable cover hood)
27.5. VALIDITY
Document valid for
TP-955 External Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE BGM-955-- From 00
TP-965 External Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE E BGE-965-- From 00
TP-975 External Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE P BGP-975-- From 00
TP-985 External Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE T BGT-985-- From 00

DGB-004-1.04
28. TR-300 TRANSFORMER BOARD 4CT, 4VT
The Transformer Board TR-330 offers measuring of 4 CT secondary currents and 4 VT secondary voltages. All
circuits are galvanically isolated. Based on these input signals protection-, excitation and synchronizing specific
values are calculated and provided in the shape of data points in the HIPASE function block diagram. For the
maximum number of TR-300 in the device please refer to Basic functions in components.
This board TR-300 can be used for protection, synchronisation and excitation. The specification of input measuring
circuits offer both accuracy for regulation technology as well as the extended input range for protection systems.
Each of these application need special algorithms, which can be selected:
 Protection: FFT-, RMS calculation

 Excitation: space vector- and transducer model, RMS calculation
Top view of board TR-310
28.1. FEATURES
 4 current transformer inputs for 1 or 5 A nominal current, suitable for measurement and protection by high
accuracy and up to 130-fold short time overload
 4 voltage transformer inputs for 100V .. 125V nominal voltage, suitable for measurement and protection by
high accuracy and up to 2-fold short time overload
 Implementation of system-specific calculations from the input values
 All modules-relevant settings (e.g. calibrations) stored on the module, thereby replacing parts without
Engineering Tool
 Current transformer terminals for ring or fork lugs according to VDN guidelines for digital protection systems

DGB-004-1.04
Complete board
Material number for spare part order BGB-100-- (requires no additional configuration code)
Internal ASAP Material number for spare part order 301082367 (requires no additional configuration code)
Board width 3 slots
Weight 0.7 kg
Allowed slot position in MEDIUM sized housing A
Allowed slot position in LARGE sized housing A, (2nd option: D)
Characteristic value in configuration code of device '4--'

1171
Between Failure)

DGB-004-1.04
28.3. VOLTAGE INPUTS

VT Inputs VT-01 ... VT-04
Nominal voltage 100 VAC / √3; 100 .. 127 VAC phase-to-phase
Measuring range 0 .. 177Vrms
Short time overload 2-fold (of 100Veff), 284V max. peak value - without time limitation due to high impedance input
Frequency range 3 .. 150 Hz for derived values and momentary values
Sampling of digitization 4000 samples / sec f. oscilloscope or 1000 samples / sec after FFT resp. transducer model calculation
Accuracy RMS measurement

Better than 1 % at nominal value, for sinusoidal input signals
value
Accuracy frequency measurement Better than 0.01 Hz

to high voltage or current changes.
In HIPASE engineering tool, the VT inputs VT-01 .. 04 can be grouped to individually selected multiphase system
groups (eg VT-123). The above mentioned technical data and module parameters are vaild for each of these
groups.

DGB-004-1.04
The parameter values for primary value, nominal value and secondary value are tested for meaningfulness as part
of the consistency check.
Related input / Value setting Default Description

Name Data type
data point range value
Interlinked primary nominal value of the

voltage transformer.
This input value is only used to form the
Transformer primary value VT-01 .. VT-04 Float32 1 .. 1000000 V 1000 V normalization factor.
The transformer primary value must
always be greater than or equal to the set
nominal value!
Interlinked secondary nominal value of the

When using intermediate voltage
transformers, the secondary nominal
Transformer secondary
VT-01 .. VT-04 Float32 1 .. 200 V 100 V value must be entered according to the
value
total transmission ratio of the converter
chain.
normalization factor.
Rated voltage of measured plant part.

(RMS value of phase-to-phase voltage)
Checking example:
Inputs: Primary rated value: 13800 V
Secondary rated value = 100 V
Rated value VT-01 .. VT-04 Float32 1 .. 1000000 V 1000 V
Rated value = 13800 V
Applied voltage:
X2 / 01 - 03: 100 V
X2 / 01 - 05: 100 V
X2 / 03 - 05: 100 V
Output: Data point |U| of POU EST = 1,0
pu
Only visible for protection applications.

Here happens the assignment of the
Synchronisation group VT-01 .. VT-04 - No, 1 .. 5 No voltage input to the defined
synchronization group for frequency
determination.

DGB-004-1.04

Name Data type
Phase voltage / star connection

must then be set if a phase voltage is
present at the terminals. This setting
controls the conversion of the measured
value to Chained voltage. The selection is
also used for the test of the measuring
method for application excitation and
turbine control.
Interlinked voltage / delta connection
must then be set if a chained voltage is
Phase voltage
applied to the terminals. This setting
/
Y connection
or also used for the test of the measuring
Interlinked turbine control.
voltage /
Voltage measuring VT-01 .. VT-04 - delta Neutral voltage / displacement voltage
connection must when used for the protection
functions:
or
StatorEarth20HzImp
Neutral StatorEarth3rd1ph
voltage / StatorEarth3rd3ph
displacement StatorEarthDir
voltage StatorEarthStabCur
StatorEarthStabVlt
adjusted
Must not be selected for multi-phase
systems.
May only be used for synchronization
channels in application protection when
20 Hz has been selected for the nominal
frequency.

DGB-004-1.04
28.4. CURRENT INPUTS
CT Inputs CT-01 ... CT-04
1 A or 5 A
Range selection via terminal connection:
Nominal current (In)
 1 A: between terminals X1 / e.g. 01A and X1 / e.g. 01C
 5 A: between terminals X1 / e.g. 01B and X1 / e.g. 01C
Measuring range 0 .. 130 x In peak value
continuous: 4 x In
1 s: 100 x In
Thermal load capacity
10 s: 30 x In
One half-wave: 250 x In
Frequency range 3 .. 150 Hz for derived and momentary value
± 1 % in range 0.1 .. 2 x In, for sinusoidal input signals

Accuracy at reference conditions
± 1.5 % in range higher 2 x In, for sinusoidal input signals
Burden lower 0.3 VA at In = 1 A and 5 A

DGB-004-1.04

Supplied and enclosed angle ring cable lugs up to 2.5mm² wire cross section with hole inside diameter
4.3mm. (also fork cable lugs possible)
Recommendation for M4 screws: Using a magnetic cross recessed screwdriver with cross recess type
PZ02
IP Code IP20
Wire cross section 1.5 .. 6 mm² stranded, standard 2.5 mm² - M4 cable lugs will be supplied to the module
Wire cross section AWG/kcmil min. 15 .. max. 9 stranded, standard AWG13 - M4 cable lugs will be supplied to the module
In HIPASE engineering tool, the CT inputs CT-01 .. 04 can be grouped to individually selected multiphase system
groups (eg CT-123). The above mentioned technical data and module parameters are vaild for each of these
groups.

Name Data type
Primary rated value of current

transformer.
This input value is used for creating
Transformer primary
CT-01 .. CT-04 Float32 1 .. 100000 A 3000 A the scale factor only.
value
always be greater than or equal to the
set nominal value!
Secondary rated value of current

transformer.
When using intermediate- current
transformers the secondary nominal
Transformer
CT-01 .. CT-04 Float32 1 .. 5 A 1A value must be entered in accordance
secondary value
with the overall transmission ratio of
the transformer chain.
the scale factor only.
Rated current of measured plant part.
Rated value CT-01 .. CT-04 Float32 1 .. 100000 A 3000 A The rated value must always be
smaller than or equal to the set
primary rated value!
1 A range Which terminals of the current input is

Terminal connection CT-01 .. CT-04 Single choice 1A connected:
5 A range
1 A range: between terminal A and C

DGB-004-1.04

Name Data type
5 A range: between terminal B and C
Only visible for protection

applications.
Synchronisation Here happens the assignment of the
CT-01 .. CT-04 - No, 1 .. 5 No
group current input to the defined
determination.
For further (application relevant) parameter of this board please refer to:
Settings for application excitation,
Settings for application protection
28.5. DERIVED VARIABLES
FFT based
Accuracy phase angle for +/- 2° electrical absolute

direction 1° relative
Accuracy frequency derived from

+/- 1 mHz for voltage range 0.8 .. 1.2 pU
voltage measuring
Accuracy Frequenz derived from

10 mHz for I > 0.25 pU
current measuring
Proper time frequency (achieved

4 periodes at ramp 0.1 Hz / s
accuracy)
Impedance (quadratic
+/- 5 % at setting value impedance relative 0.01 Ohms
characteristic)
General
Active power +/- 1 % for 0.8 < cos phi <= 1
Reactive power +/- 1 % for -0.2 < cos phi <= 0.2
Apparent power +/- 1 %
Space vector based
Accuracy phase angle +/- 0.3° electrical

voltage measuring

DGB-004-1.04
28.6. CONNECTION DIAGRAM TR-330
Block diagram / Physical view of the module cover plate from the perspective of the device back side

DGB-004-1.04
28.7. TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OF CT SCREW TERMINAL STRIP (X1)
Terminal
Data point Function
designation
X1/01A CT-01 Current measuring input 1 A
X1/01B CT-01 Current measuring input 5 A
X1/01C CT-01 Current measuring input COM
28.8. TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OF VT TERMINAL STRIP (X2)
Terminal
Data point Function
designation
X2/01 VT-01 Voltage measuring input Phase
X2/02 VT-01 Voltage measuring input Neutral

DGB-004-1.04
X2/09 Not used.
X2/10 Not used.
X2/11 Not used.
X2/12 Not used.
X2/13 Not used.
X2/14 Not used.
X2/15 Not used.
X2/16 Not used.
Nomination Material number Detail

screws (for voltage transformer inputs),
Nominal current: 12 A, Number of contacts: Phoenix Contact FRONT-MSTB 2,5/16-STF-
EI959506--
16, pitch: 5.08 mm, Connection method: 5,08 BU - 1704588
screw terminals, Color: blue (fully equipped at
delivery)
90° angled ring crimp cable lug Cu M4 (hole

Angled Ring cable lug M4 for CT terminals
inside diameter 4.3 mm) up to 2.5 mm² wire
with non-halogenic insulation YK133824-- diameter.
(24 pcs. included at delivery)
(Cembre BP-L4)
24 x
Angled Ring cable lug M4 for CT terminals 90° angled ring crimp cable lug Cu M4 (hole
with non-halogenic insulation ASAP Nr. 300852300 inside diameter 4.3 mm) up to 2.5 mm² wire
(Set of 24 pcs.) diameter.
(Cembre BP-L4)
28.10. VALIDITY
Document valid for hardware: Mat. No. BGB-100--

DGB-004-1.04
29. TR-310 TRANSFORMER BOARD 12CT, 8VT
The Transformer Board TR-310 offers measuring of 12 CT secondary currents and 8 VT secondary voltages. All
circuits are galvanically isolated. Based on these input signals protection-, excitation and synchronizing specific
values are calculated and provided in the shape of data points in the HIPASE function block diagram. For the
maximum number of TR-310 in the device please refer to Basic functions in components.
This board TR-310 can be used for protection, synchronisation and excitation. The specification of input measuring
circuits offer both accuracy for regulation technology as well as the extended input range for protection systems.
Each of these application need special algorithms, which can be selected:
 Protection: FFT-, RMS calculation

 Excitation: space vector- and transducer model, RMS calculation
Top view of board TR-310
29.1. FEATURES
 12 current transformer inputs for 1 or 5 A nominal current, suitable for measurement and protection by high
accuracy and up to 130-fold short time overload
 8 voltage transformer inputs for 100V .. 125V nominal voltage, suitable for measurement and protection by
high accuracy and up to 2-fold short time overload
 Implementation of system-specific calculations from the input values
 All modules-relevant settings (e.g. calibrations) stored on the module, thereby replacing parts without
Engineering Tool
 Current transformer terminals for ring or fork lugs according to VDN guidelines for digital protection systems

DGB-004-1.04
Complete board
Material number for spare part order BGB-103-- (requires no additional configuration code)
Internal ASAP Material number for spare part order 300618117 (requires no additional configuration code)
Board width 3 slots
Weight 1 kg
Allowed slot position in MEDIUM sized housing A
Allowed slot position in LARGE sized housing A, (2nd option: D)
Characteristic value in configuration code of device 'F--'

1171
Between Failure)

DGB-004-1.04
29.3. VOLTAGE INPUTS

VT Inputs VT-01 ... VT-08
Nominal voltage 100 VAC / √3; 100 .. 127 VAC phase-to-phase
Measuring range 0 .. 177Vrms
Short time overload 2-fold (of 100Veff), 284V max. peak value - without time limitation due to high impedance input
Frequency range 3 .. 150 Hz for derived values and momentary values
Accuracy RMS measurement

Better than 1 % at nominal value, for sinusoidal input signals
value
Accuracy frequency measurement Better than 0.01 Hz

to high voltage or current changes.
In HIPASE engineering tool, the VT inputs VT-01 .. 08 can be grouped to individually selected multiphase system
groups (eg VT-123). The above mentioned technical data and module parameters are vaild for each of these
groups.

DGB-004-1.04
Name Data type
Interlinked primary nominal value of the

Transformer primary value VT-01 .. VT-08 Float32 1 .. 1000000 V 1000 V normalization factor.
always be greater than or equal to the set
nominal value!
Interlinked secondary nominal value of the

When using intermediate voltage
transformers, the secondary nominal
Transformer secondary
VT-01 .. VT-08 Float32 1 .. 200 V 100 V value must be entered according to the
value
total transmission ratio of the converter
chain.
normalization factor.
Rated voltage of measured plant part.

(RMS value of phase-to-phase voltage)
Checking example:
Inputs: Primary rated value: 13800 V
Secondary rated value = 100 V
Rated value VT-01 .. VT-08 Float32 1 .. 1000000 V 1000 V
Rated value = 13800 V
Applied voltage:
X2 / 01 - 03: 100 V
X2 / 01 - 05: 100 V
X2 / 03 - 05: 100 V
Output: Data point |U| of POU EST = 1,0
pu
Only visible for protection applications.

Here happens the assignment of the
Synchronisation group VT-01 .. VT-08 - No, 1 .. 5 No voltage input to the defined
determination.

DGB-004-1.04

Name Data type
Phase voltage / star connection

must then be set if a phase voltage is
present at the terminals. This setting
also used for the test of the measuring
turbine control.
Interlinked voltage / delta connection
must then be set if a chained voltage is
Phase voltage
applied to the terminals. This setting
/
Y connection
or also used for the test of the measuring
Interlinked turbine control.
voltage /
Voltage measuring VT-01 .. VT-08 - delta Neutral voltage / displacement voltage
connection must when used for the protection
functions:
or
StatorEarth20HzImp
Neutral StatorEarth3rd1ph
voltage / StatorEarth3rd3ph
displacement StatorEarthDir
voltage StatorEarthStabCur
StatorEarthStabVlt
adjusted
Must not be selected for multi-phase
systems.
May only be used for synchronization
channels in application protection when
20 Hz has been selected for the nominal
frequency.

DGB-004-1.04
29.4. CURRENT INPUTS
1 A or 5 A
Range selection via terminal connection:
Nominal current (In)
 1 A: between terminals X1 / e.g. 01A and X1 / e.g. 01C
 5 A: between terminals X1 / e.g. 01B and X1 / e.g. 01C
Measuring range 0 .. 130 x In peak value
continuous: 4 x In
1 s: 100 x In
Thermal load capacity
10 s: 30 x In
One half-wave: 250 x In
Frequency range 3 .. 150 Hz for derived and momentary value
± 1 % in range 0.1 .. 2 x In, for sinusoidal input signals

Accuracy at reference conditions
± 1.5 % in range higher 2 x In, for sinusoidal input signals
Burden lower 0.3 VA at In = 1 A and 5 A
Type test isolation voltage Connection - Ground: 2.2 kV (50 Hz), 5 kV peak (1.2/50 μs)

DGB-004-1.04
Supplied and enclosed angle ring cable lugs up to 2.5mm² wire cross section with hole inside diameter
4.3mm. (also fork cable lugs possible)
Recommendation for M4 screws: Using a magnetic cross recessed screwdriver with cross recess type
PZ02
IP Code IP20
Wire cross section 1.5 .. 6 mm² stranded, standard 2.5 mm² - M4 cable lugs will be supplied to the module
Wire cross section AWG/kcmil min. 15 .. max. 9 stranded, standard AWG13 - M4 cable lugs will be supplied to the module
In HIPASE engineering tool, the CT inputs CT-01 .. 12 can be grouped to individually selected multiphase system
groups (eg CT-123). The above mentioned technical data and module parameters are vaild for each of these
groups.

Name Data type
Primary rated value of current

transformer.
Transformer primary
CT-01 .. CT-12 Float32 1 .. 100000 A 3000 A the scale factor only.
value
always be greater than or equal to the
set nominal value!
Secondary rated value of current

transformer.
When using intermediate- current
transformers the secondary nominal
Transformer
CT-01 .. CT-12 Float32 1 .. 5 A 1A value must be entered in accordance
secondary value
with the overall transmission ratio of
the transformer chain.
the scale factor only.
Rated current of measured plant part.
Rated value CT-01 .. CT-12 Float32 1 .. 100000 A 3000 A The rated value must always be
smaller than or equal to the set
primary rated value!
Which terminals of the current input is

1 A range connected:
Terminal connection CT-01 .. CT-12 Single choice 1A
5 A range 1 A range: between terminal A and C
5 A range: between terminal B and C

DGB-004-1.04

Name Data type
Only visible for protection

applications.
Synchronisation Here happens the assignment of the
CT-01 .. CT-12 - No, 1 .. 5 No
group current input to the defined
determination.
For further (application relevant) parameter of this board please refer to:
Settings for application excitation,
Settings for application protection
29.5. DERIVED VARIABLES
FFT based
Accuracy phase angle for +/- 2° electrical absolute

direction 1° relative

voltage measuring
Accuracy Frequenz derived from

10 mHz for I > 0.25 pU
current measuring
Proper time frequency (achieved

4 periodes at ramp 0.1 Hz / s
accuracy)
Impedance (quadratic
+/- 5 % at setting value impedance relative 0.01 Ohms
characteristic)
General
Active power +/- 1 % for 0.8 < cos phi <= 1
Reactive power +/- 1 % for -0.2 < cos phi <= 0.2
Apparent power +/- 1 %
Space vector based
Accuracy phase angle +/- 0.3° electrical

voltage measuring

DGB-004-1.04
29.6. CONNECTION DIAGRAM TR-310
Block diagram with marked red coding pins on the socket as polarity protection* / Physical view of the module cover plate from
the perspective of the device back side

DGB-004-1.04
*) Caution: A factory assembly with mechanical terminal coding was only realized from product state 11 up to
product state 40 of the CGB-023--.
29.7. TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OF CT SCREW TERMINAL STRIP (X1)
Terminal
Data point Function
designation

DGB-004-1.04
Terminal
Data point Function
designation
29.8. TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OF VT TERMINAL STRIP (X2)
Terminal
Data point Function
designation

DGB-004-1.04
Terminal
Data point Function
designation

Caution: A factory assembly with mechanical terminal coding was only realized from product state 11 up to product
state 40 of the CGB-023--.

DGB-004-1.04
Nomination Material number Detail

screws (for voltage transformer inputs),
Nominal current: 12 A, Number of contacts: Phoenix Contact FRONT-MSTB 2,5/16-STF-
EI959506--
16, pitch: 5.08 mm, Connection method: 5,08 BU - 1704588
screw terminals, Color: blue (fully equipped at
delivery)
90° angled ring crimp cable lug Cu M4 (hole

Angled Ring cable lug M4 for CT terminals
inside diameter 4.3 mm) up to 2.5 mm² wire
with non-halogenic insulation YK133824-- diameter.
(24 pcs. included at delivery)
(Cembre BP-L4)
24 x
Angled Ring cable lug M4 for CT terminals 90° angled ring crimp cable lug Cu M4 (hole
with non-halogenic insulation ASAP Nr. 300852300 inside diameter 4.3 mm) up to 2.5 mm² wire
(Set of 24 pcs.) diameter.
(Cembre BP-L4)
29.11. VALIDITY
Document valid for hardware: Mat. No. BGB-103--

DGB-004-1.04
30. DEFINITIONS OF TERMS FOR CURRENT AND VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
30.1. VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
30.1.1. RATED VOLTAGE U N
The rated voltages are always stated on the type plate of the voltage transformer as nominal voltages for the
primary side and the secondary side.
If the voltage transformers are connected in three-phase networks between the conductor and earth, then this star
or phase voltage corresponds to the rated voltage and is marked with the value for U / √3. In this specification, U
always corresponds to the voltage between the phase conductors.
If the voltage transformers in three-phase systems are connected between the conductor and the conductor, this
linked voltage corresponds to the rated voltage and is marked with the value for U.
This marking applies to both the primary and the secondary side of the voltage transformer.
30.1.2. RATED RATIO, TRANSFORMATION RATIO, MARKING IN THE SINGLE-LINE DIAGRAM
The ratio between primary voltage and secondary voltage is always given as an uncut fraction.
For example
10 kV / √3 // 100 V / √3 ... The voltage converter is switched to star both on the primary side and on the secondary
side
15 kV // 100 V ... The voltage transformer is switched to delta on both the primary and the secondary side
30.1.3. ERROR ANGLE
The error angle represents the angular difference between the voltage phasor for the primary and the secondary
winding of the voltage converter. The error angle is written positive when the secondary voltage pointer leads the
primary voltage phasor. The error angle is usually given in degrees-minutes.

DGB-004-1.04
30.2. CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
30.2.1. RATED CURRENT I N, MARKING IN THE SINGLE-LINE DIAGRAM
The rated current for the primary and for the secondary side of the current transformer is the current for which the
current transformer was dimensioned and with which it may therefore be permanently loaded and which was
entered in the nameplate of the current transformer.
The primary value always depends on the application and is generally a decimal multiple of 10, 12.5, 15, 20, 25,
30, 40, 50, 60 and 75 A.
The secondary value is usually either 1 A or 5 A.
30.2.2. ERROR ANGLE
The error angle represents the angular difference between the current phasor for the primary and secondary
windings of the current transformer. The error angle is written positive when the secondary current phasor leads
the primary current phasor. The error angle is usually given in degrees-minutes.
30.2.3. ACCURACY CLASS
Deviation in percent of the secondary current at rated current IN.

DGB-004-1.04
31. POLARITY OF CURRENT AND VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
When the signals of current transformers or voltage transformers are combined with the signals of other current or
voltage transformer, the "polarity" of these transformers must be considered.
Current or voltage transformer transmit AC currents or AC voltages - electric variables, which are changing their
directions constantly. The direction of the output signal is always determined constructive to the direction of the
input signal. Using the polarity indication it can be seen which polarity of the instantaneous value of the output
signal based must have in relation to the polarity of the instantaneous value of the input signal.
Based on of the indices of primary and secondary winding, the polarity of the transformer terminals can be seen. If
the instantaneous value of the primary current „flows into“ H1 the secondary current will "flow out" on X1.
As a memory aid following illistration shall help:
Explanation of polarity
The transmission of the signal is carried out as on a line, which was interrupted by the primary and secondary
windings. The terminal names in this illustration correspond to the use in the English-speaking world.
31.1. POSSIBLE POLARITY INFORMATION ON TRANSFORMERS

Same indices
 H1/H2 and X1/X2
If the instantaneous value from H1 to H2 has positive polarity, X1 to X2 has positive polarity.
Equal letters, but different in upper and lower case
 Current transformer K/L and k/l

If the instantaneous value from K to L has positive polarity, k to l has positive polarity.
 Voltage transformers U1 / V1 for the primary terminals and u1 / v2 for the secondary terminals
31.2. POSSIBLE POLARITY INFORMATION IN CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS

Each a point at primary and secondary winding of current transformers, displays a reference winding end.
Analogously, a current will flow out from the secondary winding end with the selected point when a current flows in
at the primary winding end with the selected point.
Arrows for the current direction of the instantaneous value; the terminal designations are still undetermined.
Examples

DGB-004-1.04
 Schema of single-phase current transformer in the English-speaking world.
Single-phase current transformer
 Schema of three-phase current transformer circuit in the English-speaking world.

The indices indicate the requirement for correct polarity. Current direction arrows explain the associated
polarity.
Three-phase current transformer

 Current scheme of single-phase current transformer in German speaking countries.
With the currently usual designation P1 / P2 for the terminals of the primary winding and s1 / s2 for the
terminals of the secondary winding. The current direction arrows explain the associated polarity.
 Elder scheme of single-phase current transformer in German speaking countries.

With the formerly usual designations K / L and k / l. The current direction arrows explain the associated
polarity.
 The polarity of the current transformer

It also can be displayed without specifying the terminal designations but with a point at the primary and at
the secondary winding.
Polarity of the current transformer

In principle, the polarity of current transformers is also correct when both sides (the connections on the primary and
on the secondary winding), are rotated.

DGB-004-1.04
32. CURVE RECORDING
Up to version 1.30.00
To record curves, the "Curve records" function is available in the "Configuration" tab, in the "Display" ribbon group.
Signal curves of data points are recorded using the function "Recording Curve". A recording is triggered by a
fulfilled trigger criterion and detects a defined period of time before and after the trigger point. At memory overflow
the oldest recorded curves (with entry in system log) or event entries are deleted.
From version 1.30.00
The curve records are offered under the tab "System". See system description DGB-001.
Features of Curve Recording:
 Permanent storage of recorded curves in HIPASE device and in the engineering tool
 All signal curves of hardware data points can be detected
 Data points from any function block diagrams - even in different tasks - can be combined with hardware data
points
 All defined signal curves are brought to a common time base
 The fulfillment of a recording condition (trigger) starts the Curve Recording
 Export files are automatically created in CSV format
 Each curve recording is time-stamped
 Possibility of analysis of the curves by means of rulers

DGB-004-1.04
32.1. TERM DEFINITIONS
Term Description
Trigger With any data point of type Bool linked triggering criterion. TRUE triggers the recording.
Trigger long text Freely definable text as an explanation for the user
Time span in seconds before the trigger point for which the signal curve of the selected data points are recorded and
Lead time
displayed
Time span in seconds after the trigger point for which the signal curve of the selected data points are recorded and
Follow-up time
displayed
32.2. HIPASE DEVICE INTERFACES

The sampling rate of the hardware interface of the device HIPASE is unchangeable.
Hardware Interface ↓ Board / Module Data point Sampling Rate
CT Input TR-310 CT-01 .. CT-12 4000 Samples / Sec.
VT Input TR-310 VT-01 .. VT-08 4000 Samples / Sec
Digital Input DX-010 DI-01 .. DI-08 1000 Samples / Sec
DX-010 DO-01 .. DO-08

Digital Output 1000 Samples / Sec
PS-300, PS-500 FSO-01 .. FSO-04
32.3. FUNCTION BLOCK DIAGRAM ELEMENTS

The sampling rate of curve recording is derived from the cycle time of the function block diagram, where the FBD
element is described.
Element from function block diagram (FBD element) Sampling rate
FBD Input FBD cycle time
FBD Output FBD cycle time
Local variable FBD cycle time
Global variable FBD cycle time
POU Output FBD cycle time
Parameter FBD cycle time
Station bus Input FBD cycle time
Station bus Output FBD cycle time

DGB-004-1.04
Element from function block diagram (FBD element) Sampling rate
Virtual data point of trip matrix FBD cycle time of fastest source FBD
32.4. AUTOMATIC BACKUP OF THE CURVE RECORDING IN THE VOLTAGE-FAIL-

SAFE MEMORY
A curve recording will be permanently saved to the HIPASE device within one minute of its completion.
It must therefore be ensured on the plant side that the power supply of the HIPASE device is not interrupted within
this one minute after the end of the curve recording (trigger condition + follow-up time).

For recording of curves and event entries a common memory is available.
Element Value
Event messages (debug messages, error messages, configured event

20000 entries max.
messages)
Recommended max. number of digital tracks each curve recording 128
Recommended max. number of analog tracks each curve recording 64
Duration range of one recorded curve 64 ms .. 3600 s
Maximum lead time 600 s
Maximum follow-up time 3600 s
Max. possible parallel recordings 10
30 records of 16 analog and 16 digital tracks at 1 ms sample rate,

duration: 60 s each.
Number of curve recordings
The number of records depends on the sampling rate, the number of
tracks selected and the duration of the records.
Interval of the fuse in the voltage-failure-proof memory < 10 min.

DGB-004-1.04
33. COMMUNICATION - OVERVIEW
Communication is the ability to transfer information objects of HIPASE devices
 to one another
 from and to communication-capable third-party devices
 from and to 250 SCALA control system
 from and to control systems of other manufacturers, if they are sufficient corresponding communication
capabe
Application Information objects
Protective alarms, protectioe trips, warnings, measuring values,

Protection
recorded curves.
Excitation Warnings, measuring values, commands, setpoints
33.1. CURRENTLY SUPPORTED STATION BUS INTERFACES
IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 60870-5-104 IEC 60870-5-104 MODBUS/TCP MODBUS/TCP

electric / fiber optic Ed 2.0 electric Ed 2.0 fiber optic electric fiber optic
X1 (electr. RS-485)
Interface on CP-300 X7 X8 X7 X8
X2 (FO ST –LWL)
DE-9 Female (el.) /

Connection type Ethernet SFP Ethernet SFP
ST / BFOC (FO)
Max. data rate 100 Mbit 100 Mbit
Max. number of
transmittable
>300 >300
telegrams each
second
Max. transmission 100 m (el.) /

180 m 2000 m 180 m 2000 m
length 2000 m (FO)
Operation mode Secondary station Controlled Station Server
transmission of

recorded curves
Methode of Queried cyclically

Transmitted spontanousely Queried cyclically
transmission
Time synchronisation Yes NTP NTP
Number of remote 1
8 8
stations
Time stamp, Q bit 

DGB-004-1.04
IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 60870-5-104 IEC 60870-5-104 MODBUS/TCP MODBUS/TCP

electric / fiber optic Ed 2.0 electric Ed 2.0 fiber optic electric fiber optic
Buffered Data

transmission
El. Protection El. Protection, El. Protection, El. Protection, El. Protection,
Special fields of excitation, excitation, excitation, excitation,
application automation, remote automation, remote automation, remote automation, remote
control control control control
33.2. SUPPORTED PROTOCOLS

A HIPASE device is currently able to to communicate with the following „station bus“ protocols:
 IEC 60870-5-103
 IEC 60870-5-104 Edition 2.0 primarily in monitoring direction (Monitor Direction), network protocol TCP / IP
 MODBUS/TCP as a server, network protocol TCP / IP
 IEC 61850 Edition 2.0 as a server, network protocol TCP / IP
The applications support the protocols as follows:
Application IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 60870-5-104 Ed. 2.0 MODBUS/TCP IEC 61850 Ed. 2.0
El. Protection    
Excitation  
The interfaces for the station bus protocols support electrical and optical media as follows:
Station bus protocol Electric (X7) Fiber optic (X8)
IEC 60870-5-104 Ed. 2.0 Ethernet TCP/IP (RJ45) Fiber optic via SFP-Module (equippable)
MODBUS TCP Ethernet TCP/IP (RJ45) Fiber optic via SFP-Module (equippable)
IEC 61850 Ed. 2.0 Ethernet TCP/IP (RJ45) Fiber optic via SFP-Module (equippable)

DGB-004-1.04
34. STATION BUS PROTOCOL ̶ IEC 60870-5-103
34.1. GENERAL
The standard IEC 60870-5-103 (hereafter referred to as IEC103) comes from the recommendations for structure,
functionality and properties of station control systems of VDEW working committee and from the reg. association of
the German electrical and electronic manufacturers (ZVEI).
The standard IEC103 essentially deals with the serial interface for protection signal transmission and for telecontrol
systems. In the process an IEC103 master (remote station) is always connected to a maximum of 254 IEC103
slaves (eg HIPASE protection devices) either via serial star couplers or via RS-485 interfaces.
Digital signals from protection applications are only transmitted via RS-232-based interfaces from the IEC103 slave
to the IEC103 master.
The IEC103 interface is configured completely by defining the required telegrams in the HIPASE engineering tool
under Configuration / Communication / IEC 60870-5-103. Usually you define the basic settings first and then assign
the protection outputs by dragging them into the send direction window.
A connection from one HIPASE device to another HIPASE device via IEC103 connection is generally not possible.
34.2. REQUIREMENTS FOR USE
 Version-compatible and activated software license in the HIPASE device (material number SGB-050--)
 Error-free parameterized IEC103 interface in the HIPASE device
 Error-free parameterized IEC103 interface of the Remote site (master)
 FO or RS-485 connection between HIPASE-device and central station
 Protocol must have been activated under "Settings"
 Correct line idle position at the remote station: light OFF / ON
Remark
The use of the station bus protocol - IEC 60870-5-103 requires CP-300 modules as of CGB-004-B.01.

DGB-004-1.04
34.3. DATA POINTS IEC103

The state of these data points can only be displayed in a table or in an image. These data points are visible in the
project explorer of the HIPASE engineering tool and can not be assigned as FBD inputs.
Name Data type Default value Description
Message "Connection error" to the remote station. Since IEC103

DpAnyConnectionFault bool false allows only one remote station, this message is identical to the
system data point „DpAllConnectionFailure“.
Message "Connection error" to the remote station. Since IEC103

DpAllConnectionFailure bool false allows only one remote station, this message is identical to the
system data point „DpAnyConnectionFault“.
abhängig von
Parameter
DpDiagMode bool Prepared for future application
"Diagnosemodus
aktivieren"
abhängig von
Parameter
DpDiagMonitor bool Prepared for future application
"Diagnosemonitor
aktivieren"
34.4. SETTINGS IEC 60870-5-103

The following parameters are available in the "Configuration" ribbon, "Communication" ribbon group under "IEC
60870-5-103".
Default
Parameter Valid value area Description
value
With this checkbox the IEC103 interface can be activated or

deactivated as desired. Other IEC103 parameterizations are not
selected / Not Not
Activate affected. This checkbox is part of the configuration and therefore the
selected selected
project must be transferred to the device with "Load entire application
and restart" for this setting to take effect.
IEC103 HIPASE device address and common address of the data. In

the HIPASE system, these addresses cannot be set separately. With
CASDU, Link address 0 .. 254 254
this address information, the remote station can address the HIPASE
device.
The system functions RESET FCB and RESET KE are confirmed with
identification messages in monitoring direction. The main function
Main function type 0 .. 250 0 type is entered in the identification message.
Changing this parameter is only necessary if it is required for the
remote station.
Selection of possible connection types between remote station and

FO optic HIPASE device. There can be communicated only via one of the two
Interface FO optic
RS-485 galvanic options with the remote station.
FO - optic:

DGB-004-1.04
Default
Parameter Valid value area Description
value
Establishment of the connection via module CP-300 / X2-X3

(CP-300/X2 needs to be connected with Tx of the remote station and
CP-300/X3 needs to be connected with Rx of the remote station)
If several HIPASE devices are connected to a remote station via fiber-
optic cable, a star coupler must be provided for this purpose.
RS-485 galvanic:
Establishment of the connection via module CP-300 / X1
Pin assignment (Pin 2: RX+, Pin 3: RX-, Pin 4: TX-, Pin 5: TX+)
If several HIPASE devices are connected to a remote station via RS-
485, the lines RX+ and TX+ and Rx- and Tx- of all HIPASE devices
can be connected and routed to the remote station.
The standard RS-485 provides for the parallel operation of several
stations in half-duplex mode with a pair of wires.
Transmission rate applies to both types of interfaces.

9600 Baud 9600
Baud rate The data transmission takes place with 1 start bit, 8 data bits, even
19200 Baud Baud
parity, 1 stop bit.
Check box ON /
Line idle position (light ON) OFF Prepared for future application.
OFF
Check box ON /
Activate Diagnose modus OFF Prepared for future application.
OFF
Check box ON /
Activate Diagnose monitor OFF Prepared for future application.
OFF
After the device has booted, the HIPASE device attempts to establish
the parameterized connections. If this is not successful within the set
Delay Error signaling after protocol
0 .. 180 s 60 s time, these are reported as failed via the Boolean data point
start (s)
DpStationConnectionFault of the remote station. This value should be
greater than that of the parameter TimeoutT3.
If a connection with the remote station could be established, a request

from the remote station is expected within this monitoring time. If no
Delay error signaling after request is made within the set time, an error message is sent via the
30 .. 1800 s 60 s
connection establishment (s) system data points "DpAnyConnectionFault" and
"DpAllConnectionFailure" and, depending on "Connection signaling",
an entry in the event list is done.
Signaling the connection status:

None:
None, no messages when changing the status of a connection to the station
Diagnose, (no logging of connection failures, eg for notebook as a station)
Connection signaling None
Fault, Diagnose, Fault:
Fail Prepared for future application.
Fail:
Prepared for future application.
If no entry is made in this field, the word "HIPASE" is automatically

assigned as identification.
empty
Identification Max. 8 characters This input is used to identify the device via the station bus protocol.
field
Only ASCII characters in the range "space to ~ " may be used.
Special characters are excluded.

DGB-004-1.04
34.5. SETTINGS TRANSMISSION DIRECTION (MONITORING DIRECTION)

In this field, the telegram transmissions for the send direction are defined and parameterized.
The spontaneousization of a data point value for the station bus transmission always takes place at the end of the
task cycle of the FBD in which the data point is formed.
The IEC103 protocol indicates a source-oriented parameterization. That means: the specifications of the data
source are valid. Accordingly, the parameterization of the transmission direction of the remote station needs to be
announced.
For a successful data transfer, the specifications for function type and information number between IEC103 slave
and IEC103 master must be agreed together. The HIPASE Engineering Tool does not create any standard
specifications when creating a telegram.
Valid value
Parameter Default value Description
area
Name - - Name of the linked data point
Long text - - Description of the linked data point
Can be arbitrarily assigned.
Function type 0 .. 250 0 The function type and the information number must not both be set to
the value "0" at the same time. By default, setting "0" for both values
means disabling the transmission of this data point.
Can be arbitrarily assigned.
Information number 0 .. 255 0 The function type and the information number must not both be set to
the value "0" at the same time. By default, setting "0" for both values
means disabling the transmission of this data point.
This specification is only relevant for the transmission of analog values.

Unit - (none) Automatically assigned by the tool if a unit has been assigned to the
underlying data point in the function block diagram.
Allows the preparation of telegrams for later use. Setting this parameter
Aktive Yes / No No
enables the transmission of the underlying data point.

DGB-004-1.04
35. STATION BUS PROTOCOL – IEC 60870-5-104 ED.2.0
35.1. GENERAL
The IEC 60870-5-104 Edition 2.0 standard (hereafter referred to as IEC104) is an application-oriented standard
that defines a transmission protocol for telecontrol with coded data transmission for monitoring and controlling
geographically dispersed processes of compatible telecontrol equipment. This protocol uses the transport functions
of TCP / IP and is available for all HIPASE device variants.
The IEC104 interface is configured completely by defining the remote stations and defining the required telegrams
in the HIPASE engineering tool under Configuration / Communication / IEC 60870-5-104. Usually you first define
the possible remote stations and then assign the FBD inputs by dragging them into the receive direction window
and dragging the FBD outputs to be routed into the transmit direction window.
Since the HIPASE device can only function as a substation, a central data transfer station must be interposed in
order to connect to another substation or to another HIPASE device, to exchange analog or digital signals.
 Error-free parameterized IEC104 interface in the HIPASE device
 Error-free parameterised IEC104 interface of the central station
 Ethernet connection between HIPASE device and central station in the same IPv4 address space
 Active time synchronization via NTP
 Less than 500 IEC60870-5-104 data packets in 5 seconds to FBD inputs or from FBD outputs.
This data rate is exceeded if a FBD input is correspondingly often described via IEC60870-5-104 or a FBD
output changes frequently. Likewise, a threshold value setting for the transmission of analog values may
mean that they have to be transmitted continuously, so that this station bus interface is switched off in 5
seconds because the limit of 500 data packets has been exceeded.
35.3. ADDRESSING SCHEME

For the identification of the HIPASE data points, the octets CASDU1 and CASDU2 as well as the three IOA octets
are available in IEC104.
Each data point allocated to IEC104 is uniquely identified by CASDU + IOA within a IEC104 network. Multiple
allocation of CASDU + IOA octet combinations is not permitted by the standard.

DGB-004-1.04
35.4. CHARACTERISTICS
 Transport medium: Ethernet up to 100 Mbit / s

 8 remote stations possible
 Time synchronization via NTP
 Backwards compatible with previous version IEC 60870-5-104
 Data point events in the HIPASE device are transmitted with a resolution of 1 ms.
 Transfer rate: 10 messages and 20 measuring values per second
35.5. TRANSFERABLE HIPASE DATA TYPES
In transmitting and receiving direction:

 Bool
 Float
35.6. ROUTABLE FUNCTION BLOCK DIAGRAM ELEMENT
 FBD input (receiving direction)

 FBD output (transmitting direction)

DGB-004-1.04
35.7. IEC104 INTEROPERABILY LIST

The standards-compliant interoperability list for passing on is located in the ISI-WEB under Mat no. DGB-006-1
„Interoperatibility IEC104 HIPASE (e)“.
Transmitting direction (from HIPASE to central station)
Telegram name according to Type identification in telegram Telegram code according to

Explanation
standard (decimal) standard
Single message without

Single-point information 1 M_SP_NA_1 timestamp (only sent with general
inquiry)
32-bit floating-point measured

Measured value, short floating
13 M_ME_NC_1 value without timestamp (only
point value
sent with general inquiry)
Single-point information with time

30 M_SP_TB_1 Single message with timestamp
tag
Measured value, short floating 32-bit floating-point measured

36 M_ME_TF_1
point value with time tag value with timestamp
Receiving direction (from central station to HIPASE)
Telegram name according to Type identification in telegram Telegram code according to

Explanation
standard (decimal) standard
Single message without

Single command 45 C_SC_NA_1
timestamp
32-bit floating point setpoint

Set point command, short floating
50 C_SE_NC_1 control command without
point value
timestamp
Single command with time stamp

Single command with time tag 58 C_SC_TA_1 (validity 5 seconds, NTP
required)
32-bit floating-point setpoint

Set point command, short floating control command with timestamp
63 C_SE_TC_1
point value with time tag (validity 5 seconds, NTP
required)

DGB-004-1.04
35.8. DEFINITION OF TERMS
Term Definition
NTP Network Time Protocol - a possible time source in the HIPASE system
Interoperability list Overview of the telegrams supported by the HIPASE system
IOA Information Object Address. Identification of a HIPASE data point in IEC104 format
CASDU Common Application Service Data Unit. Identification of a station or function block in IEC104 format.
HW Layer Layer 1 in OSI layer model
Part of the HIPASE system with clearly defined and delimited functionality. This can optionally be activated
Function block
or selected.
APDU Application Protocol Data Unit. General term for an IEC104 telegram.
Controlling station, Connector, e.g. SCADA system that controls the HIPASE device. Initiates
Central station
communication with substations. HIPASE 1 can only be used as a substation.
Controlled station, Listener, receives queries and commands and answers or executes them. A substation
Substation
can not initiate communication on its own.
104 network Independent network of central stations and substations. Is defined by the plant topology.
Frame Format of a IEC104 telegram
Octet 8-bit memory location (1 byte)
Connection disruption No connection to a remote station over a defined period
Connection fault Cause of disconnecting the connection to a remote site
Trace Log Recording of internal messages for future use
Event Log Save recording of messages that can be read out with the tool.

DGB-004-1.04
35.9. NTP CONFIGURATION (TIME SYNCHRONIZATION)

To use telegrams with a time stamp, the time synchronization of the HIPASE device and the central station by an
NTP server is required (for configuration in the HIPASE device, see Tool / HW Parameterization). Telegrams with a
time stamp are only accepted by the HIPASE device if the difference between the reception time on the HIPASE
device and the transmission time on the central station is less than 5 seconds. Otherwise, the telegrams are
rejected with a time stamp.
Necessary steps for a working NTP synchronization
 Active NTP server, which can be reached by the HIPASE device via Ethernet and in the same IPv4
address space
 Entry of the NTP server address in HW parameterization in the HIPASE Engineering Tool
Hints
 A successful NTP time synchronization is displayed in the HW parameterization in the HIPASE

Engineering Tool.
 The absence of an NTP time synchronization of the HIPASE device can be detected in the central station
based on the set IV bit in the timestamps of the telegrams received by HIPASE.
 The NTP server of a SCALA250 central station can be used as a temporary aid for HIPASE. Make sure
that the NTP service is not blocked by the firewall of the SCALA250 server.
 Successful NTP time synchronization disables manual timing until a new project is loaded without a
configured NTP server, or 64 seconds can not be synchronized with the NTP server.
 If a newly parameterized NTP server can not be reached according to its IP address, the IP address of the
device, the subnet mask of the device and, depending on the configuration of a gateway, the NTP service
in the HIPASE device is stopped. Thus, the HIPASE device no longer has a synchronized time.

DGB-004-1.04
35.10. DATA POINTS IEC104

Project Explorer of the HIPASE engineering tool and cannot be assigned as FBD inputs.
Default
Name Data type Description
value
DpAnyConnectionFault bool false Total message "Connection fault" with one or more remote stations.
DpAllConnectionFailure bool false Total message "Connection fault" with all remote stations.
dependent
on
parameter Data point adopts the value of the parameter "Activate diagnostic
DpDiagMode bool
"Activate mode" as initialization value. For future application.
diagnostic
mode"
dependent
on
Data point adopts the value of the parameter "Activate diagnostics
parameter
DpDiagMonitor bool monitor" as initialization value. Can only be activated if diagnostic mode
"Activate
is active. For future application.
diagnostic
monitor"

DGB-004-1.04
35.11. DATAPOINTS IEC104 STATIONS

For each defined remote station, these data points exist in the Project Explorer of the HIPASE engineering tool.
The state of these data points can only be displayed in a table or in an image. These data points cannot be
allocated as FBD inputs.
Default
value
"Connection error": This is true as long as the connection to the remote

station is interrupted. If the remote site succeeds in connecting to the
DpStationConnectionFault bool false HIPASE device, this data point goes false. See parameter
StartFaultTimeout during startup or FaultTimeout of the central station
during operation.
DpStationConnectionState bool false Current, instantaneous connection status to the remote site
35.12. SETTINGS IEC 60870-5-104

The following parameters are offered in the "Configuration" ribbon, "Communication" ribbon group under "IEC
60870-5-104".
Further access is available for protection applications in the "Protection" ribbon, "Communication" ribbon group
under "IEC 60870-5-104".
Default
Parameter Valid value range Description
value
With this checkbox the IEC104 interface can be activated or deactivated

as desired. Other IEC104 parameterizations are not affected. This
Selected / not
Activate Not selected checkbox is part of the configuration and therefore the project must be
selected
transferred to the device with "Load entire application and restart" for
this setting to take effect.
Octet 1 of the address of the HIPASE device. CASDU1 and CASDU2

CASDU1 0 .. 255 -
must not be set to 0 or 255 at the same time.
Octet 2 of the address of the HIPASE device. CASDU1 and CASDU2

CASDU2 0 .. 255 -
Check box ON /
Activate diagnose mode OFF Initialization value for the data point DpDiagMode. For future application.
OFF
Check box ON / Initialization value for the data point DpDiagMonitor. For future
Activate diagnose monitor OFF
OFF application.
After startup or project loading of the device, the HIPASE device waits
for the establishment of the connections through the parameterized
stations. If a station does not connect to the HIPASE device within the
Delay error signaling after set time, the station will report a link failure via the
0 .. 180 s 30 s DpStationConnectionFault Boolean data point.
protocol start (s)
Therefore, the value "Delay Error Signaling after Protocol Start" should
not be less than 30 seconds. This is the default value for parameter t0
(connection timeout) according to IEC 60870-5-104 Edition 2.0.

DGB-004-1.04
35.13. SETTINGS STATION DEFINITION

These settings must be present for each project with an IEC104 connection. A maximum of 8 remote stations are
possible at the same time.
Valid value
range
Name of the central station. Can be freely assigned, appears in the

Name - 104 Station # Project Explorer under IEC 60870-5-104 and in the parameterization of
the IEC104 telegrams under "Stations".
Description of the central station. Optional description text without

Long text - -
further function.
IPv4 address of the central station. A station parameterized with the

IP Address - 0.0.0.0 default value is deactivated when the HIPASE device starts up with the
output of an internal warning message.

DGB-004-1.04
Extended settings of a remote station (central station) to the HIPASE device
An adaptation of the following default values is usually only necessary for networks with very long response times
(for example, in the case of technically problematic transmission paths or very complex topologies) and must be
evaluated on site.
Valid range of
values
Signaling the connection status:

None
no messages when changing the status of a connection to the station
(no logging of connection failures, eg for notebook as a station)
Diagnosis
For future application.
Fault
None,
Diagnosis, • For future application.
Connection signaling None
Fault,
• A "connection fault" at this station has an effect on the data points
Fail
DpAnyConnectionFault and DpAllConnectionFailure.
Fail
• For future application.
• A "connection fault" at this station has an effect on the data points
DpAnyConnectionFault and DpAllConnectionFailure.
• These status messages "Connection faults" S_ConnectionFault and
S_ConnectionOK are displayed in the tool and on the touch panel in
the event list.
If no acknowledgment of the remote station for a telegram sent by the

HIPASE device was received within the TimeoutT1 time, the
connection is reported as failed and the data point
Timeout T1 (s) 1 .. 255 s 15 s DpStationConnectionState is set to "false". The remote station and
HIPASE device should be parameterized to the same value. Required
relations of the timeout parameter values: Timeout T3> Timeout T1>
Timeout T2
After receiving each payload data telegram, it waits until the timeout
T2 for further payload data telegrams according to the value of the
parameter APDU-W for the sending of an acknowledgment. The expiry
of Timeou tT2 triggers the immediate sending of an acknowledgment
Timeout T2 (s) 1 .. 255 s 10 s for the unacknowledged user data telegrams already received from the
HIPASE device to the remote station. The remote station and HIPASE
device should be parameterized to the same value. Required relations
of the timeout parameter values: Timeout T3> Timeout T1> Timeout
T2
If no telegrams have been sent or received after the timeout T3 has

elapsed, the HIPASE device sends a test telegram to check the
connection. This test telegram must be acknowledged by the remote
Timeout T3 (s) 1 s .. 48 h 20 s
station within timeout T1. The remote station and HIPASE device
should be parameterized to the same value. Required relations of the
timeout parameter values: Timeout T3> Timeout T1> Timeout T2
Number of telegrams whose acknowledgment may be issued by the

remote station. That By default, telegram 13 is transmitted only when
APDU-K 1 .. 32767 12 HIPASE has received an acknowledgment for telegram 1. APDU-W
should be 66% of APDU-K. The remote station and HIPASE device
should be parameterized to the same value.

DGB-004-1.04
Valid range of
values
Number of telegrams received by the HIPASE device, after which the

HIPASE device must send an acknowledgment to the remote station
APDU-W 1 .. 32767 8 for these telegrams. APDU-W should be 66% of APDU-K. The remote
station and HIPASE device should be parameterized to the same
value.
Time delay between the detection of a connection failure and the

reporting of a "connection failure" via the data point
Fault Timeout (s) 0 .. 1800 s 0s
DpStationConnectionFault. If the connection is restored within the
FaultTimeout, no failure message occurs.
Serves to detect a failed switch more quickly at the TCP level. With a
value of Keep-alive-idle time + Keep-alive timeout * Keep-alive retries
Checkbox
Keep-alive Off <value of Timeout T3, a failure of a network component and thus
On / Off
failure of the connection can be detected faster than with IEC104. See
RFC1122 chapter 4.2.3.6
Delay (in seconds) until after the last TCP telegram (received or sent)
Keep-alive-idle time (s) 0 .. 1800 s 15 s the first TCP keep-alive telegram is sent. By default disabled by value
= 0. Keep-alive timeout and keep-alive retries are ignored in this case.
Interval (in seconds) in which after expiration of the keep-alive-idle

Keep-alive timeout (s) 0 .. 300 s 75 s
time the further TCP keep-alive telegrams are sent.
Number of telegrams that can be left unanswered until the connection

Keep-alive retries 1 .. 127 9
has failed.
35.14. SETTINGS TRANSMITTING DIRECTION (MONITORING DIRECTION)

task cycle of the FBD in which the data point is formed.
If, due to the settings for threshold value, additive threshold value or interval, transmissions of a Float-type FBD
output are triggered at the same time, only one value transfer will be made.
The IEC104 protocol identifies source-oriented parameterization. That the specifications of the data source apply.
Accordingly, the parameterization of the transmission direction of the remote station must be announced.
Valid range of
values
Must be announced to the remote site.

CASDU1 0 .. 255 0 Octet 1 of the address of the linked data point. CASDU1 and CASDU2

CASDU2 0 .. 255 0
Octet 2 of the address of the linked data point. CASDU1 and CASDU2

DGB-004-1.04
Valid range of
values

IOA1 0 .. 255 0 Information object address, octet 1. IOA1, IOA2 and IOA3 must not be
set to 0 at the same time.


Type identification according to IEC 60870-5-104 describes the type of

telegram used. Is assigned automatically by the tool depending on the
TI - -
data type and serves as information for the configuration of the remote
station.
Selection of the stations to which this telegram is sent. If none of the

stations defined under "Station definition" are selected in this list, this
data point is sent to all created remote stations. In order to remove
Drop down list of previously deleted remote stations from this selection, the entire
Stations all
all valid stations selection must now be deleted with "Delete Content" and then the
remote stations selected again individually.
Multiple processing is possible for this field.
This setting determines an unconditional transfer threshold for a Float-

type FBD output that was previously shunted. As soon as the current
value of this FBD output deviates at least by the value "Threshold value"
from the last transmitted value, a new transmission takes place.
Formula: Threshold ≤ | (Value current) - (value last) |
The setting value for the "Threshold" parameter corresponds to the
desired display resolution and should be significantly greater than the
0 .. Float-Max
resolution of the FBD output to be transmitted, in order to keep the
Threshold 0: see 0 number of measured values to be transmitted low.
explanation Threshold = 0
 additive threshold> 0 OR interval> 0:
no transmission due to this threshold
 additive threshold = 0 AND interval = 0:
every change in value is transmitted.
ATTENTION: This setting combination may overload the
station bus!
As soon as the value time area of a Float type FAT output previously
assigned in the send direction exceeds the value for "Additive threshold
value" (in the following: AS), the value of the FBD output is transmitted.
The formation of the value time area begins with the transmission of the
last FBD output value. From this point in time, a new value is calculated
0 .. Float-Max for each new calculation of the FBD output from the current value and
Additive Threshold 0
(0: deactivated) the last transmitted value and this is summed with the difference values
since the last transmission. This means that the task cycle time in which
the FBD output is calculated must be included for the formation of this
parameter.
Purposes:

DGB-004-1.04
Valid range of
values
 To transmit small value changes, fewer telegrams are

required than when using the "Threshold" parameter. For this,
the value of the parameter AS must be a multiple of the value
of the parameter "Threshold".
 Prevention of transmission of superimposed interference
signals. Formula: Minimum value AS> Amplitude of the
interference signal * Period of the interference signal / task
cycle time
When the set interval has elapsed, the FBD output previously assigned
in the send direction is transmitted and the interval is restarted.
Interval [s] 0 .. 3600 s 5
Any transmission due to a threshold overrun restarts the interval.
The input value 0 deactivates this function.
Automatically assigned by the tool if a unit has been assigned to the

Unit - (none)
underlying data point in the function diagram.
Active Yes / No No

DGB-004-1.04
35.15. SETTING RECOMMENDATIONS ANALOG VALUE TRANSMISSION

(THRESHOLD VALUE TRANSMISSION)
In order to load the station bus as little as possible, the setting values for threshold value, additive threshold value
and interval should always be as large as possible. If the resulting transmission accuracy is insufficient, the setting
value must be refined in consultation with the remote stations according to the parameter description.
Finally, the station bus load resulting from the setting values must always be checked! If the settings result
in the transmission of more than 500 telegrams within 5 seconds, the HIPASE device automatically
deactivates the station bus interface.
Value transfer without additive threshold value specification
Default value for each

FBD output to be Explanation
transferred
With a threshold value of 3 set, for example, a new telegram is only issued when e.g. the transformer voltage has
changed from 100 to 103 V (or from 100 to 97 V) slower than the task cycle time.
Example 1: Task cycle time = 5 ms. Nominal secondary voltage = 100 V. Threshold value = 3. If, in the course of a
Threshold switch-off process, the voltage is linearly reduced to 0 within 500 ms, 33 telegrams are sent.
Example 2: Task cycle time = 5 ms. Nominal secondary voltage = 100 V. Threshold = 1 100 telegrams
Recommendation: 1 .. 3% of the nominal value

DGB-004-1.04
Default value for each

FBD output to be Explanation
transferred
A specification for 'Additive Threshold' requires a thorough understanding of the parameter description.
ATTENTION: Incorrect parameterization always causes an overload of the station bus interface up to the failure of
all connections!
Additive threshold Recommendation: 150% of the nominal value for values that are formed at a distance of 40 .. 60 ms.
Analogously: 300% of the nominal value for values that are formed at a distance of 20 .. 30 ms or
75% of the nominal value for values that are formed at a distance of 80 .. 120 ms, etc.
Interval A telegram is sent cyclically in the set interval if the value has changed only below the set threshold value.

DGB-004-1.04
Recommended setting for measured value transmission to displays for minimum station bus load
Electric variable to be Additive

Threshold Interval Explanation
transmitted threshold
Transformer voltage 0.03 × UN 0 30 s
Generator voltage 0.05 × UN 0 30 s
IN depending on the selected terminal connection on TR-310:

Transformer current 0.1 × IN 0 30 s
1 or 5

Generator current 0.1 × IN 0 30 s
1 or 5
Transformer frequency 0.1 Hz 0 5s Recommended threshold depending on voltage grid stability / topology
Generator frequency 0.2 Hz 0 5s
Transformer active,
0.1 × nominal
reactive and apparent 0 30 s
value
power
Generator active,
0.1 × nominal
value
power
Temperature 3 0 30 s
cos phi 0,02 0 30 s
0.2 × A recommendation on the threshold value for derived quantities is

Derived variables maximum 0 30 s basically hardly possible. For a higher display accuracy, a shortening
value of the interval is recommended.
0.1 × nominal
Setpoints 0 30 s
value

DGB-004-1.04
Recommended setting for measured value transmission to process-relevant devices for minimum station
bus load
The following table divides the intervals so that less frequently occurring transmissions are not time-shared with the
more common transmissions: 14 s / 5 s
Electric variable to be Additive

transmitted threshold

1 or 5

1 or 5
Transformer active,
0.1 × nominal
value
power
Generator active, 0.1 × nominal value in case these variables are not used for control
0.1 × nominal purposes.
value
power 0.02 × nominal value for control purposes
cos phi 0.02 0 30 s
0.2 × A recommendation on the threshold value for derived quantities is

Derived variables maximum 0 14 s basically hardly possible. For a higher process accuracy a shortening
0.01 ×
Setpoints nominal 0 14 s
value

DGB-004-1.04
35.16. SETTINGS RECEIVING DIRECTION (CONTROL DIRECTION)

In this field, the telegram transmissions for the receive direction are defined and parameterized.
A received data point value is always taken over during the next run of the FBD task in which the data point is
used.
A received command telegram always sets the associated data point (data type: Bool) to ON for one task cycle.
A received setpoint telegram sets the associated data point (data type: Float) to a value that can only be changed
by another setpoint telegram.
The IEC104 protocol identifies source-oriented parameterization. That the specifications of the data source apply.
Accordingly, the settings of the remote station must be known for a parameterization of the receive direction.
Valid range of
values
Is determined by the remote station and entered here.

CASDU1 of
CASDU1 0 .. 255 Octet 1 of the address of the linked data point. CASDU1 and CASDU2
remote station
Is determined by the remote station and entered here.

CASDU2 of
CASDU2 0 .. 255 Octet 2 of the address of the linked data point. CASDU1 and CASDU2
remote station
Is determined by the remote station and entered here. Information

IOA1 0 .. 255 0 object address, octet 1. IOA1, IOA2 and IOA3 must not be set to 0 at
the same time.

the same time.

the same time.
Type identification according to IEC 60870-5-104 describes the type of

telegram used. Is assigned automatically by the tool depending on the
TI - -
data type and serves as information for the configuration of the remote
station.
Drop Down list

Selection of the stations which can control this data point by means of a
Stations of all valid all
command telegram.
stations

Unit - (none)

DGB-004-1.04
Active Yes / No No
35.17. TRANSPORT MEDIA
max. distance
HW Layer Speed to remote Explanation
station
Ethernet galvanic (CAT-6

100 Mbit/s 80 m Within cabinet
cable)
Ethernet optic via

MultiMode- or SingleMode- 100 Mbit/s 2000 m Refer to data of SFP modules with Mat. Nos.CGB-025-- and CGB-026--
FO
35.18. TIME SYNCHRONIZATION
Interval of
Time source HW Layer Accuracy
synchronization
NTP Ethernet 64 s Network dependent. Within a LAN: about 1 ms
35.19. INCORRECT OR NO CONNECTION
If there is no connection or faulty connection to a remote station despite the configuration being carried out, the
following causes may exist:
 Not all required ports are open in the firewall of an affected managed switch for communication with a
HIPASE device. The following ports are required:
o Port 123 (UDP) for NTP / SNTP
o Port 2404 (TCP) for IEC 60870-5-104 communication
o Port 4445 (TCP) for communication between HIPASE device and HIPASE Engineering Tool /
remote touch panel
o Port 45454 (UDP) for broadcast to find HIPASE devices on the network
o Port 502 (TCP) for MODBUS (not yet available)
o Port 102 (TCP) for IEC 61850 communication unencrypted (not yet available)
o Port 3782 (TCP) encrypted for IEC 61850 communication (not yet available)

DGB-004-1.04
35.20. CAUSES FOR ERRORS

Error messages are a side effect of the fact that the IEC104 functionality is terminated (invalid parameterization).
Internal identification of the error Explanation
IEC 60870-5-104 Service cannot be started because redundancy mode is enabled with synchronous
E_CtrlBlkMonDirCCPU connections, but the data point configured to control the monitor direction lock is not an application
data point.
E_CtrlBlkMonDirInv connections, but the data point for controlling the monitor direction lock is not a valid configured
binary function plan output.
E_CtrlBlkMonDirNone
connections, but no data point is configured to control the monitor direction lock.
IEC 60870-5-104 Service cannot be started because the configured data point to control the revision
E_CtrlRevModeBlkMon
mode is the same as the control direction lock.
IEC 60870-5-104 Service cannot be started because the configured data point for controlling the
E_CtrlRevModeCCPU
revision mode is not a data point of the application.
IEC 60870-5-104 Service cannot be started because revision mode support is enabled, but the data
E_CtrlRevModeInv
point for the revision mode control is not a valid configured binary function plan output.
E_DataSetVerify IEC 60870-5-104 Service cannot start because validation of the records configuration files failed.
E_DataSetWrite IEC 60870-5-104 Service cannot be started because storage of configuration files has failed.
E_DpNoValidSet There is no (valid) data point allocated to an information object address.
IEC 60870-5-104 Service cannot be started because the IP{arg(IPv6)} address of the gateway is the
E_GatewayIpBroadcast
broadcast address '255.255.255.255'.
IEC 60870-5-104 Service cannot be started because the IP{arg(IPv6)} address of the gateway
E_GatewayIpInvAddr
'{arg(IpAddress)}' is not a valid address.
IEC 60870-5-104 Service cannot start because the IP{arg(IPv6)} '{arg(IpAddress)}' address of the
E_GatewayIpInvChar
gateway contains an invalid character.
IEC 60870-5-104 Service cannot be started because the IP{arg(IPv6)} address of the gateway is the
E_GatewayIpLocalHost
inadmissible address of the local host.
IEC 60870-5-104 Service cannot be started because the IP{arg(IPv6)} address '{arg (IpAddress)}' of
E_GatewayIpMulticast
the gateway is a multicast address.
E_GatewayIpNotSubnet
gateway is not on the subnet.
IEC 60870-5-104 Service cannot be started because the IP{arg (IPv6)} address '{arg(IpAddress)}' of
E_GatewayIpService
the gateway is the same as the address of the service.
IEC 60870-5-104 Service cannot be started because the IP{arg(IPv6)} address '{arg(IpAddress)}' of
E_GatewayIpSubnetBroadcast
the gateway is the same as the highest address of the subnet.

DGB-004-1.04
E_GatewayIpSubnetId
gateway is identically the lowest address of the subnet.
E_GatewayIpTooLong
gateway is too long.
E_GatewayIpUnknownError
gateway contains an undefined error.
E_InvalidDataFile The file with the data point list for the IEC 60870-5-104 service is invalid in the device.
E_InvalidParaFile The file with the parameters for the IEC 60870-5-104 service is invalid in the device.
E_InvDeviceAddr IEC 60870-5-104 Service cannot be started because of an invalid IP address of the device.
E_InvDeviceGateway IEC 60870-5-104 Service cannot start because of an invalid address of the device's default gateway.
E_InvDeviceMask IEC 60870-5-104 Service cannot start because of an invalid subnet mask on the device.
E_InvPrefixLength IEC 60870-5-104 Service cannot start because value of subnet prefix length is not in range 0 to 128.
E_NoActiveStation IEC 60870-5-104 Service cannot start because there is no active station.
E_NotEnoughMem IEC 60870-5-104 Service cannot start because of too little free memory.
IEC 60870-5-104 Service cannot be started because the IP{arg(IPv6)} address of the service is the
E_ServiceIpBroadcast
IEC 60870-5-104 Service cannot be started because the IP{arg(IPv6)} address of the service has
E_ServiceIpDefault
the invalid default value '{arg (IpAddress)}'.
E_ServiceIpInvAddr
service is not a valid address.
E_ServiceIpInvChar
service contains an invalid character.
IEC 60870-5-104 Service cannot be started because the IP{arg(IPv6)} address of the service is the
E_ServiceIpLocalHost
invalid address of the local host.
E_ServiceIpMulticast
the service is a multicast address.
IEC 60870-5-104 Service cannot be started because the IP{arg(IPv6)} address of the service is not
E_ServiceIpNone
set.
E_ServiceIpSubnetBroadcast
the service is the same as the highest address of the subnet.
E_ServiceIpSubnetId
the service is identically the lowest address of the subnet.
E_ServiceIpTooLong
service is too long.
E_ServiceIpUnknownError IEC 60870-5-104 Service cannot start because the IP{arg(IPv6)} '{arg(IpAddress)}' address of the

DGB-004-1.04
service contains an undefined error.
Connection {arg(ConnectionNumber)} of the IEC 60870-5-104 station {arg(StationNumber)} is not

E_StationConnectRc
available in the device because of an internal error.
Connection to IEC 60870-5-104 station {arg(StationNumber)} failed due to an internal error in the
E_StationConnectSc
device.
IEC 60870-5-104 Service cannot be started because subnet mask has the invalid value
E_SubnetMaskAllOnes
'255.255.255.255'.
IEC 60870-5-104 Service cannot be started because subnet mask '{arg(SubnetMask)}' is not a valid
E_SubnetMaskInvAddr
mask.
IEC 60870-5-104 Service cannot be started because subnet mask '{arg(SubnetMask)}' is invalid
E_SubnetMaskInvalid
because of 0 bits (s) within the 1-bit series.
IEC 60870-5-104 Service cannot be started because subnet mask '{arg(SubnetMask)}' contains an
E_SubnetMaskInvChar
invalid character.
IEC 60870-5-104 Service cannot be started because the first byte of subnet mask
E_SubnetMaskLargeNet
'{arg(SubnetMask)}' is not 255.
E_SubnetMaskNone IEC 60870-5-104 Service cannot be started because subnet mask is not set.
E_SubnetMaskTooLong IEC 60870-5-104 Service cannot start because subnet mask '{arg(SubnetMask)}' is too long.
IEC 60870-5-104 Service cannot be started because subnet mask '{arg(SubnetMask)}' contains an
E_SubnetMaskUnknownError
undefined error.
IEC 60870-5-104 Service stopped the communication because there were only invalid updates of
E_TooManyInvalid records from the application process unit within the last 5 seconds. The reason could be a hardware
defect or an incompatibility of the firmwares.
IEC 60870-5-104 Service stopped communicating as there were {arg(DataSetUpdates)} updates of

E_UpdateRateStop records within the last 5 seconds. The data point '{arg(DataPoint)}' had the most updates in the last
5 seconds with {arg(DataPointUpdates)} updates.

DGB-004-1.04
35.21. CAUSES FOR WARNINGS

Warnings are a by-product of functional limitations of IEC104.
Internal identification of the warning Explanation
CASDU of the device has an invalid value, because it is not in the range 1 to 65534. Use the default
W_DeviceInvCASDU
values 254 for CASDU1 and 255 for CASDU2, resulting in 65534 for the CASDU.
Data point '{arg(DataPoint)}' ignored, because the data point '{arg(OtherDataPoint)}' also IOA1 =
W_DpDoubleAddr
{arg(AddrValue1)}, IOA2 = {arg(AddrValue2)}, IOA3 = {arg(AddrValue3)} and the same CASDU has.
Data point '{arg(DataPoint)}' with IOA1 = {arg(AddrValue1)}, IOA2 = {arg(AddrValue2)} and IOA3 =
W_DpDuplicate
{arg(AddrValue3)} is ignored because the same data point already exists in the data point list.
IEC 60870-5-104 Service detected a problem with {arg(DataPointCount)} data points. The data
W_DpFailMulti
punctuation list should be examined for invalid data points.
IEC 60870-5-104 Service detected a problem with 1 data point. The data punctuation list should be
W_DpFailOne
examined for invalid data points.
IEC 60870-5-104 Service received a finite value after a non-finite value for floating-point data point
W_DpFloatFinite
'{arg(DataPoint)}'.
W_DpFloatNotFinite IEC 60870-5-104 Service received a non-finite value for floating-point data point '{arg(DataPoint)}'.
Data point '{arg(DataPoint)}' with IOA1 = {arg(AddrValue1)}, IOA2 = {arg(AddrValue2)}, and IOA3 =
W_DpFupName
{arg(AddrValue3)} ignored because the name of the function plan could not be determined.
Data point '{arg(DataPoint)}' ignores, since IOA {arg(OctetNumber)} has the value
W_DpInvAddr
{arg(AddrValue1)}, which is outside the range 0 to 255.
Data point '{arg(DataPoint)}' ignored because an invalid value for CASDU is configured. (Both
W_DpInvCasdu
CASDU1 and CASDU2 must be <256, but they must not both be 0 or both.)
Factor of datapoint '{arg(DataPoint)}' with IOA1 = {arg(AddrValue1)}, IOA2 = {arg(AddrValue2)}, and

W_DpInvFactor
IOA3 = {arg(AddrValue3)} ignored because it has an invalid value. Value 1.0 is used as a factor.
Interval of data point '{arg(DataPoint)}' with IOA1 = {arg(AddrValue1)}, IOA2 = {arg(AddrValue2)}

W_DpInvInterval and IOA3 = {arg(AddrValue3)} ignored because it has an invalid value. Interval handling is disabled
for this data point.
W_DpInvName
{arg(AddrValue3)} ignored because the name of the data point could not be determined.
Link to station {arg(StationNumber)} of datapoint '{arg(DataPoint)}' with IOA1 = {arg(AddrValue1)},

W_DpInvStation IOA2 = {arg(AddrValue2)}, and IOA3 = {arg(AddrValue3)} ignored because it this station does not
exist.
Unconditional threshold of data point '{arg(DataPoint)}' with IOA1 = {arg(AddrValue1)}, IOA2 =

{arg(AddrValue2)} and IOA3 = {arg(AddrValue3)} ignored because it has an invalid value.
W_DpInvThresholdAbs
Unconditional threshold detection is disabled for this data point, unless there is no other change
detection enabled for that data point.
Additive threshold of data point '{arg(DataPoint)}' with IOA1 = {arg(AddrValue1)}, IOA2 =

W_DpInvThresholdAdd {arg(AddrValue2)}, and IOA3 = {arg(AddrValue3)} ignored because it has an invalid value. Additive
Threshold detection is disabled for this data point.

DGB-004-1.04
Data point '{arg(DataPoint)}' ignored, since all 3 octets of the IOA have the value 0, which is not
W_DpIoaZero
allowed.
Data point '{arg(DataPoint)}' ignored because no or an invalid value for IOA {arg(OctetNumber)} is
W_DpNoAddr
configured.
W_DpNoId Data point {arg(DataPointNumber)} ignored without identification.
W_DpNoValidStation
{arg(AddrValue3)} ignored because there is no valid link to a station.
W_DpReadOnly
{arg(AddrValue3)} is ignored because the data point can not be an input.
W_DpTaskName
{arg(AddrValue3)} ignored because the name of the task could not be determined.
W_DpTooMany
{arg(AddrValue3)} ignored because maximum number of data points was exceeded.
W_DpUnknownDir
{arg(AddrValue3)} ignored due to unknown direction type. Only IN and OUT are supported.
W_DpUnknownType
{arg(AddrValue3)} ignored because the type of data point is unknown or not supported.
Gateway of the IEC 60870-5-104 service has an IP address '{arg(IpAddress)}' with at least one
W_GatewayIpZeros leading zero. A value with a leading zero could be interpreted octally instead of decimal. It would be
better to configure the address as '{arg(OtherAddr)}'.
Connection {arg(ConnectionNumber)} of the IEC 60870-5-104 station {arg(StationNumber)} is not

W_InvConnection
configured correctly. Connection has been removed from the list.
W_InvFaultTimeout Parameter '{arg(ParaName)}' has an invalid value. Use default {arg(DefaultValue)} seconds.
Parameter '{arg(ParaName)}' has an invalid value. Value is not allowed for accuracy. Use the value
W_InvFaultTimeStep
{arg(TimeValue)} seconds.
Parameter k of the IEC 60870-5-104 station {arg(StationNumber)} has an invalid value. Use default
W_InvParVal_k
12 APDUs.
Parameter w of the IEC 60870-5-104 station {arg(StationNumber)} has an invalid value. Use value
W_InvParVal_w
{arg(DefaultValue)} APDUs.
Parameter w of the IEC 60870-5-104 station {arg(StationNumber)} is greater ⅔ of the value of

W_InvParVal_wk
parameter k. Use value {arg(DefaultValue)} APDUs.
Timeout t0 of the connection {arg(ConnectionNumber)} of the IEC 60870-5-104 station

W_InvRcTimeout_t0
{arg(StationNumber)} has an invalid value. Use default 30 seconds.

W_InvRcTimeout_t1

W_InvRcTimeout_t2

W_InvRcTimeout_t3

DGB-004-1.04
Timeout t{arg(TimeNumber)} of the connection (arg(ConnectionNumber)} of the IEC 60870-5-104

W_InvRcTimeoutStep station {arg(StationNumber)} has an invalid. Value is not allowed for accuracy. Use the value
{arg(TimeValue)} seconds.
Timeout t0 of the IEC 60870-5-104 station {arg(StationNumber)} has an invalid value. Use default 30
W_InvScTimeout_t0
seconds.
Time limit t1 of the IEC 60870-5-104 station {arg(StationNumber)} has an invalid value. Use default
W_InvScTimeout_t1
15 seconds.
Timeout t2 of the IEC 60870-5-104 station {arg(StationNumber)} has an invalid value. Use default 10
W_InvScTimeout_t2
seconds.
Time limit t3 of the IEC 60870-5-104 station {arg(StationNumber)} has an invalid value. Use default
W_InvScTimeout_t3
20 seconds.
Timeout t{arg(TimeNumber)} of the IEC 60870-5-104 station {arg(StationNumber)} has an invalid.

W_InvScTimeoutStep
Value is not allowed for accuracy. Use the value {arg(TimeValue)} seconds.
Connection (arg(ConnectionNumber)} of the IEC 60870-5-104 station {arg(StationNumber)} disabled

W_RcIpBroadcast
because the IP{arg(IPv6)} address is the broadcast address '255.255.255.255'.
Connection {arg(ConnectionNumber)} of the IEC 60870-5-104 station {arg(StationNumber)} disabled

W_RcIpDefault
because the IP{arg(IPv6)} address has the invalid default value '{arg(IpAddress)}'.

W_RcIpGateway
because the IP{arg(IPv6)} address '{arg(IpAddress)}' is the same address as the gateway.

W_RcIpInvAddr
because the IP{arg(IPv6)} address '{arg(IpAddress)}' is not a valid address.

W_RcIpInvChar
because the IP{arg (IPv6)} address '{arg(IpAddress)}' contains an invalid character.

W_RcIpLocalHost
because the IP{arg(IPv6)} address is the invalid address of the local host.

W_RcIpMulticast
because the IP{arg(IPv6)} address '{arg(IpAddress)}' is a multicast address.

W_RcIpNone
because the IP{arg(IPv6)} address is not set.

W_RcIpNotReachable because the IP{arg(IPv6)} address '{arg(IpAddress)}' is not in the same subnet and there is no
gateway.

W_RcIpRc because the IP{arg(IPv6)} address '{arg(IpAddress)}' has the same address as the one of connection
{arg(OtherConnectionNumber)} of the station {arg(OtherStationNumber)}.

W_RcIpSc because the IP{arg(IPv6)} address '{arg(IpAddress)}' has the same address as the station
{arg(OtherStationNumber)}.

W_RcIpService because the IP{arg(IPv6)} address '{arg(IpAddress)}' is the same as the address of the service
(device) is.

DGB-004-1.04

W_RcIpSubnetBroadcast because the IP{arg(IPv6)} address '{arg(IpAddress)}' is the same as the highest address of the
subnet.

W_RcIpSubnetId
because the IP{arg(IPv6)} address '{arg(IpAddress)}' is the lowest address of the subnet.

W_RcIpTooLong
because the IP{arg(IPv6)} address '{arg(IpAddress)}' is too long.

W_RcIpUnknownError
because the IP{arg(IPv6)} address '{arg(IpAddress)}' contains an undefined error.
Connection {arg(ConnectionNumber)} of the IEC 60870-5-104 station {arg(StationNumber)} has an

IP address '{arg(IpAddress)}' with at least one leading zero. A value with a leading zero could be
W_RcIpZeros
interpreted octally instead of decimal. It would be better to configure the address as
'{arg(OtherAddr)}'.
IEC 60870-5-104 station {arg(StationNumber)} disabled because the IP{arg(IPv6)} address is the
W_ScIpBroadcast
IEC 60870-5-104 station {arg(StationNumber)} disabled because the IP{arg(IPv6)} address has the
W_ScIpDefault
invalid default value '{arg(IpAddress)}'.
IEC 60870-5-104 station {arg(StationNumber)} disabled because the IP{arg(IPv6)} address

W_ScIpGateway
'{arg(IpAddress)}' is the same as the address of the gateway.

W_ScIpInvAddr
'{arg(IpAddress)}' is not a valid address.

W_ScIpInvChar
'{arg(IpAddress)}' contains an invalid character.
IEC 60870-5-104 station {arg(StationNumber)} disabled because the IP{arg(IPv6)} address is the
W_ScIpLocalHost
inadmissible address of the local host.

W_ScIpMulticast
'{arg(IpAddress)}' is a multicast address.
IEC 60870-5-104 station {arg(StationNumber)} disabled because the IP{arg(IPv6)} address is not
W_ScIpNone
set.

W_ScIpNotReachable
'{arg(IpAddress)}' is not on the same subnet and there is no gateway.

W_ScIpRc '{arg(IpAddress)}' has the same address as that of the connection {arg(OtherConnectionNumber)} of
the station {arg(OtherStationNumber)}.

W_ScIpSc
'{arg(IpAddress)}' is the same as the address of station {arg(OtherStationNumber)}.

W_ScIpService
'{arg(IpAddress)}' is the same as the address of the service (device).

W_ScIpSubnetBroadcast
'{arg(IpAddress)}' is the same as the highest address of the subnet.

DGB-004-1.04

W_ScIpSubnetId
'{arg(IpAddress)}' is the lowest address of the subnet.

W_ScIpTooLong
'{arg(IpAddress)}' is too long.

W_ScIpUnknownError
'{arg(IpAddress)}' contains an undefined error.
IEC 60870-5-104 station {arg(StationNumber)} has an IP address '{arg(IpAddress)}' with at least one
W_ScIpZeros leading zero. A value with a leading zero could be interpreted octally instead of decimal. It would be
better to configure the address as '{arg(OtherAddr)}'.
The set redundancy mode is not supported or the value is invalid. Therefore, the IEC 60870-5-104
W_ServiceInvRedundancy
service does not use redundancy.
IEC 60870-5-104 service has an IP address '{arg(IpAddress)}' with at least one leading zero. A value
W_ServiceIpZeros with a leading zero could be interpreted octally instead of decimal. It would be better to configure the
address as '{arg(OtherAddr)}'.
Special IEC 60870-5-104 network settings are not yet supported and are therefore ignored. Instead,
W_SpecialNetSupport
the network settings of the device are used.
Subnet mask of the IEC 60870-5-104 service is '{arg(SubnetMask)}' with at least one leading zero. A
W_SubnetMaskZeros value with a leading zero could be interpreted octally instead of decimal. It would be better to
configure the subnet mask as '{arg(OtherMask)}'.
Parameter '{arg(ParaName)}' of IEC 60870-5-104 Station {arg(StationNumber)} has an invalid value.

W_StationInvProbesParVal
Use default value {arg(DefaultValue)}.
Parameter '{arg(ParaName)}' of IEC 60870-5-104 Station {arg(StationNumber)} has an invalid value.

W_StationInvTimeParVal
Use default {arg(DefaultValue)} seconds.
Parameter '{arg(ParaName)}' of IEC 60870-5-104 station {arg(StationNumber)} has an invalid. Value

W_StationInvTimeStep
is not allowed for accuracy. Use the value {arg(TimeValue)} seconds.
Type of connection signaling from IEC 60870-5-104 Station {arg(StationNumber)} is unknown. Use
W_UnknownSignalingType
default value '{arg(MessageFail)}'.

DGB-004-1.04
35.22. DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES

The occurrence of diagnostic messages does not result in a functional restriction of the IEC104.
Internal identification of the

Explanation
diagnostic message
D_BlkMonDirOff IEC 60870-5-104 Lock the monitoring direction disabled.
D_BlkMonDirOn IEC 60870-5-104 Lock the monitoring direction activated.
Connection {arg(ConnectionName)} to IEC 60870-5-104 station {arg(StationName)} with

D_ConnectionSwitched IP{arg(IPv6)} address '{arg(IpAddress)}' switched to connection {arg(NewConnection)} with
IP{arg(NewIPv6)} Address '{arg(NewIpAddress)}'.
Length of the received packet from connection {arg(ConnectionName)} to the IEC 60870-5-104
D_FrameLengthRc
station {arg(StationName)} with IP{arg(IPv6)} address '{arg(IpAddress)}' exceeds the buffer size.
Length of the received packet from IEC 60870-5-104 station {arg(StationName)} with IP{arg(IPv6)}
D_FrameLengthSc
address '{arg(IpAddress)}' exceeds the buffer size.
Invalid or unsupported short code received from connection {arg(ConnectionName)} to IEC 60870-5-
D_IllegalFunctionRc
104 station {arg(StationName)} with IP{arg(IPv6)} address '{arg(IpAddress)}'.
Unsupported or invalid function code received from IEC 60870-5-104 station {arg(StationName)}
D_IllegalFunctionSc
with IP{arg(IPv6)} address '{arg(IpAddress)}'.
First byte packet not equal to 0x68 received from connection {arg(ConnectionName)} to IEC 60870-
D_InvalidStartRc
5-104 station {arg(StationName)} with IP{arg(IPv6)} address '{arg(IpAddress)}'.
First byte non-0x68 packet received from IEC 60870-5-104 station {arg(StationName)} with
D_InvalidStartSc
IP{arg(IPv6)} address '{arg(IpAddress)}'.
Unknown acknowledgment sequence number detected in the received APDU from connection
D_LinkSequenceRc {arg(ConnectionName)} to IEC 60870-5-104 station {arg(StationName)} with IP{arg(IPv6)} address
'{arg(IpAddress)}'.
Unknown acknowledgment sequence number detected in the received APDU from IEC 60870-5-104
D_LinkSequenceSc
station {arg(StationName)} with IP{arg(IPv6)} address '{arg(IpAddress)}'.
Receipt acknowledgment of I-format APDU not received from connection {arg(ConnectionName)} to

D_NoAcknowledgeRc
IEC 60870-5-104 station {arg(StationName)} with IP{arg(IPv6)} address '{arg(IpAddress)}'.
Receipt acknowledgment of I format APDU not received from IEC 60870-5-104 station
D_NoAcknowledgeSc
{arg(StationName)} with IP{arg(IPv6)} address '{arg(IpAddress)}'.
Confirmation of U format APDU not received from connection {arg(ConnectionName)} to IEC 60870-
D_NoConfirmRc
5-104 station {arg(StationName)} with IP{arg(IPv6)} address '{arg(IpAddress)}'.
Confirmation of U format APDU not received from IEC 60870-5-104 station {arg(StationName)} with
D_NoConfirmSc
Sending error reported from physical channel of connection {arg(ConnectionName)} to IEC 60870-5-
D_PhysicalTransmitRc
104 station {arg(StationName)} with IP{arg(IPv6)} address '{arg(IpAddress)}'.
D_PhysicalTransmitSc Sending error reported from physical channel to IEC 60870-5-104 station {arg(StationName)} with

DGB-004-1.04

Explanation
diagnostic message
STARTDT received from connection {arg(ConnectionName)} to IEC 60870-5-104 station

D_ReceivedStartDTRc
STARTDT received from IEC 60870-5-104 station {arg(StationName)} with IP{arg(IPv6)} address
D_ReceivedStartDTSc
'{arg(IpAddress)}'.
STOPDT received from connection {arg(ConnectionName)} to IEC 60870-5-104 station

D_ReceivedStopDTRc
STOPDT received from IEC 60870-5-104 station {arg(StationName)} with IP{arg(IPv6)} address
D_ReceivedStopDTSc
'{arg(IpAddress)}'.
D_RevModeOff IEC 60870-5-104 revision mode disabled.
D_RevModeOn IEC 60870-5-104 revision mode activated.
D_Start IEC 60870-5-104 diagnose mode activated.
Connection {arg(ConnectionName)} to IEC 60870-5-104 station {arg(StationName)} with

D_StationConnectRc
Connected to IEC 60870-5-104 station {arg(StationName)} with IP{arg(IPv6)} address

D_StationConnectSc
'{arg(IpAddress)}'.
Connection {arg(ConnectionName)} to IEC 60870-5-104 Station {arg(StationName)} with

D_StationDisconnectRc
IP{arg(IPv6)} Address '{arg(IpAddress)}' exited from the station.
Connection to IEC 60870-5-104 Station {arg(StationName)} with IP{arg(IPv6)} Address

D_StationDisconnectSc
'{arg(IpAddress)}' exited from the station.
Connection to IEC 60870-5-104 Station {arg(StationName)} with IP{arg(IPv6)} Address

D_StationTimeoutFault '{arg(IpAddress)}' interprets as disturbed because nothing has been received within the configured
station monitoring time.
Connection to IEC 60870-5-104 station {arg(StationName)} with IP{arg(IPv6)} address

D_StationTimeoutNone '{arg(IpAddress)}' interpreted as valid again because data was received from the still established
connection.
D_Stop IEC 60870-5-104 diagnostic mode ended.

DGB-004-1.04
35.23. INFORMATION MESSAGES

Information messages inform about the status of the IEC 60870-5-104 service.

Explanation
information message
IEC 60870-5-104 service V{arg(Version)} is on port {arg(PortNumber)} of address '{arg(IpAddress)}'

I_Listening
on receipt.
I_StopListen IEC 60870-5-104 Service terminated communication with the stations.
I_TerminateProject IEC 60870-5-104 Service stops because of a serious error in the project configuration data.
IEC 60870-5-104 Service terminated due to serious error during startup procedure. Error code:
I_TerminateStart
{arg(ErrorCode)}
IEC 60870-5-104 Service discovered 10 changes between a finite value and a non-finite value for
I_TooManyNotFinite floating-point data point '{arg(DataPoint)}' within 6 hours, thus stopping further recording of this
problem until the 6-hour value is stable or not finite.
35.24. STATUS MESSAGES

Status messages provide information on the status of the "connection faults" stored persistently in the event log,
see the "connection signaling" parameter in the station definition parameter list.
Internal identification of the status

Explanation
message
Connection error to IEC 60870-5-104 station {arg(StationName)} with IP{arg(IPv6)} address

S_ConnectionFault
'{arg(IpAddress)}'
Connection to IEC 60870-5-104 station {arg(StationName)} with IP{arg(IPv6)} Adresse

S_ConnectionOK
'{arg(IpAddress)}'
35.25. ORDERING DATA
Software License Material number
COM IEC 60870-5-104 Ed. 2.0 SGB-051--
35.26. VALIDITY
Document valid for software license: Mat. No. SGB-051--, Product state: 00

DGB-004-1.04
36. STATION BUS PROTOCOL – MODBUS TCP
MODBUS is an open standard communication protocol for data exchange between devices in an industrial
installation.
MODBUS works after the server – client principle. The data exchange takes place by writing or reading from
previously defined and known addresses in a memory area.
The HIPASE device provides the MODBUS TCP server function.
The MODBUS server function sets a separate memory area of the device to be available for reading or modifying.
One or more configured MODBUS clients can connect to the MODBUS server and read data in bits or data words
(16 bits) cyclically from predetermined addresses from the memory area of the MODBUS server using TCP/IP on
port 502.
An automatic transmission of data from server to client in case of changes is normally not provided in the MODBUS
protocol. Each client must repeatedly request by telegram the required data from the server.
Writing to specific addresses is achieved by appropriately configuring defined clients.
The MODBUS protocol can be used in parallel to the other HIPASE communication protocols (eg. IEC 60870-5-
104 and IEC 61850).
 Error-free parameterized MODBUS TCP interface in the HIPASE device
 Error-free parameterized MODBUS TCP interface of the central station
 Ethernet connection between HIPASE device and central station in the same IPv4 address space
 Active time synchronization via NTP
 Less than 500 Modbus TCP data packets in 5 seconds to FBD inputs or from FBD outputs.
This data rate is exceeded if a FBD input is correspondingly often described via Modbus TCP or a FBD
output changes frequently. Likewise, a threshold value setting for the transmission of analog values
may mean that they have to be transmitted continuously, so that this station bus interface is switched
off in 5 seconds because the limit of 500 data packets has been exceeded.
36.2. MODBUS TCP SERVER - DEFINITION OF THE DIRECTION OF TRANSMISSION

Send direction / Read direction / Output direction
is a data transfer from the MODBUS TCP server to a MODBUS TCP client when requested by the client. From the
perspective of the HIPASE device with an implemented MODBUS TCP server function, this is a read access of the
client to the data provided by the HIPASE device. Addresses from which data can only be read are designated as
output addresses.

DGB-004-1.04
Receive direction / Write direction / Input direction
is a data transfer from a MODBUS TCP client to the MODBUS TCP server on configured addresses in the virtual
memory map. The server forwards the received data to the application. From the perspective of the HIPASE device
with an implemented MODBUS TCP server function, this is a write access to the external data points configured in
the HIPASE device. Addresses where data can be written to, and also be read from, are referred to as input
addresses.
36.3. SERVER CONFIGURATION

Configuration options using the engineering tool:
 which data points to be configured in the send direction

 which data points to be configured in the receive direction
 which clients can connect to the server
 access mode for each client: read only (standard), or read/write
 miscellaneous MODBUS TCP server special parameters
1. To use the Modbus interface, this must be activated

2. Select the "Client Definition" window to add a new line
3. Add a new line in "Client Definition"
4. Enter a station name and its IP address, which must be in the same address range as the HIPASE device,
and set all other parameters

DGB-004-1.04
5. data points such as function sheet inputs can only be dragged directly to the "receive direction" window if
their data types have already been defined previously.
6. In the worksheet Function chart inputs, the data types of the already created function sheet inputs have
been preset. Otherwise they could not be dragged to the "Receive direction" window in the next step.
7. The data points previously drawn in this window must be assigned Modbus addresses. To the right of this
window are the permissible address ranges, matching the function codes.
36.4. ACCESS MODES AND ACCES CONTROL FOR THE MODBUS TCP SERVER
Only configured clients with a known static IP address can connect to the MODBUS TCP server. The MODBUS
TCP server will refuse to establish a connection, and thus access to the virtual memory map, to clients with non-
configured and therefore unknown IP addresses.
Each client may request all data provided in send and receive direction according to configuration. There is no
restriction to a certain data area in the virtual memory map implemented for each client. By default, all clients have
read-only access.
Each client with write access according to configuration can write to all data addresses in the receive direction.
There is no restriction to a certain data area in the virtual memory map implemented for each client.
An authentication mechanism to verify the identity of clients with configured IP address is not implemented.
36.5. MODBUS TCP SERVER FUNCTIONALITY - DEFINITION OF DATA OBJECTS

In HIPASE, the input of a function block diagram has to be set by a client to change its value.
The value of a function block diagram output cannot be changed by a client. The current value of a function block
diagram output can only be read by a MODBUS TCP client.
Therefore, we arrive at the following definition of terms for the HIPASE system:
A boolean function block diagram (FBD) output is assigned to a MODBUS TCP output bit address, whose
current value can be read by a MODBUS client with the functions to read discrete inputs.
The address range of the HIPASE device provided to put the data to send to MODBUS TCP clients is called
MODBUS output addresses.
The address range of the HIPASE device provided for the data received from MODBUS TCP clients is called
MODBUS input addresses.
A Boolean function block diagram (FBD) input is assigned to a MODBUS TCP input bit address, whose current
value can be read or changed by a MODBUS TCP client with the functions of Coils to read/write

DGB-004-1.04
36.6. MODBUS TCP FUNCTION OVERVIEW / TELEGRAM FORMATS

The MODBUS TCP protocol distinguishes the functions (= telegram formats) using the function code byte in the
telegram header. Following telegram formats are defined by the function code (abbreviated FC):
MODBUS TCP Function Designation in MODBUS protocol Meaning in HIPASE system

code
FC 01 (hex. 01) Read Coils Read Boolean FUP-input
FC 02 (hex. 02) Read Discrete Inputs Read Boolean FUP-output
Read Holding Registers Read Boolean or analog

FC 03 (hex. 03)
FUP-input
Read Input Registers Read Boolean or analog

FC 04 (hex. 04)
FUP-output
FC 05 (hex. 05) Write Single Coil Wrtite Boolean FUP-input
FC 06 (hex. 06) Write Single Register Wrtite Boolean FUP-input
Not used and therefore not Read Exception Status (Serial Line
FC 07 (hex. 07)
supported only)
Diagnostics (Serial Line only) Implemented with additional sub-

FC 08 (hex. 08)
function code 00 (Return Query Data)
Not used and therefore not Get Comm Event Counter (Serial Line
FC 11 (hex. 0B)
supported only)
Not used and therefore not Get Comm Event Log (Serial Line only)
FC 12 (hex. 0C)
supported
FC 15 (hex. 0F) Write Multiple Coils Wrtite Boolean FUP-input
FC 16 (hex. 10) Write Multiple Registers Wrtite Boolean or analog FUP-input
Not used and therefore not Report Slave ID (Serial Line only)
FC 17 (hex. 11)
supported
FC 20 (hex. 14) Not supported Read File Record
Not supported
FC 21 (hex. 15) Write File Record
Not supported
FC 22 (hex. 16) Mask Write Register
Not supported
FC 23 (hex. 17) Read/Write Multiple Registers
Not supported
FC 24 (hex. 18) Read FIFO Queue
Not supported
FC 43 (hex. 2B) Encapsulated Interface Transport
FC 43 / 13 Not used and therefore not CANopen General Reference Request

(hex. 2B / hex. 0D) supported and Response

DGB-004-1.04
FC 43 / 14 Not supported Read Device Identification

(hex. 2B / hex. 0E)
36.7. MODBUS TCP DATA FORMAT

The MODBUS TCP server function of the HIPASE device supports following MODBUS TCP data formats:
Number of
MODBUS
HIPASE Bit- necessary Assigned register
TCP data Explanation
data type width register area
format
addresses
1 1 register address contains up to 16 data points of Bool

BOOL Bool 1 /16 bit send area
type.
Sign bit: Bit 31

Bit 00 .. Bit 15 in register with higher address
register send area / Bit 16 .. Bit 31 in register with lower address
DINT Integer 32 2
register receive area
The 32-Bit value is saved in the MODBUS process image

using big-endian notation.

Bit 16 .. Bit 31 in register with lower address
Unsigned register send area /
UDINT 32 2
Integer register receive area
The 32-Bit value ist saved in the MODBUS process image
Floating point number with 32-Bit according to the Short

Floating Point Format defined in IEEE 754.
Register with lower address:
register send area / Sign: Bit 15 of the registers
REAL Float 32 2
register receive area Exponent Bit 7 .. Bit 0: Bit 14 .. Bit 7 of the register
Mantissa Bit 22 .. Bit 16: Bit 6 .. Bit 0 of the register
Register with higher address:
Mantissa Bit 15 .. Bit 0: Bit 15 .. Bit 0 of the register

Bit 16 .. Bit 31 in register with lower address
register send area /
DWORD BitMask 32 2
register receive area
The 32-Bit value ist saved in the MODBUS process image
Bit positions of the FUP inputs and outputs of data type float in the register area of the MODBUS TCP
server
Register Bits in register send area or register receive area

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
x SIGN e 7
2 e26 e25 e24 e23 e22 e21 e20 m222 m221 m220 m219 m218 m217 m216
x+1 m 15
2 m214 m213 m212 m211 m211 m290 m280 m270 m260 m250 m240 m230 m220 m210 m200
e2X ... exponent bits, m2X ... mantissa bits

DGB-004-1.04
An example for better understanding:
A FUP output of type float has been assigned to the register address hex. 1004.
Currently this FUP output has a value of 3,141592654 ≡ hex. 40490FDB (value of π).
Therefore the value hex. 4049 is located in register hex. 1004 and hex. 0FDB in register hex. 1005.
The FUP output is read by a client using the Read Input Registers (FC 4).
Client request Server answer

Field name Value (hex.) Field name Value (hex.)
Function 04 Function 04
Start address High Byte 10 Number of bytes 04
Start address Low Byte 04 Register hex. 1004 High Byte 40
Number of registers High Byte 00 Register hex. 1004 Low Byte 49
Number of registers Low Byte 02 Register hex. 1005 High Byte 0F
Register hex. 1005 Low Byte DB
Example of a float transmission using MODBUS TCP
36.8. MODBUS TCP PROTOCOL - ADDRESSING OF DATA OBJECTS

So called register addresses (PDU addresses, PDU: Process Data Unit) for the MODBUS TCP server function in
the HIPASE device have been defined for the transfer of data points from and to the MODBUS TCP client.
According to the MODBUS TCP protocol a register address always contains 16 Bit. Up to 16 FUP inputs and
outputs of Boolean type can be handed over to a register address. For the transfer of FUP inputs and outputsof
integer, unsigned integer, float or bitmask data type 2 register addresses are required.
Following memory map is used by the HIPASE device:
Register address / MODBUS

Bit address Function code
Memory area Access
of the MODBUS server
function
65535
Register receive area
for daten types
R/W 03, 16
Integer, Unsigned Integer, Float
or BitMask
32768
32767
Register send area
for data types
R 04
Integer, Unsigned Integer, Float
or BitMask
4096
4095 / 65535
Bit receive area 01, 03, 05,
for data type Bool R/W
2048 / 32768 06, 15, 16
2047 / 32767
Bit send area
R 02, 04
for data type Bool

DGB-004-1.04
General structure of the virtual memory map
The MODBUS TCP client can access the Bit area using Bit addressing (i. e. FC 01) and also using register
addressing (i. e. FC 03).
The register address of a Bit addresse is calculated using following formula:
Register address = Bit address / 16

Examples: bit with address 128 is bit 0 in register 8.
bit with address 233 is bit 9 in register 14.
36.9. OPERATION OF THE MODBUS TCP SERVER

The MODBUS TCP server function is performed only if this feature is enabled according to the configuration.
At least one active MODBUS TCP client with a known IP address must be defined. If there is no configured
MODBUS TCP client accessible when the protocol is active, the MODBUS TCP server will report it with an error
message in the diagnostic log and promptly terminate itself afterwards.
During the start of the MODBUS TCP server all the data of the MODBUS TCP input addresses and of the
MODBUS TCP output addresses is initialized with "0", regardless of type.
The MODBUS TCP server allows client connections to the HIPASE device only during “Test” or “Normal” operation
modes.
If after power up the HIPASE device does not change to the “Test” or “Normal” operation mode, but remains in the
“Loading” mode, the MODBUS TCP server starts and initializes, but it does not allow connections to clients.
During “Load” mode or “Fault” condition, the MODBUS TCP server stays in a waiting mode without communication
to the clients until a change of operation mode (“Test” or “Normal” operation) is signaled and the data in the
MODBUS TCP output addresses is valid again.
If during operation the MODBUS TCP server receives the signal "Processing failure" (fault condition), all active
connections to the clients will be terminated. The MODBUS TCP server will keep on running and wait for the signal
to resume processing (signal for “Test” or “Normal” operation). The last received values of the input addresses are
retained in the memory map.

DGB-004-1.04
36.10. DATA POINTS MODBUS TCP

Project Explorer of the HIPASE engineering tool and can not be assigned as FBD inputs.
Default
value
DpAnyConnectionFault bool false Total message "Connection fault" with one or more remote stations.
DpAllConnectionFailure bool false Total message "Connection fault" with all remote stations.
depending
on
Data point adopts the value of the parameter "Activate diagnostic
parameter
DpDiagMode bool mode" as initialization value. Can only be controlled by forcing in test
"Activate
mode.
diagnostic
mode"
depending
on
Data point adopts the value of the parameter "Activate diagnostics
parameter
DpDiagMonitor bool monitor" as initialization value. Can only be activated if diagnostic mode
"Activate
is active. Can only be controlled by forcing in test mode.
diagnostic
monitor"
36.11. DATA POINTS MODBUS TCP STATIONS

For each defined remote station, these data points exist in the Project Explorer of the HIPASE engineering tool.
The state of these data points can only be displayed in a table or in an image. These data points can not be
allocated as FBD inputs.
Default
value
"Connection error": This is true as long as the connection to the remote

station is interrupted. If the remote site succeeds in connecting to the
DpStationConnectionFault bool false HIPASE device, that data point goes false. See parameter
StartFaultTimeout during startup or FaultTimeout of the central station
during operation.
Current, instantaneous connection status to the remote site

false
From the point of view of the HIPASE device, there is no connection to
the associated station / client at the time this value of the data point is
DpStationConnectionState bool false requested.
true
From the point of view of the HIPASE device, there is a connection to
the associated station / client at the time this value of the data point is
requested.

DGB-004-1.04
36.12. SETTINGS MODBUS TCP

The following parameters are offered in the "Configuration" ribbon, "Communication" ribbon group under "Modbus
TCP".
Default
Parameter Valid value range Explanation
value
With this checkbox the MODBUS TCP interface can be activated or

deactivated as desired. Further MODBUS TCP parameterizations are
Selected / not
Activate not selected not affected. This checkbox is part of the configuration and therefore the
selected
project must be transferred to the device with "Load entire application
and restart" for this setting to take effect.
Activate diagnostic mode Checkbox ON / OFF OFF Initialization value for the data point DpDiagMode.
Enable diagnostic monitor Checkbox ON / OFF OFF Initialization value for the data point DpDiagMonitor.
After the device has booted, the HIPASE device attempts to establish
the parameterized connections.
If this is not successful within the set time, these are reported as failed
Delay error signaling after via the Boolean data point DpStationConnectionFault of the remote
0 .. 180 s 5s
protocol start (s) station.
With this parameter, however, the message of the interruption of the
connection to the remote station for a certain time can be delayed so
that not insignificant, short interruptions always lead to error messages.
36.13. SETTINGS CLIENT DEFINITION

These settings must be specified for each project with a MODBUS TCP connection. A maximum of 8 remote
stations are possible at the same time.
Valid value
Parameter Default value Explanation
range
Name of the Modbus TCP client. Can be freely assigned, appears in the
Modbus Station
Name - project explorer under "Modbus TCP" and in the parameterization of the
#
MODBUS TCP telegrams under "stations".
Description of the Modbus TCP client. Optional description text without

Long text - -
further function.
IPv4 address of the Modbus TCP client. A station parameterized with

IP Address - 0.0.0.0 the default value is deactivated when the HIPASE device starts up with
the output of an internal warning message.
Within this time, the Modbus TCP client must have received an arbitrary
Client Timeout 0 .. 1800 s 20 telegram. Otherwise, this connection will be reported as being disturbed
according to the setting under "Connection signaling".

DGB-004-1.04
Extended settings of a remote station (client) to the HIPASE device
An adaptation of the following default values is usually only necessary for networks with very long response times
(for example, in the case of technically problematic transmission paths or very complex topologies) and must be
evaluated on site.
Valid value
range
None,
Diagnose,
connection signaling None Signaling the connection status:
Fault,
Fail
Time delay between the detection of a connection failure and the

reporting of a "connection failure" via the data point
Fault timeout (s) 0 .. 1800 s 0s
DpStationConnectionFault. If the connection is restored within the
FaultTimeout, no failure message occurs.
Checkbox
Keep-alive On Serves to detect a failed switch more quickly at the TCP level.
On / Off
Delay (in seconds) until after the last TCP telegram (received or sent)
Keep-alive-idle time (s) 0 .. 1800 s 3s the first TCP keep alive telegram is sent. By default disabled by value
= 0. Keep-alive timeout and keep-alive retries are ignored in this case.
Interval (in seconds) in which after expiration of the keep-alive-idle

0 .. 300 s 1s
Keep-alive timeout (s) time the further TCP keep-alive telegrams are sent.
Number of telegrams that can be left unanswered until the connection

1 .. 127 3
Keep-alive retries has failed.

DGB-004-1.04
36.14. SETTINGS TRANSMISSION DIRECTION (MONITORING DIRECTION)

task cycle of the FUP in which the data point is formed.
If, due to the settings for threshold value, additive threshold value or interval, transmissions of a Float-type FBD
output are triggered at the same time, only one value transfer will be made.
Valid value
range
The data type of the allocated data point defined in the function diagram
of the HIPASE device is displayed. Depending on the data type, the
Data type - -
Modbus TCP client must access the data type with the correct Modbus
function code. See chapter: 32.17 MODBUS function codes, overview
The address specification depends on the data type of the data point to
Address 0 .. 32767 0
be sent. See chap .: 32.16 MODBUS function codes, overview
Drop down list of There are no restrictions for clients. Each data point is always made
Stations All
all valid stations available to all clients.
This setting determines an unconditional transfer threshold for a Float-

type FBD output that was previously shunted. As soon as the current
value of this FBD output deviates at least by the value "Threshold value"
from the last transmitted value, a new transmission takes place.
Formula: Threshold ≤ | (Value current) - (last value) |
The setting value for the "Threshold" parameter corresponds to the

0 .. FloatMax desired display resolution and should be significantly greater than the
resolution of the FBD output to be transmitted, in order to keep the
Threshold 0: see 0
number of measured values to be transmitted low.
explanation
Threshold = 0
• additive threshold> 0 OR interval> 0:
no transmission due to this threshold
• additive threshold = 0 AND interval = 0:
every change in value is transmitted.
ATTENTION: This setting combination may overload the station bus!
As soon as the value time area of a Float type FAT output previously
assigned in the send direction exceeds the value for "Additive threshold
value" (in the following: AS), the value of the FBD output is transmitted.
0 .. Float-Max The formation of the value time area begins with the transmission of the
Additive threshold 0
(0: de-activated) last FBD output value. From this point in time, a new value is calculated
for each new calculation of the FBD output from the current value and
the last transmitted value and this is summed with the difference values
since the last transmission. This means that the task cycle time in which

DGB-004-1.04
the FBD output is calculated must be included for the formation of this
parameter.
Purposes:
• To transmit small value changes, fewer telegrams are required than
when using the "Threshold" parameter. For this, the value of the
parameter AS must be a multiple of the value of the parameter
"Threshold".
• Prevention of transmission of superimposed interference signals.
Formula: Minimum value AS> Amplitude of the interference signal *
Period of the interference signal / task cycle time
When the set interval has elapsed, the FBD output previously assigned
in the send direction is transmitted and the interval is restarted.
Interval [s] 0 .. 3600 s 5
Any transmission due to a threshold overrun restarts the interval.
The input value 0 deactivates this function.

Unit - (none)
Active Yes / No No
The MODBUS TCP protocol identifies a source-oriented parameterization. That the specifications of the data
source apply. Accordingly, the parameterization of the transmission direction of the remote station must be
announced.

DGB-004-1.04
36.15. SETTING RECOMMENDATIONS ANALOG VALUE TRANSMISSION

In order to load the station bus as little as possible, the setting values for threshold value, additive threshold value
and interval should always be as large as possible. If the resulting transmission accuracy is insufficient, the setting
value must be refined in consultation with the remote stations according to the parameter description.
Finally, the station bus load resulting from the setting values must always be checked!
Preset value for each

FUP output to be Explanation
transferred
With a threshold of 3 set, for example, a new telegram is only issued when e.g. the transformer voltage has
changed from 100 to 103 V (or from 100 to 97 V) slower than the task cycle time.
Example 1: Task cycle time = 5 ms. Nominal secondary voltage = 100 V. Threshold value = 3. If, in the course of a
Threshold switch-off process, the voltage is linearly reduced to 0 within 500 ms, 33 telegrams are sent.
Example 2: Task cycle time = 5 ms. Nominal secondary voltage = 100 V. Threshold = 1  100 telegrams
Recommendation: 1 .. 3% of the nominal value
A specification for 'Additive Threshold' requires a thorough understanding of the parameter description.
ATTENTION: A faulty parameterization always causes an overload of the station bus interface up to the failure of
all connections!
Additive threshold Recommendation: 150% of the nominal value for values that are formed at a distance of 40 .. 60 ms.
Analogously: 300% of the nominal value for values that are formed at a distance of 20 .. 30 ms or
75% of the nominal value for values that are formed at a distance of 80 .. 120 ms, etc.
Interval A telegram is sent cyclically in the set interval if the value has changed only below the set threshold value.

DGB-004-1.04
Recommended setting for measured value transmission to displays for minimum station bus load
In the following table no recommendation for an additive threshold value is given, as these specifications must
always be adapted to the actual application and a misadjustment can lead to overloading of the station bus.
Variable to be Additive
transferred threshold

1 or 5

1 or 5
Transformer- Active,
0.1 × nominal
value
power
Generator- Active,
0.1 × nominal
value
power
cos phi 0,02 0 30 s
0.2 × A recommendation on the threshold value for derived variables is

Setpoints of a control
0.1 × nominal
transmitted as a 0 30 s
value
measured value

DGB-004-1.04
Setting recommendation for measured value transmission to process-relevant devices

for minimal station bus load
The following table divides the intervals so that less frequently occurring transmissions are not time-shared with the
more common transmissions: 14 s / 5 s
Electrical variable to Additive

be transferred threshold

1 or 5

1 or 5
Transformer- Active,
0.1 × nominal
value
power
Generator- Active, 0.1 × nominal value in case these variables are not used for control
0.1 × nominal purposes.
value
power 0.02 × nominal value for control purposes
cos phi 0,02 0 30 s
0.2 × A recommendation on the threshold value for derived variables is

0.01 ×
Setpoints nominal 0 14 s
value

DGB-004-1.04
36.16. SETTINGS FOR DIRECTION OF RECEPTION (CONTROL DIRECTION)

In this field, the telegram transmissions for the receive direction are defined and parameterized.
A received data point value is always taken over during the next run of the FUP task in which the data point is
used.
A received command telegram always sets the associated data point (data type: Bool) to ON for one task cycle.
A received setpoint telegram sets the associated data point (data type: Float) to a value that can only be changed
by another setpoint telegram.
The MODBUS TCP protocol identifies a source-oriented parameterization. That the specifications of the data
source apply. Accordingly, the settings of the remote station must be known for a parameterization of the receive
direction.
Valid value
range
The data type of the allocated data point defined in the function diagram
of the HIPASE device is displayed. Depending on the data type, the
Data type o - Modbus TCP client must access the data type with the correct Modbus
TCP function code. See chapter: 33.17 MODBUS function codes,
overview
The address specification depends on the data type of the data point to
Address 32768 .. 65535 0
be sent. See chap .: 32.16 MODBUS function codes, overview
Drop-Down list
There are no restrictions for clients. Each client can write to every data
Stations of all valid All
point.
stations

Unit - (none)
Active Yes / No No

DGB-004-1.04
36.17. RANKING OF 32 BIT ANALOG VALUES

The following example shows how the MODBUS TCP protocol can transfer 32 bit values (Float, Int, UInt).
Function code FC16 is used to receive analog values and Function code FC04 is used to send analog values. Both
function codes only support the transmission of 16-bit values.
The HIPASE system therefore allocates two MODBUS TCP addresses for each 32-bit value to be sent and
received. The address given in the window "Modbus TCP" and the following, next higher, address.
Example: Two 32-bit analog values are received via MODBUS TCP, linked with each other and sent again via
MODBUS TCP.
In the function diagram, two FBD inputs and one FBD output are created.
The created FBD inputs and the FBD output are assigned in the Configuration, Communication, Modbus window
as follows:
1 The FBD output "Float to Modbus (FC04)" has been pulled into the "Transmit direction" field and defined by
selecting address 4096 for sending with function code FC04. The address 4096 is the first address in the
range 4096 .. 32767. All data points that were defined with an address of this area are thereby sent with
FC04.

DGB-004-1.04
In this example, the next address 4097 may not be used because the HIPASE system requires two
addresses in the range of FC04 for sending 32-bit values with the FC04 function code. The next higher
address is always automatically used by the HIPASE system.
2 The two FBD inputs "Float from Modbus 1 (FC16)" and "Float from Modbus 2 (FC16)" were pulled into the
"Receive direction" field and defined by selecting address 32768 and 32770 for reception with function
code 16. Address 32768 is the first address in the range 32768 .. 65535. All data points defined with an
address of this range are thereby received with FC16.
In this example, the FBD input "Float from Modbus 2 (FC16)" has been defined with the address 32770,
since the HIPASE system for the FBD input "Float from Modbus 2 (FC16) has automatically assigned the
address 32769, in order to use two 16-bit telegrams to transmit a 32-bit value.
Receiving 32-bit values with the FC16 function code always requires two addresses in the range of FC16.
Therefore, the next higher address is always automatically used by the HIPASE system.
36.18. MODBUS TCP - OVERVIEW OF FUNCTION CODES IN HIPASE SYSTEM

Sending or receiving data via MODBUS TCP protocol is done by configuring inputs and outputs of the function
block diagram and activation of the MODBUS TCP protocol in the HIPASE engineering tool.
The MODBUS TCP function code necessary for the transmission is automatically set based on the data type (i.e.
“float”) and the type of configuration (FUP input or output). The PDU addresses in the MODBUS TCP memory map
will be automatically created and documented by HIPASE engineering tool.
36.19. FC 01 READ COILS – READ BOOLEAN FUP INPUT

Reading out a Boolean FBD input previously described with FC 05 or FC 06.
Data type Possible PDU address
FC 01 Read Coils Bool 32768 .. 65535
Error handling
Exception Code 01 Is sent when there is not a single bit in the bit receiving area according to configuration.
Exception Code 02 Is sent when there is not a single bit in the bit receiving area according to configuration.
Is sent according to the specification, if

 the number of bits in the query is 0,
Exception Code 03
 or the number of bits in the query is higher than 0x07D0
(decimal 2000).

DGB-004-1.04
36.20. FC 02 READ DISCRETE INPUTS – READ BOOLEAN FUP OUTPUT
FC02 Read Discrete Inputs Bool 0 .. 32767
Error handling
Exception Code 01 Is sent when there is not a single bit in the bit sending area according to configuration.

 the start address in the query references a non-configured bit,
Exception Code 02  (start address + number of bits – 1) references a non-
configured bit
 there are no configured bits in the queried area.

 the number of bits in the query is 0,
Exception Code 03
 or the number of bits in the query is higher than 0x07D0
(decimal 2000).
36.21. FC 03 READ HOLDING REGISTERS – READ BOOLEAN OR ANALOG FUP

INPUT
The value of a single or several, Boolean or analog FUP inputs can be read by a client.
Bool 2048 .. 4095

FC03 Read Holding
Integer,Unsigned Integer, Float, BitMask 32768 .. 65535
Error handling
Is sent when there is not a single register in the bit receiving area and the register receiving area
Exception Code 01
according to configuration.

 the start address in the query references a non-configured register,
Exception Code 02
 (start address + number of registers – 1) references a non-configured register,
 there are no configured registers in the queried area.

Exception Code 03  the number of registers in the query is 0,
 or the number of registers in the query is higher than 0x007D (decimal 125).

DGB-004-1.04
36.22. FC 04 READ INPUT REGISTERS – READ BOOLEAN OR ANALOG FUP

OUTPUT
The value of a single or several, Boolean or analog FUP outputs can be read by a client.
Bool 0 .. 2047
FC04 Read Input Registers
Integer,Unsigned Integer, Float,
4096 .. 32767
BitMask
Error handling
Is sent when there is not a single readable register in the bit sending area and the register sending
Exception Code 01
area according to configuration.

 the start address in the query references a non-configured register,
Exception Code 02  (start address + number of registers – 1) references a non-configured register,
 there are no configured registers in the queried area.
A referenced register must contain at least 1 configured bit in the bit address area.

Exception Code 03  the number of registers in the query is 0,
 or the number of registers in the query is higher than 0x007D (dezimal 125) ist.
36.23. FC 05 WRITE SINGLE COIL – WRITE BOOLEAN FUP INPUT

The value of a single Boolean FUP input can be written by a client.
Possible PDU address
FC05 Write Single Coil 32768 .. 65535
Error handling
Is sent if there is no modifiable bit in the bit receiving area according to configuration, or if the client
Exception Code 01
has no „Write“ access
Exception Code 02 Is sent according to specification if the address in the telegram references a non-configured bit.
Exception Code 03 Is sent according to specification if the value does not equal 0x0000 or 0xFF00.

DGB-004-1.04
36.24. FC 06 WRITE SINGLE REGISTER – WRITE BOOLEAN FUP INPUT

The value of one or more Boolean FUP inputs can be written by a client.
FC06 Write Single Register Bool 2048 .. 4095
Error handling
Is sent if there is no modifiable register in the bit receiving area or in the register receiving area
Exception Code 01
according to configuration, or if the client has no „Write“ access
Is sent according to specification if the address in the telegram references a register which does not
Exception Code 02
contain a configured bit in the bit receiving area .
Exception Code 03 Does not exist for this function code, since n ovale can be lower than 0 ot higher than 0xFFFF.
Is sent if a register in the register receiving area is referenced, where the register is only part of a
Exception Code 04
value. The thus not fully received value cannot be processed.
36.25. FC 08 DIAGNOSTICS
In the HIPASE system the test function is implemented with sub-function code 00 (Return Query Data). This test
function is a response to the FC 08 telegram from the client and can be used as a diagnostic function to test a
client's connection to the MODBUS.
36.26. FC 15 WRITE MULTIPLE COILS – WRITE BOOLEAN FUP INPUTS

One or more Boolean FUP inputs can be written by a client.
In practice, FC 06 or FC 16 are mostly used because of their easy handling. Nevertheless, FC 15 is made available
for this purpose.
FC15 Write Multiple Coils Bool 32768 .. 65535
Error handling
Is sent if there is no modifiable bit in the bit receiving area according to configuration, or if the client
Exception Code 01
has no „Write“ access

 the start address in the command references a non-configured bit,
Exception Code 02
 (start address + number of bits – 1) references a non-configured bit
 There are no configured bits in the area to be written

DGB-004-1.04
Is sent according to specification if the number of bits equals 0x0000 or is higher than 0x07B0
Exception Code 03
(decimal 1968), or if the number of bytes does not correspond to (number of bits + 7) / 8. .
36.27. FC 16 WRITE MULTIPLE REGISTERS – WRITE BOOLEAN OR ANALOG FUP

INPUTS
One or more, Boolean or analog, FUP inputs can be written by a client.
For the MODBUS client to be able to write an analog FUP input, an FC 16 telegram must always contain LOW and
HIGH register values of a FUP input.
Bool 2048 .. 4095

FC16 Write Multiple Registers
Integer,Unsigned Integer, Float,
32768 .. 65535
BitMask
Error handling
Is sent if there is no modifiable register in the bit receiving area or in the register receiving area
Exception Code 01
according to configuration, or if the client has no „Write“ access

 the start address in the command references a non-configured register,
Exception Code 02  (start address + number of registers – 1) references a non-configured register
 there are no configured registers in the area to be written
A referenced register must contain at least 1 configured bit in the bit address area.
is sent according to the specification if the number of registers equals 0x0000 or is higher than
Exception Code 03
0x007B (decimal 123), or if the number of bytes does not correspond to the number of registers x 2.
Exception Code 04 Is sent if the command wouldn’t fully update a value with a width of more than 16 bits

DGB-004-1.04
37. LED INDICATORS AND ACCEPT BUTTON
On the device there are 2 sets each of 4 LEDs V1 .. V4, which are identical in their function: The display on the
front panel below the touch panel is synchronized and identical to that on the terminal side of the CP-300.
On Touch panel side Terminal side
Below the touch panel are 4 LEDs On the CP-300 there are 4 LEDs (V1 .. V4) between the interface connectors
X5 and X6 by which many states are displayed quickly and clearly.
V1 .. V4 by which many states are displayed quickly and The accept button S1is placed directly above them.
clearly.
The four icons on the front panel below the touch panel are also viewed bottom right in the online connected
HIPASE engineering, which light up in the appropriate color in the active state, otherwise appear in gray color:
NOTE: Deliveries of the touch panel front had the following physical appearance between the beginning of the year
2016 until the middle of the year 2019 with the same functionality as today:

DGB-004-1.04
Deliveries to early 2016 had the following physical appearance with the same functionality as today:
On Touch panel side Terminal side
37.1. DEFINITION OF LEDS V1 .. V4

The two LEDs V1 and V2 are responsible for displaying the device status.
LEDs for device status OPERATION - V1 FAULT - V2
Color of LED GREEN RED
Position on device front below touch panel 1. LED from the left 2. LED from the left
Position on CP-300 (terminal side) Top left Top right
Symbol on device front below touch panel Hook X
Letter on CP-300 (terminal side) O F
The two LEDs V3 and V4 are responsible for displaying the process status.
ALARM - V3 TRIP - V4
LEDs for process status
(until early 2016 "SAFETY-Mode")
Color of LED YELLOW RED
Position on device front below touch panel 3. LED from the left 4. LED from the left
Position on CP-300 (terminal side) Bottom left Bottom right
Callsign (Shield between 2016 and 2019; until Triangle (until early 2016: Shield)
Symbol on device front below touch panel
early 2016: anticlockwise arrow)
Letter on CP-300 (terminal side) A (until early 2016: “S”) T

DGB-004-1.04
37.2. DEFINED STATES OF LEDS
Behaviour of LED V1 “OPERATION” (green) Meaning
Steady light Device ready, project loaded successfully and in operation.
Slow flashing Device ready, but no project yet loaded - "loading status"
Fast flashing Device ready and project loading in progress
Fast flashing alternately with red Fault LED for

30 seconds. After that changing to "loading Project loading error
status"
Off Device not ready
Behaviour of LED V2 “FAULT” (red) Meaning
Steady light Device booting or Device "Fatal Error". For more information, see chapter Error processing.
Slow flashing during steady light of Operation-

"Minor Error"
LED
Fast flashing Device ready and project loading in progress
Fast flashing alternately with green Operation

LED for 30 seconds. After that changing to Project loading error
"loading status"
Behaviour of LED V3 “ALARM” (yellow) Meaning
"Unacknowledged warning" *) (resistant against acknowledgment). This LED is activated for

specific projects via the Function Block Diagram and "remembers" a positive edge. Should be
stored on reset and power cycle; erasable per project loading, Firmware loading and
Steady light Acknowledge (tool or touch panel).
*) Definition of "warning": A protective function has exceeded the pickup stage of a non-
operational shutdown of a primarily technical device by the HIPASE device.
Behaviour of LED V4 “TRIP” (red) Meaning
"Unacknowledged trip" *) (resistant against acknowledgment). This LED is activated for

specific projects via the Function Block Diagram and "remembers" a positive edge. Should be
stored on reset and power cycle; erasable per project loading, Firmware loading and
Steady light Acknowledge (tool or touch panel).
*) Definition of "trip": Non-operational shutdown of a primarily technical device by the HIPASE
device.

DGB-004-1.04
37.3. ACCEPT BUTTON S1

Terminal sided on CP-300 board the 4 LEDs V1 .. V4 and a small accept button S1 are located.
On touch display of the touch panel a corresponding soft key can be actuated during operation of HIPASE device.
Meaning
Name of button S1 RESET (Accept)
Position on CP-300 (terminal side) Above of 4 LEDs V1 .. V4
Letter on CP-300 (terminal side) R
Function Acknowledging latched ALARM LED, is a confirmation of the entire alarm list.

DGB-004-1.04
38. ERROR PROCESSING
38.1. DISTINCTION ACCORDING TO OUTPUT FORM

Error messages are made available in various forms for further utilization:
Medium of error message Physical interface Annotation
LEDs on TP-9xx
Binary, optical indication See Chapter LED Indicators and Accept Button
LEDs on CP-300
See chap. Error! Reference source not found.

Electrical relay contact "Device
on PS-300 resp. PS-500 resp. chap. Error! Reference source not
error"
found.
Plain text output on the touch Hierachich structured descriptions of operating

Touch Display on TP-9xx
display and error conditions in the form of plain text.
Electrical or optical interfaces X1, X3, X7, X8 on

Message via station bus protocol
CP-300
Output via HIPASE Engineeriung

PC via electrical interface X6 (or X7) on CP-300
Tool
Any assignable relay contacts on DX-010, DO-010 See chap. 20.3. Digital outputs
38.2. DISTINCTION BY ORIGIN
 Self-test on PowerUp
 Self-monitoring during operation
 Project loading mode
 Hardware Test mode
38.3. SELF-TEST ON POWERUP
LED
Type of error detected Digital output “device error”
Name Color Behaviour
Fatal error / C-CPU was stopped
(Processor built-in) FLASH Memory
RAM
EEPROM Write

DGB-004-1.04
Type of error detected LED Digital output “device error”
Ext. FLASH Memory (on C-CPU)
DSP Init Error
DSP Check Sum
DSP Load Error
HW-PZ mismatch Firmware-Version
HW-PZ mismatch Jedec-Version
Firmware-Version mismatch Jedec-Version
38.4. HARDWARE TEST MODE
Type of test Signalling
LED Test
(extended) RAM test
Test of Binary outputs
Test of Binary inputs
Test of the transformer inputs

(Current and voltage, fast analog inputs)
Test of DC inputs
(slow analog inputs)
EEPROM Test
Interface test
(Serial interface)
38.5. BEHAVIOR OF VARIOUS OUTPUTS IN CASE OF ERROR
DO / FSO AO GBPON GI1 .. GI6

Type of error
GBPOFF
Fatal error / C-CPU was stopped
(Processor built-in) FLASH Memory
RAM
EEPROM Write

DGB-004-1.04
DO / FSO AO GBPON GI1 .. GI6

Type of error
GBPOFF
Ext. FLASH Memory (on C-CPU)
DSP Init Error
DSP Check Sum
DSP Load Error
HW-PZ mismatch Firmware-Version
HW-PZ mismatch Jedec-Version
Firmware-Version mismatch Jedec-Version
38.6. BEHAVIOR OF VARIOUS INPUTS AND OUTPUTS IN LOADING MODE

To be continued
38.7. REMEDY AND CORRECTION OF ERRORS
To be continued

DGB-004-1.04
39. APPLICATION EXCITATION
For the control of synchronous machines with and without exciter machines there are following functionalities
available in HIPASE system:
 Formation of machine values (voltage, current actual value, space vector, ...)
 Gate pulse generation
 Thyristor failure monitoring
 Diode failure monitoring for AC exciter machine
For this functionality the following modules are required in HIPASE device:
Transformer board Application Board Application Board Excitation AB-310

Functionaly
TR-310 Excitation AB-310 + Application module AM-010
Formation of machine values 
Gate pulse generation  
Thyristor failure monitoring 
Diode failure monitoring  
This hardware-related functions are documented as POUs below.

DGB-004-1.04
A complete configuration of a excitation project includes:
Chronological sequence of necessary configuration steps in HIPASE engineering tool
1. HW assembly of HIPASE device with TR-310, AB-310 and optionally AM-010
2. Activating the software licenses for the required communication protocols
3. Activating the software licenses SGE-001 Automatic Voltage Regulator and optional SGE-003 diode failure detection
Completed project information with preset "Excitation" or "Excitaiton with Protection" in the register “Project”, ribbon group " Application ",
4.
menu "Project Information", input filed “Application”
Assigning of function block diagrams and of POUs to appropriate tasks with cycle time in register “Project”, "Configuration" Ribbon Group
5.
"Application" menu "Task Assignment".
6. Setting parameters in register "Excitation" Ribbon Group "General", menu "Settings".
7. POU “EST“ Calculated Machine values and parameters Transformer Board TR-310
8 POU “GateControlOut” Signal inputs of gate pulse generation for Application Board Excitation AB-310
Parameters and Signal outputs of

9. POU “GateControlIn” Application Board Excitation AB-310
gate pulse generation for
10. POU “GateControlSet” Control inputs of gate pulse generation for Application Board Excitation AB-310
Control inputs, parameters and signal outputs of Application Board Excitation AB-310 +
11. POU “BridgeSupervision”
thyristor failure monitoring for Application Module AM-010
Control inputs, parameters and signal outputs of diode

12. POU “DiodeSupervision” Application Board Excitation AB-310
failure monitoring at AC exciter machines for
POU Control input for frequency preset of diode failure

13. Application Board Excitation AB-310
“DiodeSupervisionSet” monitoring for
Points 6 .. 13 are described in detail in the following chapters.

DGB-004-1.04
39.1. EXCITATION SETTINGS

In HIPASE engineering tool, the most important parameters for configuring an excitation were summarized in
Register "excitation" Ribbon Group "General", menu "Settings".
This input area is only available after preset "excitation" or "excitation with protection" in the register "Project"
Ribbon group "General", the menu "Project Information" input field "application" and after successful HW assembly.
39.2. INPUT AREA FOR VECTOR MODEL
These settings are selectable after licensing the software license SGE-001 EXC Automatic Voltage Regulator.

DGB-004-1.04
From the electrical measurement signals applied to the converter module TR-310, the vectors for the generator
voltage and the generator current are formed by means of space vector transformation (dq0) in order to calculate
all necessary signals for the application excitation.
Default Setting Description

Name of Parameter Value setting range
value step size
Specification of the nominal frequency of the

synchronous machine according to the type plate.
Grid rated frequency 3 .. 150 Hz 50 Hz 0,001 Hz
Is used as a substitute if no frequency value can be
derived from the applied measuring signals.
Specification of the nominal cos phi of the

synchronous machine according to the type plate.
Rated cos phi 0 .. 1 0.9
This value is provided as system data point "Nominal
Cos (phi)" for further use in the function plan.
Indication of the voltage input channel on the TR-310

Grid voltage VT-01 .. VT-08 - - converter module for the single-phase detection of the
mains voltage
1-phase machine Selection of the version of the synchronous machine,

3-phase
Machine type - whether single or three-phase according to the type
3-phase machine machine
plate.
33Y - 3 x CT, 3 x VT,

phase voltage / star
connection
33D - 3 x CT, 3 x VT,
Chained voltage / delta
connection
32D - 3 x CT, 2 x VT,
This selection is only available if 3-phase machine was
previously selected under "Machine":
connection
For details on the set measuring method see: Chap.
23Y - 2 x CT, 3 x VT,
35.3, "Measuring method excitation - connection of the
transformer board TR-310"
connection
Measurement method Off - For single-phase synchronous machines there is only
13Y - 1 x CT, 3 x VT,
one measuring method and this is therefore
automatically activated in the HIPASE system.
connection
Wiring diagram see: Chap. 35.3, "Measuring method
13D - 1 x CT, 3 x VT,
excitation - Connection of the transformer board TR-
310
connection
12D - 1 x CT, 2 x VT,
connection
11D - 1 x CT, 1 x VT,
connection
Routing of the current input channels used on the TR-

310 board for the respective phase.
For the correct function of the selected measuring
Generator current 1 .. 3 CT-01 .. CT-12 - - method, all current transformer inputs used must be
phased in the correct phase.
See: Measuring method - connection of the transducer
module TR-310

DGB-004-1.04
Default Setting Description

Name of Parameter Value setting range
value step size
Routing the voltage input channels used on the TR-

310 board for each phase.
Requires the assembly of the HIPASE device with an
assembly TR-310.
Generator voltage 1 .. 3 VT-01 .. VT-08 - - For proper operation of the selected measurement
method, all used voltage transformer inputs must be
phased in the right way.
module TR-310
Routing of the current input channels used on the TR-

310 module for cross-current detection in parallel
machines.
Requires the assembly of the HIPASE device with an
assembly TR-310.
Cross current 1 .. 4 CT-01 .. CT-12 - -
For the correct function of the selected measuring
method, all current transformer inputs used must be
phased in the correct phase.
module TR-310

DGB-004-1.04
39.3. MEASUREMENT METHOD EXCITATION - CONNECTION OF TRANSFORMER

BOARD TR-310
The following circuit diagrams show all possible variants of circuit variants of the voltage and current transformer
inputs for the measurement value formation of the parameters of the synchronous machine for generator voltage,
mains voltage, generator current, cross compensation and the quantities derived therefrom.
The selected measuring method is selected in the "Excitation" ribbon group under "Settings" in the HIPASE
Engineering Tool and requires an already placed "TR-310" transducer assembly under "HW placement":
1. Selection of the type of synchronous machine. For "1-phase machine" only one measuring method is
possible and therefore no further selection is necessary. For "3-phase machine" several circuit variants
are available.
2. Under "Measuring method" the suitable circuit variant is selected for "3-phase machine". The following
circuit diagrams show the respective system topology of the voltage and current hikes as well as the
corresponding fields for the routings and the possible connections to the TR-310 transformer board.
3. Determination of the Routing: The selection fields "Generator current L ...", "Generator voltage L ..." and
"Cross-current L2, Machine ..." are assigned in the circuit diagrams to certain phases for the voltage and
current measurement.
These selection fields in the HIPASE Engineering Tool can be used to specify the voltage or current
transformer input of the HIPASE device via which the voltage or current of the respective phase is to be
measured.
In the example: is e.g. the phase current of the phase L1 is measured via the current input of the
transformer board TR-310 in the housing slot "A", on the terminal block X1 via the input CT-01. Whether

DGB-004-1.04
the "1 A" or "5 A" input of the current input is to be used is defined in the "Configuration" ribbon group
under "Module parameters" and "Connection terminal".
39.3.1. 1-PHASE MACHINE
Settings in the HIPASE Engineering Tool in the ribbon group "Excitation", "Settings Excitation":
Machine type: 1-phase machine
Measuring method: -
Under "Generator current L1", "Generator voltage L1 / L1-L2" and "Cross-current L2, Machine 1 ... 4", the current
and voltage converter inputs of the HIPASE device to which the current and voltage transformers of the system
have been connected must be announced.
The selection of whether the "1 A" or "5 A" input of the current input has been used must be announced in the
"Configuration" ribbon group under "Module parameters" and "Connection terminal" for the TR-310 transformer
board.
TR-310 Strommesseingänge TR-310 Spannungsmesseingänge

HIPASE Eingang Eingang
A / X1 Klemmen Bezeichnung A / X2 Klemmen Bezeichnung
Klemmleiste: Auswahl der TR-310 Strom-
TR310 und Spannungsmess- CT-01 X1/01A 1A VT-01 X2/01 Phase
eingänge im
A / X1 CT-01 X1/01B 5A VT-01 X2/02 Neutral
HIPASE Engineering Tool CT-01 X1/01C COM
unter VT-02 X2/03 Phase
L N L N „Einstellungen Erregung“ CT-02 X1/02A 1A VT-02 X2/04 Neutral
in den Feldern: CT-02 X1/02B 5A
CT-02 X1/02C COM VT-03 X2/05 Phase
COM VT-03 X2/06 Neutral
„Generatorstrom L1"
1A oder 5A CT-03 X1/03A 1A
CT-03 X1/03B 5A VT-04 X2/07 Phase
CT-03 X1/03C COM VT-04 X2/08 Neutral
CT-04 X1/04A 1A VT-05 X2/09 Phase

CT-04 X1/04B 5A VT-05 X2/10 Neutral
CT-04 X1/04C COM
VT-06 X2/11 Phase
CT-05 X1/05A 1A VT-06 X2/12 Neutral
CT-05 X1/05B 5A
VT-07 X2/14 Neutral
COM CT-06 X1/06A 1A
„Querstrom L2, Maschine 1...4" CT-06 X1/06B 5A VT-08 X2/15 Phase
1A oder 5A
Querstromkompensation CT-06 X1/06C COM VT-08 X2/16 Neutral
CT-07 X1/07A 1A
CT-07 X1/07B 5A
Klemmleiste: CT-07 X1/07C COM
Wirkleistungsrichtung TR310
CT-08 X1/08A 1A
A / X2
CT-08 X1/08B 5A
Phase CT-08 X1/08C COM
Generatorspannung L1 / L1-L2"
Neutral
CT-09 X1/09A 1A
CT-09 X1/09B 5A
CT-09 X1/09C COM
CT-10 X1/10A 1A
CT-10 X1/10B 5A
CT-10 X1/10C COM
CT-11 X1/11A 1A
CT-11 X1/11B 5A
CT-11 X1/11C COM
CT-12 X1/12A 1A
Phase CT-12 X1/12B 5A
„Netzspannung“ CT-12 X1/12C COM
Netz Neutral
Auswahl unter „Einstellungen Erregung“

1~ 1~ Maschine: 1-Phasenmaschine
Messmethode: keine weitere Auswahl
Geregelte
Parallelmaschine 1...4
Maschine

DGB-004-1.04
39.3.2. 3-PHASE MACHINE, 33Y - 3 X CT, 3 X VT, PHASE VOLTAGE / STAR CONNECTION
Measurement method: 33Y - 3 x CT, 3 x VT, phase voltage / star connection
Under "Generator current L ...", "Generator voltage L ..." and "Cross-current L2, Machine 1 ... 4", the current and
voltage converter inputs of the HIPASE device to which the current and voltage transformers of the system have
been connected must be announced.
board.

eingänge im CT-01 X1/01B 5A VT-01 X2/02 Neutral
A / X1 HIPASE Engineering Tool CT-01 X1/01C COM
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 „Einstellungen Erregung“ CT-02 X1/02A 1A VT-02 X2/04 Neutral
CT-03 X1/03B 5A VT-04 X2/07 Phase
COM
„Generatorstrom L2" CT-04 X1/04A 1A VT-05 X2/09 Phase
1A oder 5A
CT-04 X1/04C COM
VT-06 X2/11 Phase
COM CT-05 X1/05A 1A VT-06 X2/12 Neutral
1A oder 5A „Generatorstrom L3"
CT-05 X1/05B 5A
VT-07 X2/14 Neutral
COM CT-06 X1/06A 1A
1A oder 5A
CT-07 X1/07A 1A
CT-07 X1/07B 5A
Wirkleistungsrichtung
TR310
A / X2 CT-08 X1/08A 1A
CT-08 X1/08B 5A
Neutral
CT-09 X1/09A 1A
CT-09 X1/09B 5A
CT-09 X1/09C COM
Phase
„Generatorspannung e L2 / L2-L3" CT-10 X1/10A 1A
Neutral
CT-10 X1/10B 5A
CT-10 X1/10C COM
Phase CT-11 X1/11A 1A

Neutral „Generatorspannung L3 / L3-L1" CT-11 X1/11B 5A
CT-11 X1/11C COM
CT-12 X1/12A 1A
Netz Neutral

Messmethode: 33Y – 3 x CT, 3 x VT, Phasenspannung / Sternschaltung
Geregelte
Maschine

DGB-004-1.04
Measurement method: 13Y - 1 x CT, 3 x VT, phase voltage / star connection
Under "Generator current L2", "Generator voltage L ..." and "Cross-current L2, Machine 1 ... 4", the current and
been connected must be made known.
board.

VT-03 X2/06 Neutral
CT-03 X1/03A 1A
CT-03 X1/03B 5A VT-04 X2/07 Phase
COM
1A oder 5A
CT-04 X1/04C COM
VT-06 X2/11 Phase
CT-05 X1/05B 5A
VT-07 X2/14 Neutral
COM CT-06 X1/06A 1A
1A oder 5A
CT-07 X1/07A 1A
CT-07 X1/07B 5A
TR310
A / X2 CT-08 X1/08A 1A
CT-08 X1/08B 5A
Neutral
CT-09 X1/09A 1A
CT-09 X1/09B 5A
CT-09 X1/09C COM
Phase
Neutral
CT-10 X1/10B 5A
CT-10 X1/10C COM

CT-11 X1/11C COM
CT-12 X1/12A 1A
Netz Neutral

Messmethode: 13Y – 1 x CT, 3 x VT, Phasenspannung / Sternschaltung
Geregelte
Maschine

DGB-004-1.04
39.3.4. 3-PHASE MACHINE, 33D - 3 X CT, 3 X VT, CHAINED VOLTAGE / DELTA CONNECTION
Measurement method: 33D - 3 x CT, 3 x VT, Chained voltage / delta connection
board.

CT-03 X1/03B 5A VT-04 X2/07 Phase
COM
1A oder 5A
CT-04 X1/04C COM
VT-06 X2/11 Phase
CT-05 X1/05B 5A
VT-07 X2/14 Neutral
COM CT-06 X1/06A 1A
1A oder 5A
CT-07 X1/07A 1A
CT-07 X1/07B 5A
TR310
A / X2 CT-08 X1/08A 1A
CT-08 X1/08B 5A
Neutral
CT-09 X1/09A 1A
CT-09 X1/09B 5A
CT-09 X1/09C COM
Phase
Neutral
CT-10 X1/10B 5A
CT-10 X1/10C COM

CT-11 X1/11C COM
CT-12 X1/12A 1A
Netz Neutral

Messmethode: 33D – 3 x CT, 3 x VT, Verkettete Spannung / Dreieckschaltung
Geregelte
Maschine

DGB-004-1.04
board.

CT-03 X1/03B 5A VT-04 X2/07 Phase
COM
1A oder 5A
CT-04 X1/04C COM
VT-06 X2/11 Phase
CT-05 X1/05B 5A
VT-07 X2/14 Neutral
COM CT-06 X1/06A 1A
1A oder 5A
CT-07 X1/07A 1A
CT-07 X1/07B 5A
TR310
A / X2 CT-08 X1/08A 1A
CT-08 X1/08B 5A
Neutral
CT-09 X1/09A 1A
CT-09 X1/09B 5A
CT-09 X1/09C COM
Phase
Neutral
CT-10 X1/10B 5A
CT-10 X1/10C COM
CT-11 X1/11A 1A
CT-11 X1/11B 5A
CT-11 X1/11C COM
CT-12 X1/12A 1A
Netz Neutral

Geregelte
Maschine

DGB-004-1.04
Measurement method: 13D - 1 x CT, 3 x VT, phase voltage / star connection
board.

VT-03 X2/06 Neutral
CT-03 X1/03A 1A
CT-03 X1/03B 5A VT-04 X2/07 Phase
COM
1A oder 5A
CT-04 X1/04C COM
VT-06 X2/11 Phase
CT-05 X1/05B 5A
VT-07 X2/14 Neutral
COM CT-06 X1/06A 1A
1A oder 5A
CT-07 X1/07A 1A
CT-07 X1/07B 5A
TR310
A / X2 CT-08 X1/08A 1A
CT-08 X1/08B 5A
Neutral
CT-09 X1/09A 1A
CT-09 X1/09B 5A
CT-09 X1/09C COM
Phase
Neutral
CT-10 X1/10B 5A
CT-10 X1/10C COM

CT-11 X1/11C COM
CT-12 X1/12A 1A
Netz Neutral

Geregelte
Maschine

DGB-004-1.04
board.

VT-03 X2/06 Neutral
CT-03 X1/03A 1A
CT-03 X1/03B 5A VT-04 X2/07 Phase
COM
1A oder 5A
CT-04 X1/04C COM
VT-06 X2/11 Phase
CT-05 X1/05B 5A
VT-07 X2/14 Neutral
COM CT-06 X1/06A 1A
1A oder 5A
CT-07 X1/07A 1A
CT-07 X1/07B 5A
TR310
A / X2 CT-08 X1/08A 1A
CT-08 X1/08B 5A
Neutral
CT-09 X1/09A 1A
CT-09 X1/09B 5A
CT-09 X1/09C COM
Phase
Neutral
CT-10 X1/10B 5A
CT-10 X1/10C COM
CT-11 X1/11A 1A
CT-11 X1/11B 5A
CT-11 X1/11C COM
CT-12 X1/12A 1A
Netz Neutral

Geregelte
Maschine

DGB-004-1.04
Under "Generator current L2", "Generator voltage L1 / L1-L2" and "Cross-current L2, Machine 1 ... 4", the current
and voltage transformer inputs of the HIPASE device to which the current and voltage transformers of the system
have been connected must be announced.
board.

VT-03 X2/06 Neutral
CT-03 X1/03A 1A
CT-03 X1/03B 5A VT-04 X2/07 Phase
COM
1A oder 5A
CT-04 X1/04C COM
VT-06 X2/11 Phase
CT-05 X1/05B 5A
VT-07 X2/14 Neutral
COM CT-06 X1/06A 1A
1A oder 5A
CT-07 X1/07A 1A
CT-07 X1/07B 5A
TR310
A / X2 CT-08 X1/08A 1A
CT-08 X1/08B 5A
Neutral
CT-09 X1/09A 1A
CT-09 X1/09B 5A
CT-09 X1/09C COM
CT-10 X1/10B 5A
CT-10 X1/10C COM
CT-11 X1/11A 1A
CT-11 X1/11B 5A
CT-11 X1/11C COM
CT-12 X1/12A 1A
Netz Neutral

Geregelte
Maschine

DGB-004-1.04
39.4. SETTING AREA FOR GATE PULSE GENERATION

These settings are selectable by licensing the software license SGE 001 EXC Automatic Voltage Regulator.
Valid for the gate control mode 'thyristor normal operation'. It is a basically distinguished in 3- and 1-phase modes.
39.4.1. BRIDGE SCHEMES, SIGNAL AND PULSE ASSIGNMENTS
The following table shows the required signal and pulse mappings which are to be set with the POU parameters
'number of phase of thyristor bridge' and 'type of thyristor bridge’.
Number
Of Half controlled, 3-pulse thyristor
Fully controlled, Half controlled, 3-pulse thyristor
Phases: 6-pulse thyristor bridge operation in
6-pulse thyristor 6-pulse thyristor bridge operation in
value 1 = bridge operation midpoint circuit
bridge operation bridge operation Top midpoint circuit Top
3-phase Bottom Bottom
bridge
Scheme
U syn L1, L2, L3

L1, L2, L3 L1, L2, L3 L1, L2, L3 L1, L2, L3
Inputs
GI1 (L1+), GI4 (L1-) GI1 (L1+) GI4 (L1-) GI1 (L1+) GI4 (L1-)
Gate
Pulse GI2 (L2+), GI5 (L2-) GI2 (L2+) GI5 (L2-) GI2 (L2+) GI5 (L2-)
Outputs
GI3 (L3+), GI6 (L3-) GI3 (L3+) GI6 (L3-) GI3 (L3+) GI6 (L3-)
Bridge
1 = fully controlled 2 = top half 3 = bottom half 4 = midpoint top 5 = midpoint bottom
Topology

DGB-004-1.04
Number
Of Half controlled, 2-pulse thyristor
Fully controlled, Half controlled, 2-pulse thyristor
Phases: 4-pulse thyristor bridge operation in
4-pulse thyristor 4-pulse thyristor bridge operation in
value 2 = bridge operation midpoint circuit
bridge operation bridge operation Top midpoint circuit Top
1-phase Bottom Bottom
bridge
Scheme
U syn L1, L3 L1, L3

L1, L3 L1, L3 L1, L3
Inputs
Gate GI1 (L1+), GI4 (L1-) GI1 (L1+) GI4 (L1-) GI1 (L1+) GI4 (L1-)
Pulse
outputs GI3 (L3+), GI6 (L3-) GI3 (L3+) GI6 (L3-) GI3 (L3+) GI6 (L3-)
Bridge
1 = fully controlled 2 = top half 3 = bottom half 4 = midpoint top 5 = midpoint bottom
Topology
39.4.2. GATE PULSE GENERATION
For gate pulse generation in this operation mode either Single pulse, Double pulse or Picket fence can be selected
with the POU parameter 'Type of gate pulses'.
Single pulse generation: For the frequency range of thyristor voltage between 10 and 83.33 Hz the gate pulse duration is fixed
with 1 ms. For frequencies higher than 83.33 Hz the gate pulse duration is fixed with 30 °el of thyristor voltage.

DGB-004-1.04
Double pulse generation: For the frequency range of thyristor voltage between 10 and 83.33 Hz the gate pulse duration is fixed
with 1 ms. For frequencies higher than 83.33 Hz the gate pulse duration is fixed with 30 °el of thyristor voltage.
The second pulse of a gate pulse output is generated simultaneously to that pulse of the next gate pulse output of the other
bridge half. In case of no change of the trigger angel it is static 60°el. In case of a change of the trigger angel this interval will
change.
Picket fence: Independently of the frequency of the thyristor voltage the duration of the first trigger pule is fixed with 50 µs. After
that a picket fence will follow with 40 kHz with a pulse periode relation of 1 : 2. This operation mode is designed for pulse
isolator amplifiers in american speaking regions. CAUTION: Do not use with LG6X !!
Default value Setting Description

Name of Parameter Data type Value setting range
step size
Defines, if the parameters are token

No hook (0): by tool over dynamically from POU
Disable parameters bool No hook (0) - GateControlSet, or if the settings
Hook (1): by POE are token by loading the project by
the tool.
Rated frequency of
Float32 10 .. 500 Hz 50 Hz 0,1 Hz Rated frequency of thyristor voltage
thyristor voltage *)
Selection of number of phases of

thyristor voltage.
Distinction between
Number of phases of Three-phase (1) Three-phase B6C, B6H Top, B6H Bottom, M3
single choice -
thyristor voltage *) Single phase (2) (1) Top, M3 Bottom
or
B2C, B2H Top, B2H Bottom, M2
Top, M2 Bottom

DGB-004-1.04

step size
Selection of bridge circuit.

Fully controlled (1) Fully controlled: B6C, B2C
Half controlled top (2) Half controlled Top: B6H Top,
B2H Top
Half controlled bottom Half controlled Bottom: B6H
Type of thyristor Fully
single choice (3) - Bottom, B2H Bottom
bridge *) controlled (1)
Midpoint Top (4) Midpoint Top: M3 Top,
M2 Top
Midpoint Bottom (5)
Midpoint Bottom: M3 Bottom,
M2 Bottom
Selection of type of gate pulses for

thyristor bridge normal operation.
Double pulse: As long as the
current firing angle does not exceed
the parameter
Double pulse (1) SecondPulseInhibitAngle, each
Double pulse thyristor is controlled with two
Type of gate pulses *) single choice Single pulse (2) -
(1) successive gate pulses.
Picket fence (3)
Single pulse: Each thyristor is
triggered with only one gate pulse.
Picket fence: Each thyristor is
triggered with consecutive gate
pulses during its conduction time.
Maximum firing angle for

parameterized double pulse
generation. If value is exceeded
Maximum firing angle
type of gate pulses is switched to
for double pulse Float32 0 .. 180 ° 90 °
single pulse trigger. When falling
generation *)
below this maximum firing angle it is
switched back to double pulse
trigger.
Optional = No (0)
Surveillance of the 1 Thyristor bridge (1) Optional = No Number of thyristor bridges to be

single choice -
thyristor bridge 2 Thyristor bridge (2) (0) monitored.
3 Thyristor bridge (3)
*) These parameters are also part of POU GateControlSet

DGB-004-1.04
39.5. SETTING AREA FOR DIODE FAILURE SUPERVISION AT AC EXCITER

MACHINE
These settings are selectable by licensing the software licenses SGE 001 EXC Automatic Voltage Regulator and
SGE-003 EXC Diode Failure Detection.
The nominal frequency of the AC excitation machine can either be entered by means of setting parameters in the
"Excitation" ribbon under "Settings excitation", "Diode monitoring of the exciter machine", "Nominal frequency of the
exciter machine" or also specified in the function diagram via the POE DiodeSupervisionSet at runtime.

step size
Defines, if the parameters are token

No hook (0): by Tool over dynamically from POU
Disable parameter bool No hook (0) - DiodeSupervisionSet, or if the
Hook (1): by POE settings are token by loading the
project by the tool.
Rated frequency of Rated frequency of output voltage

Float32 10 .. 500 Hz 50 Hz -
exciter machine *) of exciter machine.
*) These parameters are also part of POU DiodeSupervisionSet.

DGB-004-1.04
39.6. OUTPUTS AND PARAMETERS OF POU EST

This POU is open by licensing the software licenses SGE 001 EXC Automatic Voltage Regulator.
In this POU EST (Electrical System Transducer) the outputs of the calculation model of the synchronous machine
are shown in the per unit format. The nominal values of each machine must be defined as a parameter. The
formation of a 2-axis model is done by Park transformation in the interval of 250 microseconds.
39.6.1. DATA POINTS OF OUTPUTS
TimeStamp TimeSpan64 xxx ms TimeStamp of calculated values
Calculated values are checked for plausibility and reliability.

Gültig (0)
Error bool If the values exceed +/- 2 pu, the data point remains at the
Ungültig (1)
value 1 pu with a delay of 1 s.
Effective for 3-ph-measurement.

A loss of measured value is checked, for example by a
machine case, in one or more phases. The current value of
Uabs is compared to a slightly delayed copy of Uabs to
all three phases are present detect any pulsing due to zero system error.
Voltage Error bool and valid (0)
The time constant of the low-pass 1st order, which supplies
one phase is missing (1) the delayed value of Uabs, can be parameterized.
If the difference between the delayed value and the
instantaneous value is greater than U_MissingThreshold
percent (configurable) of the instantaneous value, the digital
output Voltage Error is set.

DGB-004-1.04
The Voltage Error output is kept for at least 1 / Fn * 1.1 / 2

sec (half period duration at FNom + 10%).
This functionality is only active if UAbs is greater than
U_MissingMin pu (parameterizable), and if IAbs is less than
U_IMax pu (parameterizable).
0:
Current overload bool
1:
Generator terminal voltage

Amount of the voltage space vector of the generator stator
|U| Float32 voltage. Depending on the selected voltage actual value
acquisition, the single and three phase terminal voltage is
converted to an orthogonal space vector system by Park
transformation.
Generator terminal current

Amount of the current space vector of the generator stator
|I| Float32 current. Depending on the selected current actual value
acquisition, the single and three phase terminal current is
converted to an orthogonal space vector system by Park
transformation.
Zero system component voltage

Us0 Float32
Calculated by Park transformation.
Zero system component current

Is0 Float32
Calculated by Park transformation.
Active power
P Float32 Calculated from the space vectors of input current and input
voltage.
Reactive Power
Q Float32 Calculated from the space vectors of input current and input
voltage.
Cross current compensation reactive power 1

Qc1 Float32 Reactive current of parallel generator 1. Used for reactive
power distribution.

power distribution.

power distribution.

power distribution.
 uel Float32 Rotor angel für underexcitation limiter

DGB-004-1.04
Calculated on the basis of space vector for input current,

input voltage, the equivalent circuit diagram of the
synchronous machine and the parameter "shunt reactance
for under-excitation limiter".
Rotor angel
 Float32 Calculated on the basis of space vector for input current,

input voltage, the equivalent circuit diagram of the
synchronous machine and the parameter "shunt reactance".
Rms value of the grid voltage. For measurement always the

Un Float32 selected single phase voltage input VT-0x is used. Refer to
connection diagram - application excitation.
Angular velocity of the space vector of the input voltage.

 Float32 Can be used directly for the frequency display after
conversion.
Angular velocity of the space vector of the rotor voltage. It is

PSS Float32
used as input value for various PSS types.
Highly accurate active power for use as the input variable of

the various PSS types.
Ppss Float32
It is used as input value for active power for various PSS
types.

DGB-004-1.04
39.6.2. POU PARAMETERS
Value setting Default Setting step Description

Name of Parameter Data type
range value size
PT1 time constant ADC input Time constant of measuring circuit for all inputs
timespan64 0 .. 10 ms 1 ms 0,1 ms
values for interference suppression.
PT1 Zeitkonstante | I |
Tv_i timespan64 0 .. 10 ms 1 ms 0,1 ms
Time constant for measuring signal IAbs
PT1 Zeitkonstante | U |
Tv_u timespan64 0 .. 10 ms 1 ms 0,1 ms
Time constant for measuring signal UAbs
PT1 time constant P and Q timespan64 0 .. 10 ms 1 ms 0,1 ms Time constant for measuring signal P and Q
PT1 time constant PF timespan64 0 .. 10 ms 1 ms 0,1 ms Time constant for measuring signal PF
PT1 time constant uel und  timespan64 0 .. 10 ms 1 ms 0,1 ms Time constant for measuring signal uel und 
Time constant for measuring signal 

Tv_om timespan64 0 .. 10 ms 1 ms 0,1 ms
(frequency)
PT1 time constant Allpass for

frequency value at
For the frequency determination in these
measurement configuration 1,
measurement configurations an all-pass filter is
31, 311
required. This requires the angular velocity of
(“single phase machine with
the voltage indicator (frequency) as input
single phase measurement", timespan64 0 .. 10 s 1s 10 ms
parameter. At the start the nominal frequency is
"three phase machine with
taken. Thereafter, it is determined via the DQ0
single phase measurement"
(Park) transformation. The frequency via this
and "three phase machine with
PT1 element is fed to the all-pass filter.
alternative single phase
measurement”)
PT1 time constant grid voltage timespan64 0 .. 10 s 1s 10 ms Time constant for measuring signal Un
PT1 time constant wPSS and Time constant for measuring signal wPSS and
timespan64 0 .. 10 ms 5 ms 0,1 ms
Ppss Ppss
Cross reactance for under

Float32 0 .. 3 pu 1 pu 0,001 pu Effective for uel
excitation limiters
Grid reactance Float32 0 .. 3 pu 1 pu 0,001 pu Effective for 
Quadrature-axis reactance Float32 0 .. 3 pu 1 pu 0,001 pu Effective for 
Quadrature-axis reactance for

Float32 0 .. 3 pu 1 pu 0,001 pu Effective for PSS
PSS
Quality factor of notch filter Float32 0,1 .. 100 pu 1 pu 0,1 pu Effective for diode failure supervision
PT1 time constant for Single

timespan64 0 .. 1 s 10 ms 1 ms
phase failure detection
threshold value for Single Float32 0,1 .. 0,8 pu 0,3 pu 0,01 pu

DGB-004-1.04
Minimum value UAbs für Single

Float32 0 .. 0,9 pu 0,1 pu 0,01 pu
Minimum value UAbs for

Float32 0 .. 0,9 pu 0,1 pu 0,01 pu
frequency tracking
In addition to the parameters listed above additional parameters for the input variables must be defined under the
section ‘space vector model’ in the application settings for excitation in HIPASE engineering tool !

DGB-004-1.04
39.7. INPUTS OF POU GATECONTROLOUT

This POU is enabled by licensing the software license SGE-001 "EXC Automatic Voltage Regulator".
In this POU the transfer data points are represented from FBD to grid pulse generation / to the integrated PI
controller on the AB-310.
For example, when a fast current control is required, the integrated PI controller can be used.
Block diagram of integrated field current controller

DGB-004-1.04
39.7.1. DATA POINTS OF INPUTS
Data Description
Data point name Values
type
This input controls both the generation and the output of the
firing pulses to the pulse amplifiers. With active pulse enable,
all pulse outputs are active.
With pulse inhibit, all POU parameters can be effectively
GatePulseEna bool 0: Gate pulse blocking
changed immediately.
With pulse enable, only the POE parameters Kp Controller
1: Gate pulse enable and Ti Controller can be changed immediately. All other POU
parameters are protected against change during pulse enable.
The ignition mode defines the operating behavior of the

thyristor bridge.
1: normal operation Normal operation: Ignition angle between rectifier and inverter
end position. Rectifier end position is defined by the maximum
value from input MinGatePulseAngle and the
MinGatePulseAngleP parameters.
Inverter end position is specified with the parameter
MaxGatePulseAngleP.
2: Rectifier operation Rectifier mode: Ignition pulse chains are output at all outputs.
Inverter mode: firing angle constant at inverter end position
OpMode uint32
3: inverter operation (parameterizable via MaxGatePulseAngleP).
Freewheel L1: rectifier operation only for phase L1, all other
pulse outputs inactive.
4: freewheel L1 operation
Freewheel L2: rectifier operation only for phase L2, all other
5: Freewheel L2 operation Freewheel L3: rectifier operation only for phase L3, all other
The input value for OpMode is stored until a new valid value is
6: Freewheel L3 operation present at the input. If the start value for OpMode is invalid,
the OpStatus output remains in standby.
In the CURRENT_CONTROLLER mode, SetVal corresponds

to the setpoint for the integrated PI controller.
Operating mode ANGLE_LINEARIZATION:
normalization:
-1 pu .. + 1 pu SetVal linearly corresponds to the bridge output
voltage -1 pu .. +1 pu.
SetVal is converted internally via an arc cosine function into
the necessary ignition angle 180 ° .. 0 °.
SetVal Float32 -10 .. 10 pu
In DIRECT_ANGLE mode: SetVal corresponds to the ignition
angle.
normalization:
0 pu .. + 1 pu SetVal linearly corresponds to the ignition angle
0 ° .. 360 °.
0.5 pu .. 0 pu SetVal is non-linear equivalent to bridge output
voltage -1 pu .. + 1 pu.
The input value of SetVal is stored until a new valid value is
present at the input. If the starting value for SetVal is invalid,

DGB-004-1.04
Data Description
Data point name Values
type
the value 0 is used.
Alternative input for external feedback for internal PI controller

ActualVal Float32 0 .. 10 pu The input value is stored until a new valid value is pending. If
the start value is invalid, the value 0 is used.
Load value for the integral part of the PI controller.
CtrlIntegratorIn Float32 pu The input value for CtrlIntegratorIn is stored until a new valid
value is pending. If the starting value for CtrlIntegratorIn is
invalid, the value 0 is used.
0: inaktiv As long as active, the integral part of the PI controller is

FollowUp bool
1: aktiv overwritten with the value of CtrlIntegratorIn.
Kp Controller Float32 0 .. 100 pu Proportional component of the internal PI controller
Ti Controller Float32 0 .. 100 s Integration time constant of the internal PI controller
Current Controller: In this operating mode, the POU input

1: Current Controller SetVal is used as the reference variable for the internal PI
controller for the formation of the ignition angle.
single Angle Linearization: In this operating mode, the POU input
Controller Type 2: Angle Linearization
choice SetVal is supplied with an arc-cos function for the ignition
angle formation.
3: Direct Angle Direct Angle: In this operating mode, the POU input SetVal
directly determines the ignition angle formation.
1: ActualVal
Controller single Selection of the feedback value for the internal PI controller.
2: Analog input If1
FeedbackSource choice Only effective in Controller Type = Current Controller mode.
3: Analog input If2
The ignition angle can not fall below this limit (rectifier end
position).
Normalization: 1 pu .. 360 °
MinGatePulseAngle Float32 0 .. 0,25 pu This input is effective as long as its value is greater than the
value of the "Min Trigger Angle" parameter.
The input value for MinGatePulseAngle is stored until a new
valid value is pending. If the start value for
MinGatePulseAngle is invalid, the value 0 is used.
The ignition angle can not exceed this limit (inverter end
position).
Normalization: 1 pu .. 360 °
MaxGatePulseAngle Float32 0,25 .. 0,5 pu This input is effective as long as its value is less than the
value of the Max Trigger Angle parameter.
The input value for MaxGatePulseAngle is stored until a new
valid value is pending. If the start value for
MaxGatePulseAngle is invalid, the value 0.25 is used.

DGB-004-1.04
39.8. OUTPUTS AND PARAMETERS OF POU GATECONTROLIN

This POU is open by licensing the software licenses SGE 001 EXC Automatic Voltage Regulator.
In this POU the transfer data points are represented from grid pulse generation / from the integrated PI controller
on the AB-310 to the FUP.
Data Description
Data point Name Values
type
0: pulses disabled Is set in the AB-310 simultaneously with the activation of the
GatePulseStatus bool
1: pulses enabled pulses.
1: initialization
Initialization: After the power up, the grid tax rate goes through
OpStatus uint32 2: standby an initialization phase of approx. 5 s
3: normal operation Standby: Active as long as input GatePulseEna is at 0 or at

DGB-004-1.04
Data Description
type
4: inverter operation initialization no valid value of input OpMode.

5: Rectifier operation Normal operation: Active as long as GatePulseEna input at 1
and OpMode input at normal operation.
6: Freewheel L1 operation
Inverter mode: Active as long as GatePulseEna input is at 1
7: Freewheel L2 operation and OpMode input is in inverter mode.
8: Freewheel L3 operation Rectifier mode: Active as long as GatePulseEna input at 1 and
OpMode input at rectifier operation.
10: Error Freewheel L1 / L2 / L3 Operation: Active as long as input

GatePulseEna to 1 and input OpMode to freewheel L1 / L2 /
L3 operation.
Error (active for 1ms only): See the error action table
A pulse release should only be made if the data point "PLL

locked" supplies. The prerequisite for this is the recognition of
a valid direction of rotation.
1: initialization
Initialization: Active as long as it was not possible to
synchronize to the thyristor voltage at UsynL1 / UsynL2 /
PLLStatus uint32 2: PLL locked UsynL3.
PLL locked: Active if synchronization to the thyristor voltage at
UsynL1 / UsynL2 / UsynL3 was possible.
3: error
Error: Active if Input GatePulseEna can not be synchronized
to 1 and PLL can not be synchronized to the thyristor voltage
at UsynL1 / UsynL2 / UsynL3.
Display of the direction of rotation of the synchronizing

voltage.
For NumberOfPhases = single-phase, 0 is output
permanently.
For NumberOfPhases = three-phase, the following applies:
-1: phase sequence 132 Phase sequence 132 (left-hand rotary field): Active if the
PhaseSeqStatus uint32 direction of rotation of the thyristor voltage is left-handed
(UsynL1 = L1, UsynL2 = L2, UsynL3 = L3).
0: initialization Initialization as long as the direction of rotation of the thyristor
voltage UsynL1 / UsynL2 / UsynL3 can not be detected. PLL
not lured.
1: phase sequence 123 Phase sequence 123 (clockwise rotating field): Active if the
direction of rotation of the thyristor voltage is clockwise
(UsynL1 = L1, UsynL2 = L2, UsynL3 = L3).
Absolute value of the synchronization frequency

PLLFrequency Float32 0 .. 10 pu
Scaling: 1 pu .. rated frequency
SyncVoltAmplitude Float32 0 .. 10 pu RMS value of the space vector of the synchronizing voltage
Effective ignition angle (within the limits between GR and WR

limit position) in pu.
GatePulseAngle Float32 0 .. 0,5 pu
Standardization 0 pu .. 1 pu corresponds to 0 ° .. 360 ° ignition
angle
ControllerOutput Float32 -1 pu .. 1 pu Output of the PI controller
0: inaktive Limit indicator.

AntiWindup bool
1: aktive Active if the ControllerOutput output has reached the limits -1

DGB-004-1.04
Data Description
type
pu or +1 pu.
CtrlIntegratorOut Float32 pu Integration register of the PI controller
0: no error
Fault bool Sum error: See error effect table
1: error
Error output for synchronizing voltage failure.

If the failure of one or more phases of the synchronization
0: no error voltage is detected for at least 4 ms, this output will be active
SyncVoltFault bool for 80 ms.
1: error
ATTENTION: PhaseSeqFault and SyncVoltFault are only
generated if OpMode = normal operation and grid release =
active
Error output of the direction of rotation detection.

active as soon as the direction of rotation can no longer be
0: no error determined.
PhaseSeqFault bool
1: error ATTENTION: PhaseSeqFault and SyncVoltFault are only
generated if OpMode = normal operation and grid release =
active
Error output of the synchronization function.

0: no error
PLLFault bool Active as soon as the PLLStatus output indicates the error
1: error
condition.
0: no error
Signal output of thyristor pulse formation.
HWSupStatus uint32 Bit 0=1 .. error of thyristor
Active if the supply of pulse generation fails
pulses
Error output of thyristor pulse formation.

0: no error
HWSupFault bool Active as soon as the HWSupStatus output indicates any error
1: error
condition. Is reset via the input ResetFaults.
Signal output for checking the module parameters.

1: Initialisierung Initialization: Active as long as the grid tax rate checks its
parameters for the permitted value ranges.
ParameterStatus uint32 Parameter OK: All parameters are within the permitted value
2: Parameter OK
ranges.
Parameter error: At least one parameter is outside the
3: Parameter Fehler permitted value ranges. The grid pulse enable is disabled.
Normalized and filtered value of field / pole voltage Uf at AB-

Uf Float32 0 .. 10 pu
310 X1 / 14, 15
Normalized and filtered value of the field / pole wheel current

If1 Float32 0 .. 10 pu
If1 at AB-310 X2 / 10, 11
Normalized and filtered value of field / rotor current If2 at AB-

If2 Float32 0 .. 10 pu
310 X2 / 14, 15

DGB-004-1.04
Data Value setting Default Setting steps Description

Parameter Name
type range value
Proportional component of the PLL control for

Kp PLL *) Float32 1 .. 500 pu 1 pu 0,1 pu
ignition angle formation
Integration time constant of the PLL control for

Ti PLL *) Float32 0,01 .. 10 s 1s 0,01 s
ignition angle formation
Lower limit for ignition angle (rectifier end

position).
Min Trigger Angle *) Float32 5 .. 90 ° 5° 0,1 ° This parameter is effective as long as its value is
greater than the value of the MinGatePulseAngle
input.
Upper limit for ignition angle (inverter end

Max Trigger Angle *) Float32 90 .. 165 ° 150 ° 0,1 °
position).
*) Parameter changes only effective if GatePulseEna = 0 (pulse inhibit)

DGB-004-1.04
39.9. INPUTS OF POU GATECONTROLSET

This POU is released by licensing with the software license SGE-001 "EXC Automatic Voltage Regulator".
In this POU, the parameters can be selected in the same way as they are selectable as settings in the HIPASE
Engineering Tool under
Depending on the selected parameter "Disable parameters", the parameters are taken over dynamically by the
POU GateControlSet, or the selected setting is adopted by the tool when the project is loaded.

Parameter Name Data type Value setting range
steps
Rated frequency of the thyristor

NomFreq Float32 10 .. 500 Hz 50 Hz 0,1 Hz
voltage
Selection of the phase number of

the thyristor bridge.3-phase:
B6C, B6H Top, B6H Bottom, M3
1: 3-phase Top, B3 Bottom
Number of Phases Uint32 1 -
or
single phase:
B2C, B2H Top, B2H Bottom
2: single phase
Selection of the bridge circuit.

fully controlled:
1: fully controlled B6C, B2C
semi-controlled top:
BridgeTopology Uint32 2: semi-controlled top 1 - B6H Top, B2H Top
semi-controlled bottom:
B6H Bottom, B2H Bottom
3: semi-controlled
bottom Midpoint scheme:
M2, M3

DGB-004-1.04

Parameter Name Data type Value setting range
steps
4: Midpoint scheme
Selection of the ignition pulse type

for the thyristor bridge normal
1: Double pulse operation.
Double pulse: As long as the
current ignition angle does not
exceed the parameter
SecondPulseInhibitAngle, each
TriggerPulseType Uint32 2 - thyristor is triggered with two
2: single pulse consecutive ignition pulses.
Single pulse: Each thyristor is
driven with only one ignition pulse.
Picket Fence: Each thyristor is
driven during the lead time with
3: Pulse chain successive firing pulses.
Ignition angle limit, when exceeded

by a parameterized double pulse
formation (parameter
SecondPulseInhibitAngle Float32 0 .. 180 ° 90 ° 0,001 mA TriggerPulseType) is switched to
single pulse formation. When
falling below this limit is switched
back to double pulse formation.

DGB-004-1.04
39.10. THYRISTOR CONDUCTIVITY MONITORING, POU BRIDGESUPERVISION

This POU is released by licensing with the software license SGE-001 "EXC Automatic Voltage Regulator".
Thyristor conductivity monitoring can detect non-conductive semiconductors in any combination and therefore also
a fuse. A short circuit of a semiconductor causes a fuse and is thus indirectly recognizable. Furthermore, the
thyristor bridge is monitored for a short circuit between the phases. This is available for all bridge types. For each
thyristor bridge to be monitored, the three phase input currents and the output current of this bridge must be
detected. The external wiring shows the required signal assignments.
An AB-310 can be equipped with a maximum of one AM-010. After 6 analog inputs are available on the AM-010,
the thyristor conductivity monitoring for two bridges can be implemented with a combination AB-310 + AM-010.
This function is provided per AB-310 for a maximum of two thyristor bridges with a POE bridge supervision.
This function is provided for each AB-310 + AM-010 for a maximum of two thyristor bridges with a POE bridge
supervision.
Up to two modules AB-310 + AM-010 can be equipped for each HIPASE-E device and thus up to 4 bridges can be
monitored.
Value
Response time of the short circuit detection 1 ms
Response time of thyristor conductivity monitoring 200 ms
Setting range of the current ratio for the short-circuit

1 .. 3 x bridge output rated current
detection
Working range of thyristor conductivity monitoring 0.1 .. 1 x bridge output rated current
Pickup value for failure detection

0.1 pu
(Thyristor current relative to bridge output current)

DGB-004-1.04
39.10.2. POU BRIDGESUPERVISION FOR THYRISTOR BRIDGE A AND B
If there is only one module AB-310 + AM-010 in the HIPASE device, this POU is assigned to this module as
"Bridge Supervision".
39.10.3. POU BRIDGESUPERVISION FOR THYRISTOR BRIDGE C AND D
To monitor 3 or 4 thyristor bridges, it is necessary to equip the HIPASE-E device with a second module AB-310 +
AM-010.
The assignment of another POU "bridge supervision" to the second module AB-310 + AM-010 is done by means of
the context menu and selection "secondary appl. Module".

DGB-004-1.04
For the secondary module AB-310 + AM-010, the indices of the output designations "A" and "B" are representative
of the thyristor bridges "C" and "D".
39.10.4. SECONDARY APPLICATION ASSEMBLY ACTIVATE EXCESSIVE EXPLORATION
1) In the HIPASE-Large housing it is possible to operate up to two application modules excitation AB-310 +
AM-010. After placing the second module AB-310 + AM-010 in the HIPASE Engineering Tool in the
"Configuration" ribbon in the "Hardware" group with the "Assembly" command, the ribbon "Excitation" in the
"General" group displays the command "Secondary application module "Selectable.
2) Under "Secondary application module", the identifier under "Slot" in the HIPASE housing is used to identify
the secondary module. Under "Use", "Independent second bridge" must be set to use thyristor conductivity
monitoring for the second thyristor bridge pair.

DGB-004-1.04
Data Description
Data point name Value
type
This input controls the thyristor conductivity monitoring of

bridge A.
0: inactive If this input is inactive, the associated outputs are always set
EnaBrA bool to zero.
1: active
For the correct function as monitoring of bridge A, an
assignment of the analog inputs defined according to the
startup diagram is required.
This input controls the thyristor conductivity monitoring of

bridge B.
0: inactive If this input is inactive, the associated outputs are always set
EnaBrB bool to zero.
1: active
For the correct function as monitoring of bridge B, an
assignment of the analog inputs defined according to the
startup diagram is required.
The assignment of the thyristor number to the position in the three-phase thyristor bridge is as shown below. For
single-phase thyristor bridges, the strand L2 is omitted:
Data Description
type
0: kein Fehler The thyristor 1 of the thyristor bridge A was either damaged or
Thy1AFault bool
1: Thyristor ausgefallen the thyristor fuse has dropped.
Thy2AFault bool
Thy3AFault bool

DGB-004-1.04
Data Description
type
0: no failure The thyristor 4 of the thyristor bridge A was either damaged or

Thy4AFault bool
1: Thyristor failed the thyristor fuse has dropped.

Thy5AFault bool

Thy6AFault bool
0: no failure The thyristor 1 of the thyristor bridge B was either damaged or

Thy1BFault bool

Thy2BFault bool

Thy3BFault bool

Thy4BFault bool

Thy5BFault bool

Thy6BFault bool
Output of the calculated current value of the current through

thyristor 1 of bridge A in pu. Scaling is performed via the
Thy1ACurrent float 0 .. TYPMAX module parameters "Transformer primary value", "Secondary
value transformer" and "Nominal value primary" for inputs AI-
01, AI-02 and AI-03 of submodule AM-010.




Thy5ACurrent float 0 .. TYPMAX thyristor 5 of bridge A in pu. Scaling is performed via the
module parameters "Transformer primary value", "Secondary

DGB-004-1.04
Data Description
type



thyristor 1 of bridge B in pu. Scaling is performed via the
Thy1BCurrent float 0 .. TYPMAX module parameters "Transformer primary value", "Secondary






DGB-004-1.04
Data Value setting Default Setting step Description

Name of Parameter
type range value size
Minimum value of field current for supervision of

thyristor current. If the measured field current
exceeds this value and the current through the
IfThreshold Float 0,1 .. 1 0,3 0,01 respective thyristor falls below the value of 0.1
pu, then an error is reported for this thyristor.
Further explanation see diagram below.

DGB-004-1.04
39.10.8. BAUGRUPPEN-PARAMETER SECONDARY APPLICATION BOARD
Name of Default value Description

Value setting range
Parameter
Specification of the slot inside the HIPASE housing in which

Slot - - the second module AB-310 + AM-010 is inserted. This
information is printed on the housing.
Selection of the operating mode of the second module AB-310.

Independent second bridge: all functions of the AB-310
board are active. In this mode, the firing pulses for connected
Independent second bridge thyristor bridges are formed according to the settings for the
Usage I/O extension second assembly AB-310.
I / O extension
I/O extension: all functions of the second module AB-310 are
inactive. In this operating mode, the second module AB-310
only serves as a carrier for the analog input / output module
AM-010 on it.
39.10.9. ERROR PROCESSING TABLE

POU GateControlIn
POU GateControlIn
Output ThyXYFault
BridgeSupervision
Output OpStatus
Output FAULT
Ignition mode
POU
Thyristor failure - - Active Active
10 (error)
Gate
Bridge failure Active for Active
blocking
1ms only

DGB-004-1.04
39.10.10. MINIMUM FUNCTION PLAN FOR THYRISTOR CONFIGURATION MONITORING IN BRIDGE

PARALLEL OPERATION
In a function diagram, the actual value output for the field current must be distributed to the actual value inputs of
the primary and secondary POU "GateControlOut" so that thyristor conductivity monitoring can work for both bridge
pairs.

DGB-004-1.04
39.10.11. EXTERNAL CONNECTION FOR THYRISTOR BRIDGE PARALLEL OPERATION (HOT

STANDBY)
The following example also applies analogously to the operation of 2 modules AB-310 + AM-010.
NOTE: Alternate bridge operation (cold standby) measures the AC current only once (before distributing to both
bridges).
The converters must be connected in this case to the inputs AI4 .. AI6. The necessary internal switching of the
monitoring is done applicatively in the software.

DGB-004-1.04
39.11. DIODE CONDUCTIVITY MONITORING FOR AC EXCITER MACHINE, POU

DIODESUPERVISION
This POU is released by licensing with the software license SGE-003 "EXC Diode Failure Detection".
This function detects a diode fault in the rotating rectifier of an AC exciter using the waveform of the field current. A
failure or short circuit of a diode causes an AC signal superimposed on the field current with the same frequency as
the exciter voltage of the exciter.
39.11.1. SIGNAL CURVE AT A SHORT-CIRCUITED DIODE ON THE ROTATING RECTIFIER

200mA
150mA
100mA
50mA
SEL>>
0A
-I(R1)
200V
100V
0V
240ms 245ms 250ms 255ms 260ms 265ms 270ms 275ms 280ms 285ms 290ms 295ms 300ms
V(D3:2,L1:1)
Time
Upper curve: current flow through the magnet wheel of the main machine
Lower curve: Voltage curve at the rotor of the main machine
39.11.2. SIGNAL CURVE IN CASE OF FAILURE OF A DIODE ON THE ROTATING RECTIFIER

200mA
150mA
100mA
50mA
SEL>>
0A
-I(R1)
200V
100V
0V
240ms 245ms 250ms 255ms 260ms 265ms 270ms 275ms 280ms 285ms 290ms 295ms 300ms
V(D3:2,L1:1)
Time

DGB-004-1.04
Upper curve: current flow through the magnet wheel of the main machine
Lower curve: Voltage curve at the rotor of the main machine
The application of this function requires the parameterization of the nominal frequency of the exciter machine. See
chap. 35.12, Nominal frequency of WS-EM, POE DiodeSupervisionSet.
Data Description
type
0: inactive
Enable bool Activates the Diode supervision function
1: active
Factor with which the trigger values Ifield Pickup 1 and Ifield
Multiplier Float32 0 .. 1.0 Pickup 2 are multiplied. Thus, the tripping values are variable
at runtime bar.
1: If1 Selects whether the measured value input If1 (X2 / 10-11) or
InputSource Uint32 If2 (X2 / 14-15) of the module AB-310 is to be used for diode
2: If2 error detection.
The superimposed signal on the field current caused by a diode short circuit is usually larger in magnitude than the
superimposed signal which is caused by an interruption (fuse case). Therefore, the possibility for two triggering
thresholds of the diode fault monitoring function was provided.
Data Description
type
0: faultless If the tripping value is exceeded by ("Ifield Pickup 1" x

Fault 1 bool
1: failure multiplier) the excitation signal sets the output "Fault 1".
0: faultless If the tripping value is exceeded by ("Ifield pickup 2" x

Fault 2 bool
1: failure multiplier) the pickup signal sets the output "Fault 2".

DGB-004-1.04
To detect a diode error, the field current signal is applied to a bandpass filter, which is set to the expected in the
event of an error superimposed signal.
Data Value setting Default Setting steps Description
Parameter Name
type range value
Amplification of the bandpass filter, 2nd order

BPF Gain Float32 1 .. 10 pu 1 pu 0,1 pu Should be fix 1, because the signal size can be
scaled arbitrarily with pickup level.
Quality of the bandpass filter, 2nd order

This is understood as the passband (selectivity)
of the filter. This parameter must be set so that
the entire expected speed range of the generator
is covered.
For example: nominal frequency: 50 Hz, working
range of the generator 49.5 ... 50.5 Hz.
BPF Q Float32 1 .. 100 pu 20 pu 0,1 pu
For adjustment, see the following diagram
The larger the setting value, the narrower is the
passband of the filter.
A setting range of 4 or 8 is recommended,
because otherwise a diode fault can not be
detected over the entire frequency working range
of the generator.
Current excitation value 1 for the detection of a

diode fault
Determines the tripping value for the detection of
Ifield Pickup 1 Float32 0 .. 1 pu 0,1 pu 0,1 pu a diode fault based on the transformer secondary
value of the If1 input of the AB-310 board.
Ifield pickup 1 value x converter Secondary value
of If1 = tripping value for diode error
Current excitation value 2 for the detection of a

diode fault
Determines the tripping value for the detection of
Ifield Pickup 2 Float32 0 .. 1 pu 0,1 pu 0,1 pu a diode fault based on the transformer secondary
value of the If2 input of the AB-310 board.
Ifield pickup 2 value x converter Secondary value
of If2 = tripping value for diode error
Minimum current excitation value 1 (smaller than

Ifield Min Pickup 1 Float32 0 .. 1 pu 0,1 pu 0,1 pu
pickup 1)
Minimum current excitation value 2 (less than

Ifield Min Pickup 2 Float32 0 .. 1 pu 0,1 pu 0,1 pu
Pickup 2)
Bandpass filter 2nd order

DGB-004-1.04
Transfer function of the bandpass filter 2nd order

DGB-004-1.04
39.11.6. BLOCK DIAGRAM POU DIODE SUPERVISION
Meaning of the elements drawn in the diagram:
Enable POE DiodeSupervision input: "Enable"

Input selection POE diode supervision input: "InputSource"
Mulitplier POE DiodeSupervision input: "Multiplier"
Fault 1 POE diode supervision output: "Fault 1"
Fault 2 POE diode supervision output: "Fault 2"
BPF Freq Parameter under tab "Excitation", "Settings": "Diode monitoring of the exciter machine"
or "POE DiodeSupervisionSet" input: "NomFreqDiodeSup"
BPF Gain POE Diode Supervision Parameters: "BPF Gain”
BPF Q POE Diode Supervision Parameter: "BPF Q"
Pickup 1 POE Diode Supervision Parameter: "Ifield Pickup 1"
Pickup 2 POE Diode Supervision Parameter: "Ifield Pickup 2"
Min Pickup 1 POE Diode Supervision Parameter: "Ifield Min Pickup 1"
Min Pickup 2 POE Diode Supervision Parameter: "Ifield Min Pickup 2"

DGB-004-1.04
39.12. RATED FREQUENCY OF AC EXCITER MACHINE, POU

DIODESUPERVISIONSET
This POU is released by licensing with the software license SGE-003 "EXC Diode Failure Detection".
The nominal frequency of the AC excitation machine can also be entered by means of setting parameters in the
"Excitation" ribbon under "Excitation settings", "Diode monitoring of the exciter machine", "Nominal frequency of the
exciter machine".
In order for the POE DiodeSupervisionSet to be used, the "Deactivate parameters" function under (2) must be
selected.
39.12.1. DATA POINT - INPUT
Value Default Description

Data
Data point-Name setting value
typr
range
Rated frequency of the output voltage of the exciter machine.
NomFreqDiodeSup Int 10 .. 500 Hz 50 Hz The function "Deactivate parameters" must be selected under "Settings
Excitation", "Diode monitoring of the exciter machine".
If no specification can be found on the rating plate, this must be formed from

DGB-004-1.04
the number of poles and the nominal frequency of the main generator.
f=n*p
f .. frequency [Hz]
p..number of Pole pairs
n..speed [rev / sec]

DGB-004-1.04
40. APPLICATION PROTECTION
For electrical protection of synchronous machines a variety of protective functions are available that do not require
the use of the application board protection AB-320 in HIPASE device.
For advanced protection functions, which require more signal inputs, the use of the application board protection
AB-320 is required.
Protective function Application Board

Software license package Protection AB-320
SGP-029 Rotor Earth Fault 
SGP-028 Stator Earth Fault 20Hz 
SGP-034 Shaft Current 
SGP-033 SFC Earth Fault 
These hardware related protective functions are described as POUs below.
A complete configuring of an electrical protection includes in special:
Chronological sequence of necessary configuration steps in HIPASE engineering tool
1. HW assembly of HIPASE device with TR-310 and optionally AB-320
2. Activating the software licenses for the required communication protocols
3. Activating the software licenses SGP-0xx for the required protective functions
4. Verification processor load
Completed project information with preset "Protection" or "Excitaiton with Protection" in the register “Project”, ribbon group " Application ",
5.
menu "Project Information", input filed “Application”
6. FFT synchronization parameters in the register “Protection“, ribbon group „General“, menu “Settings“
7. Choosing the configured protection functions in the register “Protection“,ribbon group „protective functions“, menu “Configuration“
Assigning of function block diagrams and of POUs to appropriate tasks with cycle time in register “Project”, "Configuration" Ribbon Group
8.
"Application" menu "Task Assignment".
9. Selecting the Input Assignment in the register “Protection“,ribbon group „protective functions“, menu “Assignment“
10. Selection of parameters each protective function in the register “Protection“,ribbon group „protective functions“, menu “Parameter“
Inputs / outputs and parameters of rotor earth fault

11. POU “REProt” Application Board Protection AB-320
detection

DGB-004-1.04
41. APPLICATION TURBINE GOVERNOR
For the formation of the actual values of the turbine control two methods are available:
 Inductive speed detection with toothed wheel: allows detection of very low speeds, such as creep or
"standstill" detection. Up to two sensors are supported for direction of rotation detection and speed
determination per speed input.
 Electrical speed and power measurement via generator voltage and current: enables very accurate
measurement of the speed in the rated speed range as well as measurement of the active power. All
relevant measuring methods for electrical speed and power measurement are supported.
After selecting "Turbine controller" under Ribbon "Configuration", "System information", "Application", the Ribbon
"Turbine controller" becomes available. After selecting "Speed detection", the following parameter window is
displayed:
41.1. SPEED DETECTION

The speed detection can be done by means of toothed wheel and inductive proximity sensors and / or via the
measurement of the generator voltage.
For this, active or passive sensors are connected to the speed inputs SI-01 and SI-02 of the application module
AB-330 and the parameters set under "Speed measurement" in the ribbon group "turbine controller", as described
below.
The AB-330 application board has voltage inputs VT-01 and VT-02 for electrical speed / frequency determination of
the turbine driven generator and an electrical network for speed adjustment.
For each equipped AB-330 board in the HIPASE device, the following parameters are available under the
corresponding slot number under "Speed Inputs":

DGB-004-1.04
41.1.1. PARAMETERS „SPEED INPUTS“
Value setting Default Description

Parameter name
range value
Rated frequency of the driven generator.

16.7 Hz,
Generator rated 25 Hz, This specification applies to both speed inputs. This value is used as a reference
50 Hz for the generation of the pu value of the generator frequency via the voltage input
frequency 50 Hz,
60 Hz VT-01 and for the generation of the mains frequency via the voltage input VT-02 of
the application module AB-330.
Rated speed of the turbine.

This value is required for the formation of the speed threshold. This specification
Rated speed 1 .. 10 000 120 rpm applies to both speed inputs.
This value is used as a reference for the pu value formation of the turbine speed
via the speed input SI-01 or SI-02 of the application board AB-330.
If this value is exceeded by the measured speed at input SI-01 or SI-02, the
Speed threshold corresponding data point "SI-01 Threshold Speed" or "SI-02 Threshold Speed" is
0 .. 200 % 10 % set. This specification applies to both speed inputs.
(%)
Based on rated speed in rpm.
Number of all teeth over the entire circumference of the toothed disc. This
Number of teeth 1 .. 10 000 100
specification applies to both speed inputs.
Time duration for If no tooth pulse is measured within this time, the turbine is considered to be
standstill detection 1 .. 1000 s 1s stationary and the data point "standstill" is set. This specification applies to both
(s) speed inputs.
Defines the number of measured pulses which, after reaching the state
"Standstill", sets the data point "Creep detected".
Number of pulses for
1 .. 1000 1 This function is only available if the creep detection was previously activated by
creep detection
means of a FUP output which was linked with "FUP output for creep detection".
This specification applies to both speed inputs.
It is checked whether the acceleration or braking of the turbine meets the limit
Speed gradient specification by "Speed gradient:
Off - On On
monitoring
Turbine start-up time (s) "This specification applies to both speed inputs.
This value defines the time that the turbine is allowed to reach the rated speed. If
the turbine reaches the rated speed faster, the data point "Turbine startup time
active" is set.
Speed gradient:
0.1 .. 1000 s 1s This specification always applies to both speed inputs.
Turbine start-up time (s)
However, this specification also limits the rate of change of the speed input when
a sudden application or removal of a speed signal is applied to inputs SI-01 and
SI-02.
Enables the Creep Detection function in the HIPASE Engineering Tool, allowing
Creep detection active Off - On Off you to control this function with a FBD output that has been routed to "FBD Output
for Creep Detection". This specification applies to both speed inputs.
The combination with a FBD output allows the applicative switching on and off of
FBD output for creep
- . the creep detection. Thus, creeping detection is usually deactivated when starting
detection
up a turbine. This specification applies to both speed inputs.
Passive input Passive The type of speed sensor is set for both speed inputs. For details on the
Input mode
Active input input compatible sensors, see: Chap. 11.7.1, technical data

DGB-004-1.04
Value setting Default Description

Parameter name
range value
This specification therefore always applies to both speed inputs.
A "moving average" filter is the optimal way to reduce noise from a signal. It
improves both the accuracy and the stability of the measured speed when
averaging the individual readings.
Speed averaging Off - On Off
This selection activates or deactivates the filter.
This specification always applies to both speed inputs.
This specification determines the time in which speed measurement values are
used for the moving averaging. The greater the number of measured values in this
set time window, the greater the noise suppression in the calculated output value.
By specifying a time window, the reaction time of the speed smoothing is
determined independently of the input signal.
As a result of this principle, the number of RPM readings used for averaging will
Time window of the decrease with decreasing RPM.
1 .. 1000 ms 1
speed averaging (ms)
The factor of the interference suppression by a moving averaging corresponds to
the root of the number of measured values. Example: Averaging over 100
readings reduces noise interference by a factor of 10.
The filter time constant is approximately half the input value in ms. The final value
after a jump is reached by this filter after exactly the input value in ms.
This specification always applies to both speed inputs.

DGB-004-1.04
41.2. POWER MEASUEMENT

To determine the power output of the generator driven by the turbine, the voltages and currents of the generator
are measured by the TR-310 transformer board assembly.
For this purpose, the function power measurement must be activated as follows, as well as the machine type and
the desired measuring method. For details on the measuring methods see chap. 38.3, Measuring methods Turbine
control - Connection of the transformer board TR-310.
By specifying the type of synchronous machine and the measuring method, all necessary parameters for the
electrical measurement of speed and power are set.

DGB-004-1.04
41.2.1. PARAMETERS „POWER MEASUREMENT“
These settings enable the provision of measured values for active and reactive power.
Default Description
Parameter name Value setting range
value
The measurement of active and reactive power is activated. The

Power measurement
Yes / No No measured values in the function diagram are provided by the POU
active
"POWER".
1-phase machine Selection of the version of the synchronous machine, whether single-
Type of machine -
3-phase machine phase or three-phase.
33Y - 3 x CT, 3 x VT, Phase

voltage / star connection
33D - 3 x CT, 3 x VT,
connection
32D - 3 x CT, 2 x VT,
connection
23Y - 2 x CT, 3 x VT, Phase
voltage / star connection Only active if previously selected under "Machine" 3-phase machine:
Speed threshold 13Y - 1 x CT, 3 x VT, For details on the set measuring method see: Chap. 38.3,
10 %
(%) Phasenspannung / "Measuring methods Turbine control - Connection of the transformer
Sternschaltung board TR-310".
13D - 1 x CT, 3 x VT,
connection
12D - 1 x CT, 2 x VT,
connection
11D - 1 x CT, 1 x VT,
connection
Number of all teeth over the entire circumference. This specification

Number of teeth 1 .. 10 000 100
applies to both speed inputs.
41.2.2. CALCULATED VALUES OF POWER MEASUREMENT
The calculated values of the power measurement function are provided by means of the POU "Power" for use in
the function diagram:
POU icon in the function plan editor, for details see POU description

DGB-004-1.04
41.3. MEASURING METHODS TURBINE CONTROL - CONNECTION OF

TRANSFORMER BOARD TR-310
To determine the power output (or input) of the turbine-driven generator, the following measurement methods are
available for the TR-310 transducer assembly:
41.3.1. 1-PHASE MACHINE
Settings in the HIPASE Engineering Tool in the ribbon group "> Turbine controller", "Speed measurement". "Power
measurement"
Measuring method: -
The selection of whether the "1 A" or "5 A" input of the current input has been used must be selected in the
board.
Wiring diagram:
TR-310
X1
01C
CT-01
01A/01B
X2
01
02
VT-01
1-Phasen Generator
1-Phasen Messung Spannung,
1~ 1-Phasen Messung Strom
Maschine: 1-Phasenmaschine
Messmethode: -

DGB-004-1.04
measurement"
Machine: 3-phase machine
Measuring method: 33Y – 3 x CT, 3 x VT, phase voltage / star connection
board.
Wiring diagram:
Netz / Leitung
L1 L2 L3
TR-310
X1
01C
CT-01
01A/01B
02C
CT-02
02A/02B
03C
CT-03
03A/03B
X2
01
02 VT-01
03
04
VT-02
05
VT-03
06
L1 L2 L3
3-Phasen Generator
3~ 3-Phasen Messung Spannung Stern,
3-Phasen Messung Strom
Messmethode: 33Y – 3 x CT, 3 x VT,
Generator Phasenspannung / Sternschaltung

DGB-004-1.04
measurement"
Measuring method: 13Y – 1 x CT, 3 x VT, phase voltage / star connection
board.
Wiring diagram:
Netz / Leitung
L1 L2 L3
TR-310
X1
02C
CT-02
02A/02B
X2
01
02 VT-01
03
04
VT-02
05
VT-03
06
L1 L2 L3
3-Phasen Generator
3-Phasen Messung Spannung Stern,
Messmethode: 13Y – 1 x CT, 3 x VT,
Phasenspannung / Sternschaltung
Generator

DGB-004-1.04
measurement"
Measuring method: 33D – 3 x CT, 3 x VT, Chained voltage / delta connection
board.
Wiring diagram:
Netz / Leitung
L1 L2 L3
TR-310
X1
01C
CT-01
01A/01B
02C
CT-02
02A/02B
03C
CT-03
03A/03B
X2
01
02 VT-01
03
04
VT-02
05
VT-03
06
L1 L2 L3
3-Phasen Generator
3-Phasen Messung Spannung Dreieck,
Messmethode: 33D – 3 x CT, 3 x VT,
Verkettete Spannung /
Generator Dreieckschaltung

DGB-004-1.04
measurement"
board.
Wiring diagram:
Netz / Leitung
L1 L2 L3 TR-310
X1
01C
CT-01
01A/01B
02C
CT-02
02A/02B
03C
CT-03
03A/03B
X2
01
02 VT-01
03
04
VT-02
L1 L2 L3
3-Phasen Generator

DGB-004-1.04
measurement"
board.
Wiring diagram:
Netz / Leitung
L1 L2 L3 TR-310
X1
02C
CT-02
02A/02B
X2
01
02 VT-01
03
04
VT-02
05
VT-03
06
L1 L2 L3
3-Phasen Generator
3~ 3-Phasen Messung Spannung Dreieck,

1-Phasen Messung Strom

DGB-004-1.04
measurement"
board.
Wiring diagram:
Netz / Leitung
L1 L2 L3 TR-310
X1
02C
CT-02
02A/02B
X2
01
02 VT-01
03
04
VT-02
L1 L2 L3
3-Phasen Generator

DGB-004-1.04
measurement"
board.
Wiring diagram:
Netz / Leitung
L1 L2 L3 TR-310
X1
02C
CT-02
02A/02B
X2
01
02 VT-01
Verfügbare Stromphase Erforderliche

Spannungsphasen
L1 L3 – L2
L2 (oben dargestellt) L1 – L3
L1 L2 L3 L3 L2 – L1
3-Phasen Generator
41.4. PARAMETERS FOR POSITIONING CONTROLLERS (FROM V1.11.00)

The AB-330 and AM-020 modules each offer 6 freely programmable controller blocks. These are linked by the tool
by default with the identically named inputs and outputs: that is, positioning circuit 1 with AI-01 and AO-01 of the
same module.

DGB-004-1.04
41.4.1. TRANSFER FUNCTION OF PIDT1-CONTROLLER
1  s 
F ( s)  K P * (1   s  TV *  
s  TN  1  s  T1 
Principle diagram of the controller
Rangierung +
für FUP-Sollwert PIDT1 AO-01 .. AO-06
-
AI-01 .. AI-06
Value setting Default value Description

Parameter name
range
Not changeable: Identifies the position of the

Slot - -
assembly in the HIPASE device
Controller number - - Not changeable: automatically assigned number
Slot ID - Analog
Name -
Input Number
With this input, the function chart output of the data

FBD setpoint - 100 .. + 100 0 type Float is linked, which supplies the setpoint for
this positioning circuit.
Deactivated: The control loop has been shut down
Active Yes / No No Activated: a data point must be assigned as FBD

setpoint and the fields for analog input and analog
output become effective.
Selection of the analog input of the module which is

to supply the reference variable for the controller
Number of the block.
Analog input
AI-01 .. AI-06 corresponding
(measured value) The routing within the positioning circuits may only
positioning circle
be carried out once. An analogue input must not be
used for more than one positioning circuit.
Selection of the analog output of the module to

which the output of the controller block is to act.
Number of the
Analog output The routing within the positioning circuits may only
AO-01 .. AO-06 corresponding
(control signal) be carried out once. An analogue output must
positioning circle
therefore not be used for more than one positioning
circuit.
The value set here is always added to the output

Offset - 100 .. + 100 0
signal.

DGB-004-1.04
Value setting Default value Description

Parameter name
range
proportional gain 0 .. 100 1 KP , refer to transfer function
Integral time 0 ..1000 s 0 TN , refer to transfer function
Derivative time 0 .. 1000 s 0 TV , refer to transfer function
Filter time constant of

0 ..1000 s 0 T1 , refer to transfer function
the DT1-filter
When this value is reached, the I component does

Lower static output limit - 100 - 100 not further integrate and the output of the regulator is
limited to this value.
When this value is reached, the I component does

Upper static output limit + 100 + 100 not further integrate and the output of the regulator is
limited to this value.
Anti Windup data point
Integral value output data point
Integral value takeover data point
Integral value input data point

DGB-004-1.04
42. SYSTEM DATA POINTS
To be continued.

DGB-004-1.04
43. CATALOG OF DEVICES, MODULES, SPARE PARTS, THIRD-PARTY

PRODUCTS
Components marked with *) require a configuration code when ordering the material number to be fully defined!
43.1. DEVICES
Material number ↓ Nomination Applikation
HIPASE-E MEDIUM
GGE-002-- *)
ASAP Mat.No.: Device 42 U width for excitation system
CON0GGE002-
HIPASE-E LARGE
GGE-004-- *)
ASAP Mat.No.: Device 84 U width for excitation system
CON0GGE004-
HIPASE MEDIUM
GGM-002-- *)
ASAP Mat.No.: Device 42 U width for mixed application
CON0GGM002-
HIPASE LARGE
GGM-004-- *)
ASAP Mat.No.: Device 84 U width for mixed application
CON0GGM004-
HIPASE-P MEDIUM
GGP-002-- *)
ASAP Mat.No.: Device 42 U width for protection system
CON0GGP002-
GGP-004-- *)
ASAP Mat.No.: HIPASE-P LARGE Device 84 U width for protection system
CON0GGP004-

DGB-004-1.04
Material number ↓ Nomination Applikation
HIPASE-S MEDIUM
GGS-002-- *)
ASAP Mat.No.: Device 42 U width for synchronisation
CON0GGS002-
HIPASE-T MEDIUM
GGT-002-- *)
ASAP Mat.No.: Device 42 U width for turbine governor
CON0GGT002-
HIPASE-T LARGE
GGT-004-- *)
ASAP Mat.No.: Device 84 U width for turbine governor
CON0GGT004-

DGB-004-1.04
43.2. DEVICES - STANDARD TYPES WITH ASAP-NO.
Material number ↓ + Configuration code ASAP Mat. No. Nomination
HIPASE-E LARGE
GGE-004-- 01/F--000R-DQCXXXX0CXXXX 300588565
w/o Touchpanel, no SFP-Module,
with TR-310, AB-310+AM-010, 2xPS-300, 8xDX-010
ASAP: HY AUT GGE-004--/01/F--000R-
DQCXXXX0CXXXX HIPASE-E REFERRING TO
EXCELCONFIG DGB-100-- V3.34
HIPASE-E LARGE
GGE-004-- 71/F--000R-DQ000000CXXXX 300618097
with internal Touch panel, no SFP-Module,
with TR-310, AB-310+AM-010, 1xPS-300, 4xDX-010
ASAP: HY AUT GGE-004--/71/F--000R-
DQ000000CXXXX HIPASE-E REFERRING TO
HIPASE-E LARGE
GGE-004-- J1/F--DQ0R-DQWXXXX0WXXXX 300654762
with external Touch panel, no SFP-Module,
with TR-310, 2xAB-310+2xAM-010, 2xPS-300, 8xDX-010
ASAP: HY AUT GGE-004--/J1/F--DQ0R-
DQWXXXX0WXXXX HIPASE-E REFERRING TO
HIPASE-E LARGE
GGE-004-- J1/F--DQ0R-DQCXXXX0CXXXX 300654763
with external Touch panel, no SFP-Module,
with TR-310, 2xAB-310+2xAM-010, 2xPS-500, 8xDX-010
ASAP: HY AUT GGE-004--/J1/F--DQ0R-
DQCXXXX0CXXXX HIPASE-E REFERRING TO
GGP-002-- B1/F--R-P-TXX 300654491
HIPASE-P MEDIUM

DGB-004-1.04
Material number ↓ + Configuration code ASAP Mat. No. Nomination
with internal Touch panel, w/o SFP-Module,

with TR-310, AB-320, PS-300, 2xDX-010
ASAP: HY AUT GGP-002--/B1/F--R-P-TXX
HIPASE-P REFERRING TO EXCELCONFIG DGB-100--
V3.34
GGP-002-- B1/F--R-00TXX 300654492 HIPASE-P MEDIUM

with TR-310, PS-300, 2xDX-010
ASAP: HY AUT GGP-002--/B1/F--R-00TXX
V3.34
GGP-002-- B1/F--R-CXXXX 300654494 HIPASE-P MEDIUM

with TR-310, PS-300, 4xDX-010
ASAP: HY AUT GGP-002--/B1/F--R-CXXXX
V3.34
43.3. COMMON DEVICE PARTS
Material number
↓ ASAP Mat.
Nomination Data sheet
(for spare part No.
order)
CS-320 Housing MEDIUM 42TE 6HE

(incl. back plane)
-- (not orderable
Link to data sheet
separately)

DGB-004-1.04
Material number
↓ ASAP Mat.
(for spare part No.
order)
CS-330 Housing LARGE 84TE 6HE

(incl. back plane)
-- (not orderable
Link to Data sheet
separately)
BGE-910-- 300753383 TP-910 Internal Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE E

BGM-900-- 300753387 TP-900 Internal Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE
BGP-920-- 300753391 TP-920 Internal Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE P
BGS-940-- 300753395 TP-940 Internal Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE S
BGT-930-- 300753397 TP-930 Internal Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE T
Link to Data sheet
BGE-915-- 300753384 TP-915 External Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE E

BGM-905-- 300753388 TP-905 External Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE
BGP-925-- 300753392 TP-925 External Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE P
BGS-945-- 300753396 TP-945 External Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE S
BGT-935-- 300753398 TP-935 External Touch panel MEDIUM HIPASE T
Link to Data sheet
BGE-960-- 300753385 TP-960 Internal Touch panel LARGE HIPASE E

BGM-950-- 300753389 TP-950 Internal Touch panel LARGE HIPASE
BGP-970-- 300753393 TP-970 Internal Touch panel LARGE HIPASE P
BGT-980-- 300753399 TP-980 Internal Touch panel LARGE HIPASE T
Link to Data sheet

DGB-004-1.04
Material number
↓ ASAP Mat.
(for spare part No.
order)
BGE-965-- 300753386 TP-965 External Touch panel LARGE HIPASE E

BGM-955-- 300753390 TP-955 External Touch panel LARGE HIPASE
BGP-975-- 300753394 TP-975 External Touch panel LARGE HIPASE P
BGT-985-- 300753400 TP-985 External Touch panel LARGE HIPASE T
Link to Data sheet
43.4. BOARDS
Material number ↓
for spare part order
TR-300 Transformer Board 4CT, 4VT

BGB-100--
Link to Data sheet

ASAP Mat.No.:
301082367
TR-310 Transformer Board 12CT, 8VT

BGB-103--
Link to Data sheet

ASAP Mat.No.:
300753382
CP-300 Processor Board
BGB-104-- plus
Configuration code
(refer to Chapter 3.3) Link to Data sheet
ASAP Mat.No.:
CON0BGB104-

DGB-004-1.04
Material number ↓
for spare part order
PS-300 Power Supply Board 110/220VDC, 4FSO

BGB-107-- plus
Configuration code
ASAP Mat.No.:
CON0BGB107-
PS-500 Power Supply Board 24/60VDC, 4FSO

BGB-113-- plus
Configuration code
ASAP Mat.No.:
CON0BGB113-
AB-310 Application Board Excitation
BGE-101-- plus
Configuration code
ASAP Mat.No.:
CON0BGE101-
AB-320 Application Board Protection
BGP-101-- plus
Configuration code
ASAP Mat.No.:
CON0BGP101-
AB-330 Application Board Turbine Governor
BGT-101-- plus
Configuration code
ASAP Mat.No.:
CON0BGT101-

DGB-004-1.04
43.5. BOARDS - SELECTION OF CONFIGURED TYPES WITH ASAP NO.
Material number +
ASAP Mat. Nr. Nomination
Configuration code ↓
BGB-104--/R- 300618121 CP-300 Processor Board
CP-300 + 2x SFP MM Processor Board with 2 x SFP MultiMode fiber-optic module 850nm CGB-
BGB-104--/R1 300654490
025--
CP-300 + 2x SFP SM Processor Board with 2 x SFP SingleMode fiber-optic module 1310nm
BGB-104--/R2
CGB-026--
BGB-107--/TXK PS-300 + DX-010 + DO-010 Power Supply Board 110/220VDC 4FSO,8DI,24DO
BGB-107--/TXX 300654418 PS-300 + 2xDX-010 Power Supply Board 110/220VDC 4FSO,16DI,16DO
BGB-107--/CXXJJ PS-300 + 2xDX-010 + 2xDI-010 Power Supply Board 110/220VDC 4FSO,48DI,16DO
BGB-107--/CXXKK PS-300 + 2xDX-010 + 2xDO-010 Power Supply Board 110/220VDC 4FSO, 16DI,48DO
BGB-107--/CXXXX 300618123 PS-300 + 4xDX-010 Power Supply Board 110/220VDC 4FSO,32DI,32DO
BGB-113--/UXK PS-500 + DX-010 + DO-010 Power Supply Board 24/60VDC 4FSO,8DI,24DO
BGB-113--/UXX PS-500 + 2xDX-010 Power Supply Board 24/60VDC 4FSO,16DI,16DO
BGB-113--/WXXJJ PS-500 + 2xDX-010 + 2xDI-010 Power Supply Board 24/60VDC 4FSO,48DI,16DO
BGB-113--/WXXKK PS-500 + 2xDX-010 + 2xDO-010 Power Supply Board 24/60VDC 4FSO, 16DI,48DO
BGB-113--/WXXXX PS-500 + 4xDX-010 Power Supply Board 24/60VDC 4FSO,32DI,32DO
BGE-101--/E- AB-310 Application Board Excitation
BGE-101--/DQ 300618119 AB-310 + AM-010 Application Board Excitation with 6AI,4AO,4PT100
BGP-101--/P- 300654417 AB-320 Application Board Protection
BGP-101--/GQ AB-320 + AM-010 Application Board Protection with 6AI,4AO,4PT100
BGT-101--/A- AB-330 Application Board Turbine Governor
BGT-101--/HN AB-330 + AM-020 Application Board Turbine Governor with 6AI,8AO,2SM
A dynamic and last valid creation of all available configuration codes (also for spare parts) is recommended by
using the last Excel Configuration Tool which is described in document „Description of Excel Configuration Tool“
with Mat. No. DGB-103-1.

DGB-004-1.04
43.6. EXTENSION MODULES
Material number ↓ Nomination Data sheet
DI-010 Digital Module 16DI
CGB-008--
Link to Data sheet
(not orderable separately)
DO-010 Digital Module 16DO
CGB-010--
Link to Data sheet
DX-010 Digital Module 8DI 8DO
CGB-009-A
Link to Data sheet
AM-010 Application Module (6AI 4AO 4PT100)
CGB-014--
Link to Data sheet
AM-020 Application Module (6AI 8AO 2SM)
CGB-015--
Link to Data sheet

DGB-004-1.04
Material number Nomination Data sheet, Notes
Terminal connector, nom. current: 12 A, Number of pins:

16, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Type of connection: screw
connection, Color: blue, Strain relief by two screws.
EI959506-- Fully equipped on every board and module at delivery.
(PHOENIX Contact FRONT-MSTB 2,5/16-STF-5,08 BU

- 1704588)
Coding pin as protection against polarity reversal for

soldered MSTB connector on the module on the rear
PHOENIX Contact panel (Phoenix CR-MSTB 100 pcs. packaging unit)
1734401
Coding pin as protection against polarity reversal for

MSTB- screw terminal connector (Phoenix CP-MSTB
PHOENIX Contact 100 pcs. packaging unit)
1734634
90° angled ring crimp cable lug Cu M4 (hole inside

diameter 4.3 mm) up to 2.5 mm² wire diameter with non-
halogenic insulation.
YK133824-- 24 pcs. are included each delivery of TR-310.
(Cembre BP-L4)
Cross-recessed countersunk head screw DIN965 M6x20

A2 stainless Are delivered enclosed for mounting of device front
plate:
8 pcs. each LARGE device
4 pcs. each MEDIUM device
2 pieces ceramic resistor 47 kOhm / 2 kV incl. mounting

material
Required for AB-320 with function rotor earth fault

GIC-020--
detection

DGB-004-1.04
Touch panel cover hood set

(= TGB-028-- + TGB-029-- + mounting kit)
Required for external mounting of Touch Panel e.g. in

door cut-out.
TP-900 + TGB-040-- = TP-905
TP-910 + TGB-040-- = TP-915
TGB-040-- TP-920 + TGB-040-- = TP-925
TP-950 + TGB-040-- = TP-955

TP-960 + TGB-040-- = TP-965
TP-970 + TGB-040-- = TP-975
Gate pulse amplifier LG6X
External Gate pulse amplifier with cover (always

BIT-070-B
required together with AB-310)
Dual channel switch-over module ZUP1 Var.1
External dual channel switch-over module (required at

BIT-045-A
AB-310 with dual channel gate pulse switch-over)
Cable K133H for gate pulses and field voltage

measuring 1,2 m non-halogenic
1.2 m non-halogenic shielded connection cable between

TI4-133-A AB-310 X1 and external gate pulse amplifier LG6X or
ZUP1 and field voltage measuring transducer

measuring 2,4 m non-halogenic


DGB-004-1.04

measuring 5,0 mnon-halogenic

Cable K233H for gate pulses 1,2 m non-halogenic

AB-310 X1 and external gate pulse amplifier LG6X or
TI4-233--
ZUP1 - without conntection to field voltage measuring
transducer
Cable K233H for gate pulses 2,4 m non-halogenic

TI5-233--
transducer
Cable K233H for gate pulses 5,0 mnon-halogenic

TI6-233--
transducer
System cable type K45H_l=10m non-halogenic
10.0 m non-halogenic twisted pair connection cable

TI5-045 between AB-3x0 and external measuring transducer
LEM HAL, HAS, HAX
Blind plate 42 HP, 6 U height
If there is mounted only one HIPASE MEDIUM device in

a 19” swing frame, the remaining gap of 42 HP can be
TGB-025-- closed with this blind plate. This blind plate replaces one
HIPASE MEDIUM device.
Steel plate 2 mm, varnishing: RAL 7035

DGB-004-1.04
Blind plate 84 HP, 6 U height
Is there a gap of 6U above or below of the assembled

devices or operating elements in a 19” swing frame,
TGB-026-- which is to be closed, so this blind plate is used to close
this gap.
Required for mounting one or two HIPASE MEDIUM

devices or one HIPASE LARGE device in a 19” swing
frame.
Device mounting kit 19" consisting of:

2 x mounting rail end 2U height (2x TGB-021--)
TGB-029--
2 x side cover 6U height (2x TGB-024--),
Device mounting expansion kit 2U height 19" consisting Required for mounting more than two HIPASE MEDIUM
of: devices or more than one HIPASE LARGE device in a
1 x mounting rail middle 2U height (TGB-022--), 19” swing frame. This allows mounting a second “device
TGB-030-- line”. Shall there exist a distance of 2U between the two
"device lines", so this expansion kit is suitable. For each
additional "device line" another expansion kit is required.
2 x side cover 6U height (2x TGB-024--)

DGB-004-1.04

of: Required for mounting more than two HIPASE MEDIUM
devices or more than one HIPASE LARGE device in a
1 x mounting rail middle 3U height (TGB-023--), 19” swing frame. This allows mounting a second “device
TGB-031-- line”. Shall there exist a distance of 3U between the two
"device lines", so this expansion kit is suitable. For each
additional "device line" another expansion kit is required.
2 x side cover 6U height (2x TGB-024--)
43.8. TESTED, ADDITIONAL THIRD PARTY PRODUCTS
Order data Nomination Data sheet, Note
Open loop Hall Effect Measuring CT 50A
Required for AB-310 for current measurement (AC, DC,

LEM HAL 50-S
pulses)

LEM HAS 50-S
pulses)

DGB-004-1.04

LEM HAX 2000-S
pulses)
Required for AB-320 for function SFC earth fault

LEM HTR 50-SB
detection
Open loop Hall Effect Measuring VT 350V
Required for AB-310 for voltage measurement (AC, DC,

LEM CV 3-500
Impulse)
Measuring transducer, unipolar / bipolar, 1 channel,

programmable, Ex/NEx
Required for AB-310 for field voltage measuring on

GMC SINEAX TV809
measuring input Uf

DGB-004-1.04
100VA three phase control transformer PRIM.: 3 x (1.3 x

U ThyNom.), SEC.: 20 V load-less, Yyn0
Required for AB-310 or synchronization voltage

Trafomodern DTZ 0,1 measuring on measuring inputs UsynL1, UsynL2,
UsynL3
SFP Transceiver MultiMode fiber-optic 850nm Supports connections up to 500 m, 1000BASE-SX (1.25
Gbps), Class 1 Laser, 850 nm, LC connector (Duplex),
operation temp. range 0 .. 70 °C. Type: AXGD-5854-
0511
CGB-025--
Required for equipping of CP-300 on terminal X8 - use
pair-wise only!
Characteristic value in Configuration code of device: '1'
SFP Transceiver SingleMode fiber-optic 1310nm Supports connections up to 10 km, 1000BASE-LX (1.25
Gbps), Class 1 Laser, 1310 nm, LC connector (Duplex),
operation temp. range 0 .. 70 °C. Type: AXGD-1354-
0531
CGB-026--
Required for equipping of CP-300 on terminal X8 - use
pair-wise only!
Characteristic value in Configuration code of device: '2'
pointer instrument with moving coil movement Slim

Edgewise Type P144x36
Required for AB-320 for display of rotor - earth isolation

WEIGEL P144x36
resistance via Output AO1
ZELISKO Shaft CT Shaft CT according to plant specific specifications Required for AB-320 in case of shaft current detection

DGB-004-1.04
SIPROTEC 7XT33 20 Hz generator for 100% stator

earth fault protection
Required for AB-320 with function 100% stator earth

SIE+7XT3300-0CA0 fault protection
SIPROTEC 7XT34 20 Hz band-pass filter for 100%

stator earth fault protection
Required for AB-320 with function 100% stator earth

SIE+7XT3400-0CA0 fault protection
NTP Time server
Meinberg LANTIME Time synchronization system with reference time

M900 sources: GPS, DCF77, IRIG, MSF, ...

ABB Miniature CB Art.-No. 2CDS251001R0064
Type S201-C6
For protecting a HIPASE device with one or two PS-500
Power Supply Units.

DGB-004-1.04

ABB Miniature CB Art.-No. 2CDS251001R0024
Type S201-C2
For protecting a HIPASE device with one or two PS-300
Power Supply Units.
Ethernet Cable CAT5 - 30 cm fitting for MEDIUM device
For internal touch panel MEDIUM

T41-257--
TP-900 / TP-910 / TP-920 included at device delivery
Ethernet Cable CAT5 - 50 cm fitting for LARGE device
For internal touch panel LARGE

--
TP-950 / TP-960 / TP-970 included at device delivery
Ethernet Cable CAT6 - 5 m
Required for connection from HIPASE device to

externally mounted touch panel
--
TP-905 / TP-915 / TP-925 or
TP-955 / TP-965 / TP-975

DGB-004-1.04
44. CATALOG OF SOFTWARE LICENSES
44.1. OVERVIEW SOFTWARE LICENSES FOR APPLICATION EXCITATION
ASAP Mat. Contains open POUs

Mat. No.↓ Nomination
Number
EST,
GateControlOut,
SGE-001-- 300618124 EXC Automatic Voltage Regulator GateControlIn,
GateControlSet,
BridgeSupervision
PSS2IF
PSS2LLF
PSS2RF
SGE-002-- EXC Power System Stabilizer PSS2WF
PSS4FB
PSS4IPF
PSS4IWF
DiodeSupervision,
SGE-003-- EXC Diode Failure Detection
DiodeSupervisionSet
SGE-017-- 300618125 EXC Power System Stabilizer Redundant

DGB-004-1.04
44.2. OVERVIEW SOFTWARE LICENSES FOR APPLICATION PROTECTION
ASAP ANSI
Mat. No.↓ Nomination Contains open protective function
Mat. No. Code
SGP-001-- PRT GenDiff 2p 87G Generator differential 2-phases 87G DiffGen2ph
SGP-002-- 300654495 PRT GenDiff 3p 87G Generator differential 3-phases 87G DiffGen3ph
SGP-003-- PRT Diff 2p/2 87T, 87GT Differential 2-systems 2-phases 87T2, 87GT Diff2sys2ph
SGP-005-- PRT Diff 2p/4+ 87T, 87GT Differential 4-systems 2-phases 87T4, 87GT Diff4sys2ph
SGP-006-- 300654521 PRT Diff 3p/2 87T, 87GT Differential 2-systems 3-phases 87T2, 87GT Diff2sys3ph
SGP-010-- PRT Diff 3p/6+ 87T, 87GT Differential 6-systems 3-phases 87T6, 87GT Diff6sys3ph
RestrictedEarthDi
50fast, Restricted earth fault differential 87REF
PRT Restricted Earth ff
SGP-011-- 50TN, Overcurrent fast 1-phase 50fast,50TN,
Fault ovrCurFast1ph
87REF 87REF
50, 51
Overcurrent 3-phases ovrCur3ph
50N, 51N
Overcurrent 1-phase ovrCur1ph
50N, 51N
Overcurrent zero-sequence ovrCurZSeq
50/51, 50, 51
50/51N, Overcurrent inverse 3-phases ovrCurInv3ph
76, 50N, 51N
SGP-012-- 300654504 PRT Current Overcurrent inverse 1-phase ovrCurInv1ph
50/51DC,
37, 37N, 76, 50DC,
Overcurrent DC ovrCurDC
37DC 51DC
Undercurrent 3-phases udrCur3ph
37
Undercurrent 1-phase udrCur1ph
37N
Undercurrent DC udrCurDC
37DC
PRT Current Overcurrent direction 3-phases 67 ovrCurDir3ph

SGP-013-- 67, 67N
Directional Overcurrent direction 1-phase 67N ovrCurDir1ph
Overload 3-phases 49 ovrLoad3ph

SGP-014-- 300654497 PRT Overload 49, 38 Overload 1-phase 49 ovrLoad1ph
Over temperature 38 ovrTemp
PRT Current 51V,

SGP-015-- 300654524 Overcurrent voltage-dependent 51V ovrCurVltDep
Dependent 51/27,

DGB-004-1.04
ASAP ANSI
Mat. No. Code
50/27 Overcurrent Undervoltage 51/27 ovrCurUdrVlt

Inadvertent energization 50/27 InadvertEnerg
Negative-sequence current
PRT Negative Phase 46 NegSeqCur
SGP-016-- 300654498 46 Negative-sequence current
Sequence 46 NegSeqCurInv
inverse
Overvoltage 3-phases 59 ovrVlt3ph

Overvoltage 1-phase 59,59N ovrVlt1ph
59, 59N, Overvoltage zero-sequence 59N ovrVltZSeq

59DC, 27,
SGP-017-- 300654499 PRT Voltage Overvoltage DC 59DC ovrVltDc
27, 27N,
27DC Undervoltage 3-phases 27 udrVlt3ph
Undervoltage 1-phase 27,27N udrVlt1ph
Undervoltage DC 27DC udrVltDc
Overfrequency 81o ovrFrq

SGP-018-- 300654500 PRT Frequency 81o, 81u
Underfrequency 81u udrFrq
SGP-019-- PRT Impedance 2p 21 Underimpedance 1-phase 21 udrImp1ph
SGP-020-- 300654505 PRT Impedance 3p 21 Underimpedance 3-phases 21 udrImp3ph
Active-power overdetection 1-
SGP-021-- PRT Power 2p 32, 37 32o ovrPwrAct1ph
phase
Active-power overdetection 3-
phases
32o ovrPwrAct3ph
Active-power underdetection 3-
SGP-022-- 300654501 PRT Power 3p 32, 37 32r, 37 udrPwrAct3ph
phases
32r, 37 udrPwrAct1ph
Active-power underdetection 1-
phase
PRT Underexcitation
SGP-023-- 40 Underexcitation 1-phase 40 udrExc1ph
2p
Underexcitation 3-phases 40 udrExc2ph

PRT Underexcitation
SGP-024-- 300654506 40, 78 Underexcitation MHO 3-phases 40 udrExcMHO3ph
3p
Slip counter 78/40 SlipCounter
Volts-per-Hertz 24 VltPerHz
SGP-025-- PRT Overfluxing 24
Volts-per-Hertz inverse 24 VltPerHzInv
SGP-026-- 300654507 PRT LoadDiagram 78 Out-of-Step 78 OutOfStep

DGB-004-1.04
ASAP ANSI
Mat. No. Code
StatorEarthStabC
Stator earth fault stabilized ur
current detection 64G
Stator earth fault stabilized StatorEarthStabVl
voltage detection 64G t
Stator earth fault 3rd harmonics
1-phase 64G StatorEarth3rd1p
h
SGP-027-- 300654508 PRT Stator Earth Fault 64G, 67N Stator earth fault 3rd harmonics
3-phases 64G
StatorEarth3rd3p
Overvoltage 3rd harmonics 1- h
phase 64G
Undervoltage 3rd harmonics 1- 64G ovrVlt3rd1ph
phase
64G,67N udrVlt3rd1ph
Stator earth fault direction
StatorEarthDir
Stator earth fault 20Hz StatorEarth20Hz

PRT Stator Earth Fault resistance (AB) 64G Res
SGP-028-- 64G
20Hz Stator earth fault 20Hz 64G StatorEarth20HzI
impedance mp
SGP-029-- 300654520 PRT Rotor Earth Fault 64R Rotor earth fault 64R RotorEarth
SGP-032-- 300654502 PRT Breaker Failure 50BF Breaker failure 50BF BrkFail
SGP-033-- PRT SFC Earth Fault 64SFC SFC earth fault 64SFC SfcEarth
SGP-034-- PRT Shaft Current 50/51SH Shaft overcurrent 50SH, 51SH ovrCurShaft
PRT Low Frequency

SGP-035-- 50LF Overcurrent low-frequency 50LF ovrCurLF
Over Current
SGP-036-- PRT Decoupling 81roc Frequency rate of change 81roc FrqROC
74CT, Monitoring current 2-phases 74CT MonCur2ph

SGP-039-- PRT Supervision 2p
74VT Monitoring voltage 2-phases 74VT MonVlt2ph
Monitoring current 3-phases

74CT MonCur3ph
74CT, Monitoring voltage 3-phases
SGP-040-- 300654509 PRT Supervision 3p 74VT MonVlt3ph
74VT, 60
Monitoring voltage-voltage 3-
74VT,60 MonVltVlt3ph
phases
Mechanical fault 94 MechFault
Mechanical fault fast 94 MechFaultFast
Digital signal 94 DigSig
Monitoring trip-circuit 74TC MonTrpCir

DGB-004-1.04
Special Software Licenses Protection
Contains open protective

Mat. No.↓ ASAP Mat. No. Nomination ANSI Code
function
SGP-043-- PRT Shaft Current Device 50SH
SGP-047-- PRT Shaft Current Package 50SH
PRT Rotor Earth Fault 64R

SGP-048--
Package

DGB-004-1.04
44.3. OVERVIEW SOFTWARE LICENSES FOR COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS
Mat. No.↓ ASAP- Mat. No. Nomination Contains open POU
SGB-050-- COM IEC 60870-5-103
SGB-051-- 300618126 COM IEC 60870-5-104 Ed. 2.0
SGB-052-- COM IEC MODBUS-TCP
SGB-053-- COM IEC 61850 Ed. 2.0

DGB-004-1.04
45. READER´S REACTIONS
We designed and compiled this manual with great care and a high degree of responsibility. It is our goal to design it
in a way that it will be of greatest possible use at your work.
In order to reach this goal, we also rely on your cooperation - especially where maintenance and care of the
manual are concerned.
To make this cooperation easier for you, we added a form to this section. Please make use of it.
We will consider your comments in the next update of the manual.
Thank you very much for your cooperation!

DGB-004-1.04
Form for Readers' Reactions

Your comments and suggestions will help us to further improve both quality and usefulness of this
manual. Thank you very much for your efforts!
Please fill in this questionaire and return it to us; we will send you the next update of this manual free of
charge as soon as it is available.
What is your impression of this manual? Do you think it is complete, correct and accurate, well-structured, written in
a comprehensible language, etc.?
........................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................
Which parts, characteristics, aspects are particularly useful?
........................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................
Does this manual meet the requirements that may reasonably be demanded? Does it come up to your
expectations?
........................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................
Did you find any mistakes in this manual? If so, please use form on the backside.

DGB-004-1.04
Correction Sheet
Sender: ..............................................................................................
..............................................................................................
..............................................................................................
Date: ..............................................................................................
Name of the document: ..............................................................................................
Version of the document: ..............................................................................................
Please correct the following items in the above documentation:
page wrong text should be...
For in-house use only: Korrigiert von:

Datum:

DGB-004-1.04
................................................. fold here for windowed envelope ......................................................
Please send a copy of this sheet (front and back) to the below address.
ANDRITZ HYDRO GmbH
Automation Product Management
Eibesbrunnergasse 20
A-1120 Vienna, Austria

DGB-004-1.04

HIPASE - Datasheets-Description of System Components PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

HIPASE - Datasheets-Description of System Components PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

HIPASE Datasheets

Description of System Components

© 2019 by ANDRITZ HYDRO GmbH

This document is valid for following product:

HIPASE Platform as of V 1.06.00

© 2019 by ANDRITZ HYDRO GmbH, All Rights reserved.

HIPASE | Hardware Datasheets

2.1. Content structure of the present Data Sheets ............................................................................... 19

3.1. HIPASE Device - Product Code .................................................................................................... 21

5.1. Name Plate of Device .................................................................................................................... 40

6.1. EC Declaration of Conformity ........................................................................................................ 47

8. MT BF C A LC UL AT IO N ( M E AN T IM E BETW EEN F A IL UR E) ............................52

HIPASE | Hardware Datasheets

9. A LL H I P A SE H A RDW ARE C O M PO N ENT S ...................................................53

10 . B A SI C FU NCT IO N S I N H AR DW ARE CO M PO NE NT S ....................................57

11.1. Features ......................................................................................................................................... 59

HIPASE | Hardware Datasheets

11.16. Connection for Shield Grounding................................................................................................... 91

12 . A B- 32 0 A P P LI C AT IO N B O A R D PR O T ECT IO N ................................ .............95

12.1. Features ......................................................................................................................................... 95

HIPASE | Hardware Datasheets

12.10.2. Data points - Outputs ................................................................................................................... 120

13.1. Features ....................................................................................................................................... 130

HIPASE | Hardware Datasheets

13.12. Equipping options with extension modules .................................................................................. 147

14.1. Features ....................................................................................................................................... 148

15.1. Features ....................................................................................................................................... 164

HIPASE | Hardware Datasheets

15.4. Speed measurement with tooth wheel ........................................................................................ 171

16.1. Features ....................................................................................................................................... 184

17.1. Features ....................................................................................................................................... 195

18.1. Features ....................................................................................................................................... 199

HIPASE | Hardware Datasheets

19.1. Features ....................................................................................................................................... 203

20.1. Features ....................................................................................................................................... 213

21.1. Features ....................................................................................................................................... 221

HIPASE | Hardware Datasheets

21.8. Accessories, Spare parts ............................................................................................................. 232

22.1. Features ....................................................................................................................................... 235

23.1. Features ....................................................................................................................................... 248

24.1. Features ....................................................................................................................................... 259

HIPASE | Hardware Datasheets

24.3. Technical Data ............................................................................................................................. 260

25.1. Features ....................................................................................................................................... 265

26.1. Features ....................................................................................................................................... 268

27.1. Features ....................................................................................................................................... 274

28 . T R- 30 0 T R A N SFO R M ER B O AR D 4 CT , 4VT ............................................... 27 7

28.1. Features ....................................................................................................................................... 277

HIPASE | Hardware Datasheets

28.8. Terminal assignment of VT terminal strip (X2) ............................................................................ 286

29 . T R- 31 0 T R A N SFO R M ER B O AR D 1 2CT , 8 VT ................................ ............. 28 8

29.1. Features ....................................................................................................................................... 288

30.1. Voltage transformers ................................................................................................................... 301

31.1. Possible polarity information on transformers ............................................................................. 303

32.1. Term Definitions ........................................................................................................................... 306

HIPASE | Hardware Datasheets

33.1. Currently supported station bus interfaces .................................................................................. 308

34.1. General ........................................................................................................................................ 310

35.1. General ........................................................................................................................................ 314

36 . ST AT IO N BU S PRO T O CO L – MO D B U S T C P ................................ ............. 34 3

36.1. Requirements for use .................................................................................................................. 343

HIPASE | Hardware Datasheets

37.1. Definition of LEDs V1 .. V4 .......................................................................................................... 366